RIFLE COMPANY, INFANTRY REGIMENT Army Field Man… · furnished to each rifle platoon for use in sniping. (See FM 23-10.) This rifle is employed by an individual desig-nated by the

,CA7 7-,.'

Copy3 3

WAR DEPAR7

TMENT FIELD MANUAL

INFANTRY

RIFLE COMPANY,

INFANTRY REGIMENT

WAR DEPARTMENT 18 MARCH 14

U. S. Army Military History InsfiftueW.i R DEPARTMENT FIELD MA N UA L

FM 7-10

This manual .upersides FM 7-10, 2 j]un 1942, in-eluding C. 21 Dermbr 1942, and C2, 5 April 1943.

INFANTRY

RIFLE COMPANY,

INFANTRY

WA 4 Dt KI ' MEN T

REGIMENt "

* I;MlR Ci 1 9 4 4

<~l a·~*~1-.*5 .c

RESTRICTED DISSEMINATION OF RESTRICTED MdT-TER. The information co tained in restricted documents and thc cssentialcharacteristics of restricted material may be given to any person known tobe in the service of the United States and to persons of undoubted loyaltyand discretion who ar.e coperating in Government work, but will not becommunicated to the public or ththe press except by authorized militarypublic relations agencies. (See alo par. 18b, AR 380-5, 28 Sep 1942,)

Unittd Ses Govrnmen Printing OffiR'Thington 1944

WAR DEPARTMENT,WASHINGTON 25, D. C., 18 March 1944.

FM 7-10, Infantry Field Manual, Rifle Company, In-fantry Regiment, is published for the information andguidance of all concerned.

[A.G. 300.7 (1 Feb 44).]BY ORDER OF THE SECRETARY OF WAR:

G. C. MARSHALL,Chief of Staff.

OFFICIAL:

J. A. ULIO,Major General,

The Adjutant General.DISTRIBUTION:

C and H 2-7, 17-19, 44 (2); IC 2, 5, 7, 44 (10).(For explanation of symbols see FM 21-6.)

CONTENTS

CHAPTER 1. General.....................Pargr.p6h Page

1- 14 1

CHAPTER 2.Section 1.

IIH.III.IV.

V.VI.

Vll.pill.

IX.X.

Xl


II.III.IV.

Offensive combat.Approach march ...............Reconnaissance, plans, and orders.The attack .....................Reserve rifle company in attack...Night attack ..................Infiltration .....................

Attack in woods .............Attack of towns and villages....Attack of river line.............

Attack of fortified position.......Raids .........................

Defensive combat.General.Front-line rifle company in defenseReserve rifle company in defense.Retrograde movements .........

CHAPTER 4. Security missions ...........


II.II.IV.

V.

Rifle platoon.GeneralAttack .........................Defense.Security missions ...............Sniping ........................

15- 1819- 2324- 3031- 3435- 3940- 4445- 48

4950- 61

6263- 65

2030475962748i84849191

9497

109113

121

66-72-85-9-1-

71849398

99-107

108-113114-118119-134135-140

141

136137154160164

Pargragphs PageCHAPTER 6. Rifle squad.

Section 1. General ........................ 142-148 165II.

HIr.IV.


II.In.


I.III.

AttackDefense .............Security missions ..............

Weapons platoon.General .A ttack .........................Defense .

Administration.Supply ... .... ..............Medical service and evacuation...Motor maintenance

149-157158-161165-175

176-185183-197198-209

210-215216-220

221

CHAPTER 9. Signal communication system............ ....................... 222-227

Appendix I. Individual protection ............II. Directives for tactical training of

rifle company .................Index ..................................

224230231

233236

260306

This manual uperspedes FM 7-10, 2 June 1942, in-cluding C 1, 21 December 1942; and C 2, 5 April 1943.

CHAPTER 1

GENERAL

1. COMPOSITION. a. General. The rifle company is thebasic infantry unit with administrative and supply func-tions. The company consists of a company headquarters,three rifle platoons, and one weapons platoon. (See fig. 1.)

b. Company headquarters. Company headquarters in-cludes the personnel necessaiy to assist the company com-mander in performing his tactical, administrative, andsupply duties. It is divided into -(1) COMMAND, GROUP. Company commander, sec-ond-in-command, first sergeant, communication sergeant,bugler, and messengers.(2) ADMINISTRATIVE GROUP. Supply sergeant andarmorer-artificer; mess sergeant, cooks, and cooks' helpers;company clerk.

c. Rifle platoon. The rifle platoon consists of a platoonheadquarters (command group) and three rifle squads.

d. Weapons platoon. The weapons platoon consists of aplatoon headquarters (command group), one 60-mm mor-tar section, and one light machine-gun section.

2. INDIVIDUAL WEAPONS. a. General. Individual wea-pons are the rifle, bayonet, carbine, pistol, hand grenades,and rifle grenades. For description and characteristics, seeFM 23-5, 23-7, 23-10, 23-15, 23-25, 23-30, and 23-35.

<I.

Figure 1. Composition of a rifle company

b. Rifle and bayonet. (I) RIFLE MI. The M1 rifle isthe principal individual weapon assigned to rifle com-pany personnel. On account of its long range, ease ofoperation, and light weight it is well adapted for use inall types of infantry combat. These characteristics enablea rifleman or group of riflemen to deliver promptly alarge volume of accurate fire upon any designated groundand air targets within range.

2

(2) RIFLE M1903A4. One MIS903A4 rifle, equipped witha telescopic sight mounted directly over the receiver, isfurnished to each rifle platoon for use in sniping. (SeeFM 23-10.) This rifle is employed by an individual desig-nated by the platoon leader to act as a sniper. (See par.141.)(3) BAYONET. The bayonet is a weapon of close com-bat. Thorough training in its use gives the infantrymanconfidence in his ability to close with the enemy.

c. Carbine. The carbine furnishes fires of greater vol-ume and accuracy than the pistol. Its effective range is 300yards. It is used to protect the personnel of crew-servedweapons, and as an individual weapon by personnel towhom it is issued.

d. Pistol. The automatic pistol is an arm of emergencyand individual defense at ranges up to 50 yards for per-sonnel not armed with the rifle, automatic rifle, or carbine.

e. Hand grenades. The fragmentation hand grenade isused against enemy personnel, especially weapon crews orother small groups so located as to be protected from riflefire and which are inside the minimum range of the high-angle rifle grenade. The fragmentation of the grenade iseffective through a radius of 30 yards.

f. Rifle grenades. (1) Rifle grenades are provided tocombat tanks and other armed vehicles, and for use againstemplacements, buildings, and personnel. Hand-throwngrenades have neither the accuracy nor the range of gre-nades fired from the rifle; hence use of the rifle grenadeis indicated whenever it is necessary to project grenadesthrough small openings, such as apertures of bunkers orwindows of buildings, or whenever it is necessary to reachout to ranges greater than 40 to 50 yards.

(a) Flat-trajectory fire is usually employed against ver-tical targets. When so employed, rifle grenades may be firedfrom any position used for firing the rifle except the sittingand squatting positions.

3

(b) High-angle fire is used against crew-served weaponsor personnel. The rifle, with butt resting on the ground,may be fired from the kneeling or modified sitting posi-tions. Depending on the range desired, the angle of therifle with the ground varies from 30° to 600. In emergen-cies, the rifle may be fired from the shoulder in the stand-ing position, provided the angle of elevation is not morethan 450.(2) ANTIPERSONNEL TYPES. (a) Fragmentation

hand grenade Mk. II with projection adapter M . The pro-jection adapter transforms the hand grenade into a riflegrenade. The maximum ranges are 75 yards for flat-trajec-tory five, and as great as 180 yards for high-angle fire. Thetime fuze becomes armed after the grenade and adapterleave the launcher. For training purposes, the practicehand grenade Mk. II may be used with the projectionadapter.

(b) Impact fragmentation rifle grenade M17. This gre-nade has an impact type fuze which causes explosion uponimpact. It is effective only against personnel. The maxi-mum range for flat-trajectory fire is 75 yards; for high-angle fire the'maximum range is 200 yards. No practicegrenades are provided.

(c) Smoke rifle grenade (WP) T5. This grenade may beused to screen small unit operations. It produces burnssufficiently severe to cause enemy casualtiest The grenadebursts upon impact, scattering the white phosphorouswhich ignites spontaneously.(3) ANTITANK RIFLE GRENADE M9Al. This gre-nade is effective against all known light and mediumtanks; it may also be employed against emplacements andpersonnel. It is equipped with an impact type fuze. Forflat-trajectory fire against vertical targets, considerationsof accurate shooting limit its effectiveness to ranges of notmore than 75 yards. The maximum range in high-anglefire is 260 yards. Practice grenades are provided for instruc-tion in training, marksmanship, and technique of fire.

4

(4) PYROTECHNIC SIGNALS. Pyrotechnic ground sig-nals are equipped with a fin assembly which permits themto be fired from grenade launchers. These grenade groundsignals are particularly valuable in calling for supportingfires, in identifying a unit's location, and in air-groundliaison.(5) GRENADE LAUNCHERS. The launcher on whichthe grenade or ground signal is placed for firing is an ex-tension to the barrel of the rifle or carbine. A device, in-tegral with the launcher, attaches it securely to the muzzleof the weapon.

(a) Launcher M7. This launcher is used with the Mlrifle. The rifle grenade cartridge, caliber .30, M3 (blank)is used. Personnel normally equipped with the grenadelauncher M7 are the communication sergeant, platoonguides, section leader of the light machine-gun section,squad leaders of the light machine-gun squads, assistantsquad leaders of the rifle squads, two additional men ineach rifle squad, and truck drivers.

(b) Launcher M8. This launcher is used with the car-bine. The blank cartridge, caliber .30, M6 is used. In therifle company, the bugler normally is equipped with theM8 launcher.(6) For additional details, see FM 23-30.

3. CREW-SERVED WEAPONS. a. General. Crew-servedweapons are the light machine gun, 60-mm mortar, auto-matic rifle, caliber .50 machine gun, and rocket launcher.For description and characteristics, see FM 23-30, 23-45,23-65, and 23-85.

b. Light machine gun. The light machine gun is used -(1) To supplement rifle fires by placing short, concen-trated bursts of fire upon grouped hostile personnel atmedium or short ranges.(2) To protect flanks.(3) In defense, to supplement the fires of heavy machineguns.

S

(4) To engage lightly armored vehicles such as armoredpersonnel carriers, armored cars, and scout cars.

c. 60-mm mortar. (1) The 60-mm mortar may be em.ployed against targets up to its maximum range of 1,985yards, but accuracy is materially reduced beyond 1,000yards.

SAFETY RULE: 60-mm mortar fire should fall at least100 yards from friendly troops. The distance should beincreased to 200 yards when the mortar is more than 300yards in rear of our own front line. (See FM 23-85.) Ob-servation within voice or arm-and-hand signaling distancefrom the mortar position is necessary for proper fire con-trol.(2) The mortar is used to -

(a) Engage known targets defiladed from flat-trajectoryfire or small areas known or believed to contain suitabletargets.

(b) Fire on observed targets of grouped personnel orcrew-served weapons.

d. Automatic rifle. The automatic rifle provides therifle squad leader with an easily controlled and maneu-vered weapon capable of a large volume of fire. It is usedagainst ground targets in a manner similar to the lightmachine gun, and also engages air targets. Its light weightpermits the automatic rifleman to maintain the rate of,advance of riflemen and to fire from any position.

e. Machine gun, HB, caliber .50, M2, flexible. The pri-mary use of the caliber .50 machine gun provided forplatoon headquarters of the weapons platoon is the anti-aircraft defense of the organic transport; its secondary useis for the local protection of the organic transport fromground attack. For conditions governing antiaircraft fire,see paragraph 12c (3).

f. Antitank rockets, 2.36-inch. (1) Rocket launchersand high explosive rockets are provided primarily for useagainst armored vehicles; secondary targets are crew-servedweapons, embrasures, pillboxes, and grouped personnel.

6

Rockets are also effective against buildings and masonry.However, ammunition must be conserved to insure effec-tive use against primary targets.(2) For necessary assistance in loading and reloading,rocket-launchers are normally operated by teams of twomen each. Selected individuals will be specially trainedto function as rocket teams and all members of the com-pany will be given sufficient training to familiarize themwith the use of rockets and with the care and cleaning oflaunchers. A practice rocket is provided for instruction inmechanical use, marksmanship, estimation of leads, andtechnique of fire. The rocket may be fired from the prone,standing, sitting, or kneeling positions; it may also be firedfrom the pit foxhole and pit type emplacements. (SeeFM 23-30 and app. L.)(3) The performance of the high explosive rocket is gen-erally similar to that of the antitank rifle grenade, exceptthat the effect is approximately 30 percent greater for therocket than for the grenade. The rocket is reasonably accu-rate against moving targets at ranges up to 300 yards andagainst an area target up to 650 yards. In order to achievegreater accuracy and assist in effecting surprise, fire againstmoving targets should be withheld until the last prac-ticable moment.(4) Rocket launchers will normally be carried on theweapon carriers. During marches and in the approachmarch, until the mortars and the light machine guns areremoved from carriers, the company commander desig-nates two men to ride each weapon carrier and functionas a two-man rocket team in case of mechanized attack orman the machine gun mounted on each weapon carrierin case of air attack.(5) When weapons have been removed from carriers, thecompany commander assigns the launchers in the mannerwhich will most effectively further his mission. In theattack, where the terrain favors counterattack by tanks,rocket teams should be near that part of the company most

I

threatened by such a counterattack. During reorganizationafter an attack, and in the defense, they should be placednear the perimeter of the company to cover the most likelyavenues of mechanized approach. The company com-mander will coordinate the use of rocket teams with anyother nearby antitank weapons; when used against sec-ondary targets, he coordinates their fires with those ofother weapons of the company.(6) Since personnel designated to operate rocket launch-

ers will normally function in their primary duties until athreat of mechanized attack becomes imminent or useagainst a secondary target is indicated, timely warningmust be received (see par. 12a) in order that rocket teamsmay secure their launchers and ammunition and move topositions assigned by the company commander. In bothoffensive and defensive combat, likely avenues of ap-proach for armored vehicles should be reconnoitered, andpositions for rocket teams selected and prepared as soonas their primary duties will permit. Owing to the com-paratively short sight radius, great care should be takento select and assume good firing positions.(7) In addition to its use as a projectile when fired fromthe launcher, the rocket may be prepared for firing elec-trically and used as an improvised antitank mine. (SeeFM 23-30.)

4. TYPES OF POSITIONS FOR LIGHT MACHINE GUNS AND60-MM MORTARS. a. Firing positions. (1) Firing positionsoccupied by the light machine gun and the 60-mm mortarto cover assigned sectors of fire or target areas are classi-fied as -

(a) Primary position. The firing position offering thebest conditions for the accomplishment of the mission ofthe weapon.

(b) Alternate position. A firing position from whichthe same fire missions can be executed as from the primaryposition. The route from the primary position to the alter-

s

nate position should permit movement of the weapons byhand and afford concealment and cover from enemy obser-vation and fire. The alternate position should be locatedat such distance from the primary position as to be outsidethe effective radius of fires specifically directed on theprimary position.

(c) Supplementary position. A firing position fromwhich the weapon can accomplish secondary fire missionswhich cannot be accomplished from primary or alternatepositions.(2) An enemy will search for locations of machine guns.Dust clouds caused by firing and muzzle blast disclose thegun location. Wet cloth, such as burlap, when available,or dampening the earth beneath the muzzle will aid inreducing dust clouds. Positions can often be found whichafford complete protection from hostile observation exceptfrom the direction in which the gun is firing. Such posi-tions are found on the sides of hills and behind mounds,in or behind buildings, brush, and similar obstructions.(3) The curved trajectory of the mortar enables it to be

fired from defilade. Because of its low relief, minor terrainfeatures (such as shell holes, ditches, or small hillocks) af-ford some cover. Advantage is taken of vegetation to con-ceal the mortar from observation.(4) Individual protection for weapons and personnel will

be sought and improved, or prepared whenever troops arehalted in a combat zone. This applies equally for all pri-mary, alternate, or supplementary positions as well astemporary locations of men and weapons during the at-tack. (See app. I.)

b. Cover positions. (1) Whenever practicable, leadersselect cover positions affording defilade and concealmentfor men and weapons not actively engaged with the enemy.(2) In attack, the cover position should be immediatelyin rear of the firing position of the rifle squad or the crew-served weapon. (See fig. 3.)

9

(3) In defense, the cover position is located near, and isoccupied after, firing positions are prepared. Lacking suit-able natural cover, appropriate substitutes may be con-structed. Sentinels are posted at the primary firing positionto give warning of hostile approach.

c. Off-carrier position. The off-carrier position is thepoint at which the weapons of the weapons platoon, aninitial supply of their ammunition, and accessories areremoved from the carrier and from which these are movedby hand to the firing or cover position. The off-carrierposition should afford defilade and concealment for car-riers and men. (See fig. 3.)

5. EQUIPMENT. For equipment of the rifle company, seecurrent Table of Organization and Equipment.

6. TRANSPORTATION. a. The organic transportation ofthe rifle company consists of two V¼-ton trucks and two

4-ton trailers, hereinafter referred to as weapon carriers,which transport the weapons and ammunition of theweapons platoon. For their employment in ammunitionsupply, see paragraph 214.

b. The battalion trains (the battalion section of thetransportation platoon of the service company FM 7-30)transport the kitchen equipment, rations, water, clothingnot required by individuals, extra ammunition for issueprior to combat, and certain operating personnel.

7. TACTICAL EMPLOYMENT. a. The rifle company is em-ployed in accordance with the battalion commander'splan. The company commander bases his plan upon themission assigned in the battalion order and coordinatesthe action of his platoons and the fires of all weapons athis disposal. The rifle company may be assigned to theforward echelon or to the battalion reserve. The companycommander must keep the battalion commander fullyinformed of the situation on the front of the company.

10

First contact with the enemy and new identifications arealways reported by the most rapid means available. Duringpauses in combat, the company commander makes a briefcombat report to battalion headquarters concerning anyimportant change in the situation. In addition, a reportis made upon reaching an objective, or upon committingthe company support to action.

b. When the company is acting alone, it is employed asdirected by the commander who assigned the company itsmission. The company commander will, of necessity, haveto make more decisions on his own initiative than he willwhen operating with his battalion. His major decisions, aswell as frequent reports of location and progress, are sub-mitted promptly to the higher commander.

c. The company commander is responsible for recon-naissance in the company area of operations and for thesecurity of his company.

8. ESTIMATE OF SITUATION. An estimate of the situationis the process of reasoning by which a commander arrivesat a plan of action to carry out his mission. The companycommander analyzes, with respect to his mission, the ter-rain, the dispositions of friendly and hostile troops, therelative strength of his own unit and the enemy, and theassistance he can reasonably expect from supporting oradjacent troops. From this analysis he determines whatplans are open to him to accomplish his mission and whatare the enemy capabilities of interfering. He then opposeseach of his plans by each of the enemy capabilities, andthereby determines which of his plans is most likely tosucceed no matter what action the enemy takes. For unitsas small as the rifle company, the estimate is comparativelybrief and simple. It is based upon available intelligence,amplified by personal reconnaissance and the reconnais-sance of subordinate leaders and patrols. The estimate ofthe situation culminates in a decision which expressesconcisely what the commander intends to do with his com-pany. (See FM 101-5.)

11

9. DUTIES OF COMPANY COMMANDER. a. General. Thecommander is responsible for the discipline, administra-tion, supply, training, tactical employment, and control ofhis company. He is responsible that his company is trainedto accomplish its combat tasks decisively; to function asan effective unit in the military team. He must anticipateand plan in order to prepare his company for prospectivemissions; his supervision must be continuous to insureihat all subordinates properly execute their part in thecompany task. Decision as to a specific course of action ishis responsibility in conformity with orders from higherheadquarters. While he may accept advice and suggestionsfrom any of his subordinates, he alone is responsible forwhat his unit does or fails to do.

b. Orders. (I) Having decided upon a detailed plan ofaction to carry out an assigned mission, the company com-mander must assign specific missions to his subordinateunits. Company orders are usually issued orally to theleaders concerned or as oral or written messages. Sketchesare furnished when practicable. Prior to combat, subordi-nates frequently can be assembled to receive the order.This facilitates orientation prior to issuance of orders andenables the company commander to insure that his ordersare understood. (See FM 7-40.)(2) Whenever practicable, the order is issued at a point

from which terrain features of importance to subordinatescan be pointed out. In attack, this often will be imprac-ticable because of hostile observation and fires. If time islimited and leaders are separated, the company com-mander will issue his orders in fragmentary form. Leadersof units which are engaged with the enemy are not calledaway from their units for the purpose of receiving orders.

c. During combat. During combat the primary duties ofthe company commander are to -(1) Know where the enemy is, and what he is capable of

doing.(2) Keep informed of the situation on his front and flanks.

12

(3) Anticipate the needs of his platoons for supportingfires, employ the supporting weapons under his control toprovide such of these fires as is practicable, and call onthe battalion commander for additional supporting fireswhenever the situation demands it. In calling for suchfires, he specifies the target, and also indicates when andfor how long such fire is desired.(4) Insure mutual support and cooperation by the sub-ordinate elements of his company.(5) Assist adjacent companies whenever this can be done

without detriment to the accomplishment of his own mis-sion.(6) Insure continuous all-around protection of his com-pany.(7) Control the company support prior to its commit-ment, and then employ it to accomplish the companymission, or to exploit a favorable situation developed bythe success of his own or adjacent units.(8) Insure proper execution of his orders by supervision,

and prompt intervention when required.(9) Control the employment of company transportationwithin the company area, and insure the timely replenish-ment of ammunition.(10) Keep the battalion commander informed, by fre-quent reports, of the situation of his company and of allinformation obtained of the enemy.

10. INFANTRY-ARTILLERY COORDINATION. Usually aforward observer from the direct support artillery bat-talion will be assigned the mission of observing for a riflecompany. The forward observer is not attached to theinfantry unit for which he is observing; he goes where hecan best accomplish his mission. He will keep the com-mander of the infantry unit in whose zone he is operating,or for whom he is observing, informed of his location.Likewise the infantry commander must keep the forwardobserver informed of his locations and dispositions. The

13

forward observer and the supported infantry commanderare mutually responsible that the necessary contact andliaison are maintained.

11. COMPANY HEADQUARTERS. a. Groups. The mem-bers of company headquarters are grouped, according tothe nature of their duties, into the command group andthe administration group.

b. Duties of command group. (1) The company com-mander employs his command group primarily to assisthim in making the necessary preparations for employinghis company in combat and in controlling the companyduring combat. (See par. 9.)(2) The second-in-command (first lieutenant) keeps

abreast of the tactical situation as it affects the company,replaces the company commander should the latter be-come a casualty, and performs any other duty, assigned himby the company commander. During combat, he is incharge of the command post until he assumes commandof the company or of a platoon. He maintains communi-cation with the cdmpany and battalion commanders. Henotifies the battalion commander of changes in locationof the command post, usually by sending a new messengerto relieve the messenger previously sent to the battalioncommand post. (See (6) below.) He is frequently maderesponsible for controlling the movement of weapon car.riers within the company area, and for the resupply ofammunition to platoons in compliance with general in-structions issued by the company commander. (See par.214.)(3) The first sergeant assists the company commander bythe performance of any duties which the latter may assignhim. During combat his duties may vary from handlingadministrative and supply matters to commanding a pla-toon, if casualties make this necessary. Ordinarily, he as-sists the second-in-command as directed, is in charge of thecommand post when no officer is present, and takes over

the communication and administrative duties of the sec-ond-in-command when he leaves the command post.(4) The communication sergeant is trained in the use of

radiotelephones, sound-powered telephones, and visualsignals (including pyrotechnics), in the preparation ofsketches and overlays, and as an observer. He assists thecompany commander in observation and control. He su-pervises all visual signals, assists in organizing observationover the company front, and supervises the installationand operation of company sound-powered telephoneequipment or other technical signaling equipment madeavailable to the company. He receives and dispatches themessengers and agents who are with the company com-mander and performs such other duties as the companycommander directs.(5) The bugler is trained as an observer and is employed

to assist the company commander in observation andcontrol.(6) All messengers are also trained as observers. One mes-

senger accompanies the company commander, assists himin observation and control, and carries messages to thecommand post or other company elements. One messengeris sent to the battalion command post as soon as the bat-talion develops for combat. Other company messengersremain at the command post to carry messages as directed.(7) Upon deployment of the company, one messenger

from each platoon reports.to the company command post;when the sections of the weapons platoon operate inde-pendently, this platoon sends two messengers. Frequently,a liaison agent from the battalion heavy weapons companyreports to the rifle company commander.

c. Duties of administration group. For duties of theadministration group, see chapter 8.

12. STANDARD MEASURES FOR ANTIMECHANIZED DE-FENSE AND ANTIAIRCRAFT SECURITY.

a. Warning system. Timely warning is a vital factor inreducing losses from air or mechanized attack. As required

16

by the situation, air-antitank guards are detailed for theprotection of the company, or to protect separate platoons.These guards are assigned sectors of observation.

b. Standard warning signal. (1) In transmitting warn-ing of the approach or presence of hostile aircraft or mech-anized vehicles, air-antitank guards, or other personnelengaged on security missions, use the following signals:

Three long blasts of a whistle, vehicular horn, siren,or klaxon repeated several times;

Three equally spaced shots with a rifle, automaticrifle, carbine, or pistol; or

Three short bursts from a machine gun or sub-machine gun.

(2) To indicate "Enemy tanks in sight," the followingvisual signal is used (see FM 22-5):

The soldier, with the fist, strikes his rifle or carbineseveral times between the upper sling swivel andthe front sight.

(3) In daylight, the individual giving the signal pointsin the direction of impending danger. At night, the warn-ing signal is supplemented by voice warning to indicate thedirection of danger.(4) All organic means of communication are immediatelyemployed to transmit the warning signal throughout thecompany or separate platoon.

c. Action in case of attack. (1) GENERAL. (a) Uponreceipt of warning of hostile airor mechanized attack, foottroops on the march clear the road, disperse, and takecover. In any situation when the halt is expected to bebrief troops utilize nearby holes or ditches for individualprotection; they take advantage of any nearby obstaclesto tank movement. Weapon carriers, if with the company,clear the probable impact area of air attack and moveinto suitable nearby locations which provide obstacles totank movement.

(b) Whenever the situation becomes stabilized tem-porarily, troops dig intrenchments for their individual

16

protection and emplacements for their weapons. (Seeapp. I.)(2) ANTIMECHANIZED FIRE. (a) When attacked by

armored vehicles, primary targets are hostile foot troops,or exposed personnel riding on or closely following ar-mored vehicles. Infantry small-arms fire is relatively in-effective against the armor of armored vehicles; however,under favorable conditions, the cumulative effect ofarmor-piercing ammunition may be effective against tanksprockets, bogie wheels, and track suspension. Foe the mostpart, when hostile infantry does not afford a target, small-arms fire will be directed against armored vehicle crewswho seek to operate with open turrets, doors, and visionslits in order to improve their field of view. In no circum-stances will defending infantry be diverted from its basicmission of engaging and destroying hostile infantry.

(b) Defenders employing small-arms fire against theaccompanying infantry, or employing antitank rifle gre-nades, rockets, and small-arms fire against hostile armoredvehicles, will continue to fire until forced to take cover toprotect themselves and their weapons from the crushingaction of such vehicles. They return to their firing posi-tions as soon as the tanks have passed, to fire on approach-ing foot troops or exposed personnel'riding on or closelyfollowing other attacking tanks.(3) ANTIAIRCRAFT FIRE. Fire will not be delivered

on any aircraft unless it is clearly recognized as hostile, oris positively identified as hostile, or unless the aircraftattacks with bombs or gunfire. Concealment and camou-flage are used whenever possible to prevent detection byenemy aircraft. If concealment is believed to have beenachieved, no weapons are fired at approaching enemy air-craft. However, when concealment does not exist or in caseof an attack by hostile airplanes, fires are then openedupon command or prearranged signal of the companycommander or other unit leader, as soon as the attackingairplanes are within effective range.

17

d. References. Active and passive measures for anti-mechanized defense and antiaircraft security will vary withthe situation. Various situations are discussed in para-graphs 16a and c (approach march); le (assembly area):21i (attack); and 79, 80, 92, and 93 (defense).

13. ROUTE MARCH. a. General. The rifle company nor-mally moves as an element of the battalion in route col-umn until the battalion is developed. The commandgroup is usually formed as a squad and marches at thehead 'of the company. The weapons platoon, less weaponcarriers and accompanying personnel, normally marchesin rear of the last rifle platoon. The weapon carriersusually move with other motor transportation in rear ofthe battalion or regimental foot column. Antiaircraft de-fense will be provided for organic transport by the caliber.50 machine gun mounted on one of the weapon carriers.During marches and in the approach march, until themortars and the light machine guns are removed fromcarriers, one of the light machine guns will be mountedon the other weapon carrier for antiaircraft fires. Thecompany commander designates two men to ride eachweapon carrier to man these machine guns in case of airattack and to function as a two-man rocket team in caseof mechanized attack. (See par. 3e and f.)

b. Daylight march. During a daylight march, unlessotherwise directed, the company marches in column oftwos, one file on each side of the road. The company com-mander continuously studies the terrain so that he candeploy his company in suitable formation quickly. Herequires his officers and noncommissioned officers to en-force march discipline and to prevent straggling. Theleading company commander maintains the rate of marchprescribed by the battalion commander; other companycommanders regulate the rate of march so as to retaintheir proper position in the column. Ordinarily, the corn

18

pany commander is at the head of his company; however,he goes wherever his duties require.

c. Night march. At night, the company commandertakes special measures to insure march discipline, mainte-nance of contact, and provision for security. Special atten-tion is given to the avoidance of lights and noise. Unitsare kept well closed up and distances are greatly reduced.If illuminated by flares from hostile aircraft, the companyhalts and all individuals keep their heads down and re-main motionless until the light dies out. Hostile aircraftare not fired at unless the column is actually attacked andthen only on command or prearranged signal by the unitleader.

14. BIVOUAC. a. Normally, the rifle company bivouacsas part of the battalion or larger unit and is assigned alocation within the battalion bivouac area. The companycommander, or his representative, divides the area amongthe platoons and company headquarters, reserving loca-tions for the company command post, company transport(unless other arrangements have been directed for it),kitchens, and latrines. He selects an emergency assemblypoint to facilitate prompt, orderly movement from thearea if that becomes necessary.

b. The bivouac outpost, air-antitank warning system,and interior guard are provided by the battalion or regi-mental commander. One officer of the company, and onenoncommissioned officer in each platoon, are constantlyon duty. They are especially alert for any indications ofattack by gas, armored vehicles, and aircraft. Foxholes willbe dug for all personnel. (See app. I.) These foxholes (andshelter tents if erected) are concealed from aerial observa-tion. Antitank rifle grenadiers and rocket teams (see par.3f (5) and (6)) are located so as best to protect the entirecompany in case of mechanized attack.

c. For action to be taken against hostile planes or tanks,see paragraph 12c.

CHAPTER 2

OFFENSIVE COMBAT

SECTION IAPPROACH MARCH

15. GENERAL. a. The approach march is conducted tobring the company close to the enemy in readiness foraction and with minimum losses. It begins when the com-pany leaves the route column to deploy as ordered-by thebattalion commander; or in event of sudden emergencyit begins when the company commander deploys on hisown initiative to avoid undue losses. It ends when thecompany reaches a point from which it must engage in afire fight to advance farther without excessive casualties.

b. Approach march formations vary according to thenature of the terrain and the strength of friendly coveringforces.

c. The battalion commander's development order pre-scribes the company's position in the battalion formation.It usually leaves the company dispositions to the companycommander's direction. Usually the battalion order as-signs a zone of advance, a direction of advance with adefinite frontage, or directs regulation of the march on abase company. Successive march objectives may be as-signed.

d. Having received the battalion development order,the company commander issues his own order, usually in

fragmentary form. This should include -(1) Necessary information of the enemy and friendly

troops.(2) Mission, and initial march objective of the company.(3) Distribution of rifle platoons and command group toleading and support echelons; distribution of and mis-sions for elements of weapons platoon; distances betweenunits or echelons; and designation of base unit.(4) Direction (compass bearing or distant landmark) orroute to be followed.(5) March objectives and frontage for leading platoon (s)(usually in daylight march only).(6) Reconnaissance and security measures, including air-antitank guards.(7) Action to be taken in case of ground, air, or mech-anized attack (usually covered in battalion standing oper-ating procedure).(8) Disposition of weapon carriers, if under companycontrol.(9) Position and prospective future movement of thecompany commander.

e The company commander is responsible for theclose-in protection of his company from the instant itleaves the battalion column. When his advance is notcovered by other troops, within view, he sends out scoutsor patrols to precede the company in order to deal withhostile patrols and give warning of hostile occupied locali-ties. Exposed flanks are protected by flank patrols, andcontact is maintained with adjacent units by connectinggroups, taken from the rear rifle platoon (s). (See pars.21i and 171.)

f. The company commander is with or in advance ofhis leading platoon (s). If another company is the basecompany, he has his base platoon guide on that company;otherwise he insures that it maintains the proper directionand rate of march. He assigns additional march objectives,whenever necessary, and makes such changes in direction,

formation, or security and reconnaissance measures asvariations in the terrain, visibility, or tactical situationmay require.

g. Platoon messengers report to the company commandpost as soon as platoons have gained their positions in thecompany formation. (See par. I lb (7).)

h. For antiaircraft defense of organic transport, seeparagraph 13a. For conditions under which antiaircraftfires are delivered, see paragraph 12c (3). When theweapons are off carrier, the drivers employ antitank riflegrenades for the antimechanized defense of their vehiclesand the driver of the vehicle on which the caliber .50machine gun is mounted, mans that weapon in case ofattack by hostile airplanes.

16. APPROACH MARCH BY DAY. a. In daylight, the ap-proach march must be made in formations which provideprotection against artillery fire, attack by ground forces,and air attack; which permit maximum utilization of theterrain for concealment and cover and for protectionagainst mechanized attack; and which enable the com-pany commander to maintain control of his company.Consequently, platoons will be separated laterally, or indepth, or both. On open terrain, platoons may be sepa-rated by as much as 300 yards. In woods, distances andintervals must be decreased until adjacent units are visi-ble, or, if the woods are dense, connecting files or groupsmust be used between platoons. The company commanderdoes not usually prescribe the formation to be takenwithin platoons but promptly corrects any erroneous for-mation taken by them, For platoon dispositions, see para-graphs 114a and 186b.

b. The company commander, assisted by members ofthe command group, conducts continuous personal recon-naissance to locate the best covered routes of advance.Shelled and gassed areas, those exposed to hostile small-arms fire, and points (such as villages, defiles, road junc-

tions, and small woods) likely to have been registeredupon by hostile artillery are avoided, if practicable. Ifareas swept by fire cannot be avoided, they are crossed byrushes of individuals or small groups under control ofsubordinate leaders. The company commander may de-cide to cross dangerous areas (such as roads, crests, orembankments) which are not actually under fire by a rushof the entire company. Otherwise he signals platoon lead-ers to have their platoons proceed individually.

c. Irrespective of the company's position in the bat-talion formation, guards are necessary to give warning ofair or mechanized attack. The company commander'sinitial order assigns sectors of observation to platoons toprovide continuous all-around observation.

d. (1) Regardless of whether or not other forces arein front of the battalion during its approach march, thebattalion and the company are responsible for protectingthemselves and conducting reconnaissance to the frontand flanks. The approach march of the battalion may beconducted with one or more companies in the leadingechelon. A leading company will ordinarily be assigneda zone of advance and be given specific reconnaissanceand security missions. Figure 20 and © shows schemati-cally two formations which may be used by a leadingcompany.(2) The company commander assigns a frontage and one

or more objectives to each leading platoon. These objec-tives include the initial company march objective assignedby the battalion, and other intermediate terrain features(preferably 500 to 600 yards apart) essential for protectingthe remainder of the battalion and covering any prepara-tions for attack.(3) Leading platoons are frequently reinforced by mortar

squads. The weapons platoon, less mortar squads attachedto leading rifle platoons, should be moved by routes andto areas where it can most effectively support the leadingelements. Rifle platoon (s) in the support echelon are

0 0 0 O0o 0 SCOUTS0

0

PATROL ... | PATROL

00 2A IA 0

W WPNA (-) 4,· .6- -6-

60-MM ... 60-MM

VWPtA (-F) ALTE..NATE LOCATION)

O Schematic formation, leading company, approach march

0 SCOUTS 0Q0 o 0 sco 0 o 0

0 0 0 0o 0PATROL PATROL

0 OO O *-o O O

2A F3 4e 0 3A >3

0*.WPOO

® Schematic formation, leading company, approach march

Figure 2

®D Rear echelon-contact maintained with leading company by con-necting files

O Rear echelon crossing dangerous areas

Figure 2-Continued

IA0 ... ~~~~~~0

00 ~ ~ 00Af3 WPNA [(-

moved by bounds so as to take maximum advantage ofconcealment and cover and be favorably disposed to pro-tect the more vulnerable flank of the company.(4) The advance is executed by bounds; each successive

objective should be in the possession of both leading pla-toons before the iear echelon of the company leaves thecover of the preceding objective. A brief halt may be madeat each march objective to check directions and make anynecessary changes in formations or security measures.

e. (1) A rifle company in the rear echelon of the bat-talion maintains contact with the leading company bydouble connecting files. If there is little threat of a hostileattack from a flank, column of platoons (with at least 50yards between platoons) facilitates control and enables theentire company to use a route which provides maximumconcealment and protection:(2) If a hostile attack from one or both flanks is reason-

ably possible, the rifle platoons should be echeloned to-ward the exposed flank or flanks and the weapons platoonshould follow the leading rifle platoon, moving approxi-mately abreast of the rear rifle platoon. (See fig. 2®.)(3) If there is no threat of a hostile attack from a flank

but dangerous areas must be crossed, line of platoons(with platoons separated by such intervals that they can

deploy as skirmishers without overlapping) will enablethese dangerous localities to be crossed in the minimumtime. (See fig. 2®.)(4) The company commander selects successive march ob-

jectives, advances his company by bounds, and limits haltson objectives to a minimum, in the same manner as doesthe commander of the leading company.

17. APPROACH MARCH BY NIGHT. a. At night, mainte-nance of direction, control, and contact between units aremore difficult than in marches by day. Whenever practi-cable, a night march is made along routes which have beenreconnoitered by day. If the march is across country, the

route should be plotted and the march directed by com-pass. A circuitous route which follows easily distinguish-able terrain features is often preferable to one more directbut less clearly marked.

b. The battalion commander prescribes the route orthe direction (by compass bearing) to be followed by theleading company. The company commander is responsiblethat where practicable his route is thoroughly recon-noitered and marked prior to dark. Other company com-manders must similarly reconnoiter and mark the routefrom the point where their companies will leave the bat-talion column to go to their final assembly area or attackposition.

c. The leading company is charged with so regulatingthe rate of march as to insure that contact and controlcan be maintained within the battalion. Companies inrear maintain contact with the unit preceding them bymeans of connecting files.

18. COMPANY IN ASSEMBLY AREA. a. The companymay be ordered to occupy a portion of a battalion assem-bly area. The battalion commander may direct that oneofficer from the battalion and one noncommissioned offi-cer guide from each company precede the battalion to theassembly area, in transportation furnished by the bat-talion. Each guide becomes familiar with his company'sassigned area and rejoins his company commander justprior to the arrival of the company at the entrance to theassembly area. (Usually these details are covered in stand-ing operating procedure.)

b. In order to insure the uninterrupted forward move-ment of units in rear, the company moves into its assignedarea without halting. The company commander can facili-tate this movement by one of the following methods:(1) Direct the company guide to divide the company areainto platoon areas. As the company nears the area, sendone guide forward on foot from each platoon to join the

company guide and locate his platoon area, then to rejoinhis.platoon in time to conduct it promptly into that area.(2) Upon nearing the area, precede his company by a

few hundred yards with the company guide and membersof his command group and spot members of the commandgroup as guides along the route to the company's area.Upon arrival, rapidly reconnoiter the area and divide itinto platoon areas; then meet each platoon at the entranceto the company area and point out the area it is to occupy.. c. Weapon carriers, if under battalion control duringthe approach march, revert to company control in theassembly area. Upon reaching the company area twoguides should be sent back to the entrance to the battalionassembly area to guide the battalion ammunition truckand the company weapon carriers to their location in theassembly area.

d. Platoons should be disposed within the companyarea in accordance with their contemplated future em-ployment.

e. The company commander is responsible that -(1) Immediately upon arrival in the assembly area, troopsand vehicles are as widely dispersed as the size of the areawill permit.(2) Advantage is taken of all natural concealment, and ofevery accident of the terrain, to conceal troops and vehi-cles from hostile aerial or ground observation and to mini-mize the effect of artillery or aerial bombardment.(3) Advantage is taken of all obstacles to tank movement,such as streams, closely spaced stumps, boulders, or largetrees.(4) Each individual not adequately protected by natural

cover digs a foxhole. (See app. I.)(5) Air-antitank guards are posted in accordance withbattalion standing operating procedure.(6) Local security is promptly established to prevent sur-

prise attack by hostile patrols.(7) A disciplinary guard is promptly established to pre-

vent exposure to aerial or ground observation and to main-tain dispersion of all personnel.(8) Antitank rifle grenadiers and two-man rocket teamsare located so as to protect the company against hostilearmored vehicles.(9) Pack rolls, if not previously disposed of, are stackedand concealed in an accessible location as directed by thebattalion commander.(10) If time permits, the physical condition and equip-ment of each individual is checked by his immediate su-perior.(11) Men are given all possible rest.

f. Extra ammunition is issued when ordered by the bat-talion commander. When the battalion truck carrying thisammunition arrives, it is placed in the best available cover.The issuance of this ammunition is so conducted that notmore than a few men are congregated at the point or pointsof issuance at any time. (See par. 214.)

g. If the company is to remain in the area after dark, anemergency assembly point should be designated. (See par.14.)

h. In case of air or mechanized attack, action is taken asprescribed in paragraph 12c.

i. On occasion, particularly when in battalion reserve,the rifle company occupies an assembly area selected by thebattalion or company commander and entirely separatedfrom other units. In this situation the company comman-der, in addition to the matters covered in the precedingparagraphs, establishes his own air-antitank guards.

i. (1) If the movement from the battalion assembly areais to be made in daylight and there is little cover or conceal-ment, the company should be moved directly to the line ofdeparture.(2) Otherwise, the company is moved from the battalion

assembly area to a company assembly area where it can beconcealed and protected from small-arms fire. The occupa-tion of a company assembly area greatly assists platoon

leaders in orienting their noncommissioned officers and is.suing attack orders. It also facilitates the issuance of ordersby squad leaders to their squads. To minimize the risk ofcasualties from hostile fire, this final assembly area shouldordinarily be occupied for the minimum period prior tothe time of attack. When the movement to it is made indaylight, maximum use must be made of available cover toconceal the movement from hostile aerial and ground ob-servation.

SECTION IIRECONNAISSANCE, PLANS,

AND ORDERS

19. RECEIPT OF BATTALION ORDER. a. The battalion at-tack order, written or oral, may be delivered to the com-pany commander at the company location by the battalioncommander or his representative.

b. (1) The company commander may be directed to,jointhe battalion commander at a forward location to receivethe order. In this situation, the company commandershould take with him an additional leader to insure thatthe order is received by the company even though the com-pany commander becomes an early casualty. This addi-tional leader may be the second-in-command, a platoonleader, or. a senior noncommissioned officer.(2) When the battalion order is received, shortage of timewill often require that the company commander delegateto others the accomplishment of certain preparatory tasks.Therefore, appropriate personnel should be available in aconcealed position near the place where the order is issued.This party may include the communication sergeant (to

select an observation post and prepare sketches), the bugler(to act as observer at the observation post), messengers,

and, if available, platoon leaders.(3) However, at least one officer must remain with the com-

pany at all times.c. During the issuance of an order, all company repre-

sentatives present with the battalion commander make thenecessary notes or entries on their sketches (maps).

20. ACTIONS OF COMPANY COMMANDER FOLLOWINGRECEIPT OF ORDER. a. Initial actions. Upon receipt of thebattalion order, the company commander rapidly sizes upthe situation, determines how and in what sequence theessential preparatory steps are to be accomplished, anddecides what he will do personally and what he will dele-gate to others. Among the essential preparatory stepsare to -(1) Decide on the manner of issuing the company attack

order. If subordinates can be assembled to receive it, thisinvolves early designation of time and place of issuance,decision as to who are to be present, and issuance of in-structions to insure their presence.(2) Issue instructions for movement of the company to the

company assembly area or area of departure; or, if timepermits, lead it personally. In any case it should be led overa reconnoitered route.(3) Select an off-carrier position (subject to restrictions

imposed by the battalion commander), select the most ad-vanced location to which ammunition can be brought bycarrier, and arrange for reconnaissance of routes to thesepoints if necessary. (See fig. 3.) ' 1(4) Arrange for securing additional information of theenemy from the covering force commander and for theprompt establishment of the company observation post.(5) Confer, if practicable, with commanders of coveringforces, adjacent units, and with commanders of units fur-nishing supporting fires.

31

/ V_~.J ~ LOCATION 0"OVID11NG covE

_ S PC 4 0 GH? I CARRIE .

Figure 3. Of-carrier position

(8) Plan the attack.ON

uits for thse attack. (If possible, at least one-hal hourshould be allowed fo r th ese purposes.)aie.

(10) Check and supervise the execution of his orders, to

insure readiness of the company to attack n at the slpecified

tigure 3. OrdCarrier possiion

(6) Have simple sketches prepared for the platoon leaders

b. Conferences. Brief conferences should e held withable.commanders of a djacent units and supporting weaponscommanders of adjacent units and supporting weapons

before they leave the locality where the battalion order wasissued. Frequently all that can be accomplished at this timeis to make definite arrangements for a later interchange ofinformation, either through conferences or messages. In-formation desired from commanders not present must besecured by contacting them while on reconnaissance or bydispatching agents to confer with them. The informationordinarily desired is:(1) From the local covering force commander:

(a) Exact locations of elements through which the com-pany is to pass.

(b) Detailed information of hostile activities and dispo-sitions, such as exact locations of automatic weapons, ob-servation posts, antitank guns, and entrenched groups ofriflemen, and recent patrol actions.(2) From adjacent commanders:

(a) Theii plan of attack (to facilitate cooperation).(b) Method of maintaining contact between the two

units.(3) From supporting weapon commanders: Exact positionareas and target areas of their weapons (to avoid prema-ture masking of their fire and to determine where companyweapons can be located).

c. Sketches. Simple sketches of the company zone ofaction and adjacent terrain, drawn on the back of a mes-sage blank, can be quickly reproduced by using additionalmessage blanks and the carbon paper in the back of themessage book. If possible, these sketches should be in thehands of the subordinate leaders when the company attackorder is issued. Certain details of the plan of attack may bedrawn on them and the order thereby shortened. Theirchief value, however, is to facilitate mutual understandingof orders and reports exchanged after the attack starts.

d. Reconnaissance. (1) Maps or photo maps do notshow the little variations of the terrain which small unitsmust utilize to fight their way forward successfully. Unlessthe lack of time prohibits anything other than a map re-

connaissance, the company commander makes a terrain re-connaissance before he decides on his plan of attack. Thethoroughness of this reconnaissance will depend on thetime available; it may consist of only a brief observationfrom one point. Careful planning is essential to utilize thetime available to the maximum. Before starting, the com-pany commander should make a brief map study, get theavailable information of the enemy and of what adjacentand supporting units are to do clearly fixed in his mind,determine what to look for, and decide where he can go inthe time available to secure the greatest knowledge of hiszone of action.(2) His reconnaissance, or that made by others at his direc-tion, should also include -

(a) Selection of routes forward from the battalion assem-bly area, for the company, including routes for weaponcarriers.

(b) Determination of the most forward point to whichweapons can safely be brought on carriers (off-carrier posi-tion). The battalion commander may prohibit the move-ment of weapon carriers forward of the battalion assemblyarea until later in the attack. In this case, the off-carrierposition is in the assembly area. (See fig. 3.)

(c) Determination of the most forward point to whichammunition can safely be delivered by carrier and, ifnecessary, the best route thereto.

(d) Selection of position areas for the weapon sectionsand of locations for the company observation post andcommand post.

21. PLAN OF ATTACK. a. General. (1) The mission of anattacking rifle company initially is to capture a locality, orlocalities, held by the enemy. To do this it must close withthe enemy by a combination of fire and maneuver. It musttake advantage of every accident of the terrain to concealand protect the company, or any part of it, while in move-ment. Every movement must be covered by fire delivered

by part of the company by company supporting weapons,or both, and so placed that it neutralizes that part of theenemy's infantry which could otherwise effectively fire onthe individuals or elements that are moving; or by bat-talion supporting weapons prepared to deliver such fire.(2) During his reconnaissance the company commander

seeks to determine where enemy guns and men are, andwhere others might be located, since the enemy will rarelydisclose his entire strength or exact dispositions untilforced to do so by our attack. He notes the routes or areaswhere the enemy's observation or fire is most hampered bythe nature of the terrain and which, therefore, are mostfavorable as avenues of approach to the hostile position.He considers the assistance he can expect from smoke andfrom the fire of supporting weapons, and notes the avail-able localities where his own weapons could be placed tosupport the movement of his rifle units. He also considerswhether adjacent units will initially be ahead, behind, orabreast of his company, determines from this whether hisflanks initially are protected or exposed, and notes whetherthe terrain affords the enemy concealment from which tolaunch surprise counterattacks as the attack progresses.With these factors in mind, he decides how best to employthe elements of his company in order to accomplish his mis-sion promptly and with the fewest casualties. He thus de-termines his plan of attack. The plan must provide forcoordination to insure maximum teamwork between theattacking platoon (s) and supporting weapons.

b. Formation. (1) A formation, for the initial attack,with all three rifle platoons (less a small fraction of one insupport) abreast is exceptional; it is usually appropriateonly when the company is assigned an extremely broadzone of action and the initial use of all available weaponsis essential to establish fire superiority. Figure 40 showsschematically such a company attack formation.(2) Employing a formation with two rifle platoons in the

attacking echelon and one in support, the company can de-

35

·^AI / 2A^3 ' XL

.[ onRT.n m { c r(COMPANY CONTtoCr )

IS ATTCD. )

FC I E.COMPANYCONTROL)

0 Formation for attack on broad front

3AA IO

T I'~Ge~b~m g000OSS"VATIN ovR

f$O 2 o I t o iti

0 Formation for strong initial attack

Figure 4

Figre 4-Continued

liver a strong initial attack while retaining a strong sup-port to influence future action; this formation is the onemost frequently used. (See fig. 4®.)(3) A formation with one rifle platoon in the attackingechelon and two in support is frequently used when thecompany has a very narrow zone of action, when it is oper-ating on an exposed flank, or when the enemy situation isobscure. In this formation the platoons in the rear echelonmay be disposed in column behind the leading platoon;echeloned behind the leading platoon toward an exposedflank; or, if both flanks are exposed, they may be echelonedone to each flank of the leading platoon.

c. Time of attack. The time of attack is normally pre-scribed in the battalion order. Exceptionally, when it mustbe determined by the company commander, he allows timefor the movement of the company to its attack positions,and also for the necessary reconnaissance, preparation ofplans, and issuance of orders by himself and his subordin-ate leaders when these activities cannot be carried on con-currently with the movement. The start of the attack mraybe coordinated by directing subordinate elements to initi-ate their forward movement at a definite hour, or by re-quiring them to be ready at that hour, but to commencetheir operations on a prescribed signal.

d. Attack positions. The battalion order may designatea line of departure or direct the company to launch itsattack from a given area or locality. If a prescribed line ofdeparture is difficult to locate on the ground, or not ap-proximately perpendicular to the direction of attack, orcannot be reached without exposing the attacking echelonto hostile observation and fire, the company commandershould direct that each platoon in his attacking echelonstart its attack from a more suitable line of departure, orfrom an area or point slightly in rear of the line designatedby the battalion. Whatever method is used, the time ofattack announced for each platoon should be such that itsleading personnel will clear the line, area, or locality pre-

scribed by the battalion commander at the time set in thebattalion order.

e. Scheme of maneuver. (1) An interior company willordinarily be assigned a zone of action from 200 to 500yards in width. The cover and concealment from hostileobservation and fire afforded by accidents of the terrainwill seldom be uniform in all parts of this zone. Also, theavailable supporting fires will seldom be sufficient to neu-tralize all hostile elements opposing the advance. Recon-naissance often discloses that the hostile position is occu-pied irregularly, open areas forming salients to the frontbeing lightly occupied, while broken terrain and coveredapproaches forming reentrants into the position are morestrongly occupied. Any attack which disregards the terrainand the actual or likely hostile dispositions by attemptingto advance in equal strength all along the front has littlechance of success. Therefore, the company commandermust plan to concentrate his efforts on advancing a portionof his attacking echelon through that part of the companyzone which offers the best cover and concealment andwhich strikes the enemy position at a weak spot. (See fig.40 and ®.)(2) The remainder of the attacking echelon should bedirected to attack by fire and maneuver through that por-tion of the company zone offering the best remaining con-cealment and cover, in order to force the enemy to dispersehis efforts so that he cannot use his full defensive strengthagainst one portion of the attacking echelon.

f. Zones of action and objectives. (1) Each rifle platoonin the attacking echelon should be assigned a definite zoneof action. The zone of action is defined by assigning theplatoon a particular section of the line of departure or anarea or point from which to start its attack, a direction ofattack, and a definite terrain objective, or series of ob-jectives, to be captured. If desired, the width of the zonemay be indicated by directing that the platoon attack on afrontage prescribed in yards. This is, its "zone of respons-

St

ibility" in which it is responsible for driving forward andgaining the objectives assigned. (See par. 115d.) Normally,the frontage assigned the platoon should not be less than100 yards or more than 200 yards; under exceptional cir-cumstances, these limits may be varied. The platoon oftencan take advantage of covered routes in adjacent platoonzones of action to maneuver against hostile resistance with-in its own zone, provided coordination is effected with theadjacent unit. For this reason, boundaries between pla-toons are seldom prescribed.(2) One of the most effective means of coordinating the

efforts of the company is by the assignment of successiveobjectives to attacking platoons. Each platoon should beassigned, as its initial objective, the nearest terrain featureor hostile position within its zone of action whose captureis essential to the further advance of the company as awhole. It should be directed to continue its attack, after theinitial objective has been captured, either in a given direc-tion or against another definite objective. When the com-pany commander desires to control the action more closely,the platoon may be directed to be prepared to continue theattack. If the platoon has been directed only to be preparedto continue its attack the company commander must latergive the order to resume the attack and assign the next ob-jective. Depending on the terrain, there may be several ofthese successive platoon objectives to be captured, in turn,before the attacking echelon reaches the initial objectiveassigned the company by the battalion commander.

g. Support. At the start of the attack the company com-mander should hold out a support for later use in repellingcounterattacks, replacing an exhausted part of the attack-ing echelon, or striking the final blow necessary to capturean objective. It must be adequate in strength to accomplishits probable missions; with an exposed flank, a rifle pla-toon is usually the minimum. Since its missions requirethat the support be able to maneuver, advance by fire andmovement, and close wi'h the bayonet, it cannot be taken

)3t . .I

only from the weapons platoon. In the attack order it maybe assigned an initial concealed location and directed toawait orders there. Usually, however, because of the com-pany's limited communication facilities, it is directed tofollow by bounds in rear of that part of the attacking eche-lon nearest to the area of its most probable employment.Whenever a definite employment of the support can beforeseen it should be directed to be prepared to accomplishthis mission; this will enable its leader to conduct recon-naissance and make plans in advance.

h. Use of supporting weapons. (1) The 60-mm mortarsshould be put in position early - prior to the start of theattack -for use in neutralizing any hostile weapons ormassed groups which may impede the advance of the at-tacking echelon. Because of their small radius of burst andthe difficulties of ammunition supply, the mortars shouldnot be used for searching large areas, for prolonged con-centrations, or for fire on indefinite targets. Prompt em-ployment depends on having an observer so lotated that hecan adjust fire on the target; therefore, the company com-mander should clearly state in his attack order the area orareas into which the mortars are to be prepared to fire. Ifsuitable targets have been located, they should be assignedas initial fire missions. When an attacking rifle platooncannot be effectively supported by mortar fire under com-pany control, a mortar squad may be attached to that pla-toon; otherwise, mortars are retained under company con-trol. (See FM 23-85.)(2) Whenever practicable, light machine guns should beused so that full advantage will be taken of the depth(length) of their beaten zone and their rate of fire.

(a) When the guns are employed to deliver enfilade fire,full advantage is taken of the depth of the beaten zone.Enfilade fire is fire in which the long axis of the beaten zonecoincides with the long axis of the target. (See fig. 5.) Ob-lique fire takes partial advantage of the depth of the beatenzone. Although not as remunerative as enfilade fire, it can

41

be delivered with a minimum of maneuver. Frontal fireagainst a shallow target, such as a line of skirmishers, andflanking fire against targets of little width should be em-ployed only when the terrain and other factors of the situa-tion make it necessary. Fire against these types of targetsfails to take advantage of the depth (length) of the beatenzone, but its use may be essential to establish fire superior-ity or to repel a hostile counterattack.

FLANKING ONLY

AND gNFILADE

FRONTALAND ENFILADE

FRONTAL OBLIQUEONLY

Figure 5. Classes of fire with respect to direction

(b) Light machine guns are usually fired in short bursts.'Their greatest effect is secured by placing the fire of bothguns on a small area. Wherever practicable, they shouldoperate from positions in rear of and close to the flanks ofthe most advanced rifle units. The attack order shouldeither assign them a position area and definite targets or asector of fire; or, if suitable positions initially are not avail-able, the order should direct that they follow some elementof the attacking echelon. In the latter case, the mission (s)they are to accomplish, after suitable firing positions arereached, should be definitely stated in the order.

i. Security. (1) Irrespective of any flank protective meas-

ures that may be taken by higher commanders, the com-pany commander is responsible for the close-in protectionof his flanks throughout the attack. Usually there will begaps between the company and ihe units on its right andleft. If at the start of the attack an adjacent unit is abreast

0515

DIRECTIONOF ATTACK

(ADJACENT UNITS ABREAST-CONNECTING OROUPS ON EACH FLANK)

Figure 6

or ahead of the company, and the gap can be covered bythe fire of both companies, the company commander em-ploys a connecting group to maintain contact with the ad-jacent unit and to report periodically the location of itsnearest flank. (See fig. 60 and (D.) If, however, these con-ditions do not apply, the company commander shoulddetail a larger flank patrol to provide close-in flank pro-tection. (See fig. 60.)(2) Ordinarily security groups should be detailed from the

support. These groups may operate directly under thecompany commander or he may delegate control by direct-ing that platoon leaders provide for contact on or protec-tion of a given flank. Under the last-named condition, he

43

0545

B * OoO I A gi · · A O

OIRECTION

OF ATTACKO

(UNIT ON RIGHT HAS FALLEN BEHIND K

RIGHT I EAST) CONNECTING GROUPDIVIDES TO MAINTAIN CONTACT)

Figure 6-Continued

0645

RIGHT (EAST) CONNECTING GROUP DIRECTION

REINFORCED AND BECOMES OF ATTACK

FLANK COMBAT PATROL

LEFT (WEST) CONNECTING GROUP

DEPLOYED TO MAINTAIN CONTACTWITH UNIT ON THAT FLANK)

Figure 6-Continued

frequently prescribes the maximum size of the group. (Seepars. 116b (4), 171, and 172.)(3) (a) Timely warning is a vital factor in reducing lossesfrom air and mechanized attack. Each rifle platoon pro-vifdes its own air-antitank guards. The antitank rifle gren-adiers are not removed from their platoons to provide pro-tection for other elements of the company; they are em-ployed under their platoon leaders to protect the platoonareas.

(b) The company commander is responsible for coor-dination of antimechanized defense measures within thecompany. Protection of the company as a whole is accom-plished by assigning specific directions or areas of possibletank attack to each rifle platoon. In addition, the companycommander assigns rocket launchers in the manner whichwill most effectively further his mission. Positions forrocket teams are selected to cover the most likely hvenuesfor counterattack by tanks. Should there be more than onelikely avenue, positions must be selected to block each suchapproach. The use of rocket teams is coordinated with anynearby antitank weapons.

(c) Personnel designated to operate rocket launcherswill normally function in their primary duties until amechanized attack is imminent or use against a secondarytarget (crew-served weapon or grouped personnel) is di-rected by the company commander. (See par. 31 (6).)

(d) Difficulty of ammunition supply makes sustainedfire exceptional in the attack. Short bursts from rocketteams working in pairs will have more effect than a likeamount of ammunition fired by a single team. After eachburst, the rocket team promptly shifts position to avoidretaliatory fire.

(e) The battalion commander, with weapons at his dis-posal, provides protection in depth or augments the de-fense provided by the antitank rifle grenadiers and rocketteams.

45

22. COMPANY ATTACK ORDER. a. The company com-mander issues orders for the attack to his platoon leadersand the second-in-command. In addition, when conditionspermit, the first sergeant, the communication sergeant, thesupply sergeant, platoon sergeants, and the section leadersof the weapons platoon may be assembled to hear the issu-ance of the order.

b. The company order must clearly convey the plan ofattack by including -(1) Such information of the enemy and our own troops,

not already known by subordinates, as they should know inorder that they may accomplish their assigned tasks. Infor-mation of our own troops should include only the locationand actions of supporting and adjacent units which have adirect bearing on the company's attack.(2) The company mission.(3) The time of attack.(4) The line, point, or area of departure; direction of at-

tack and initial objective for each attacking rifle platoon,and the action to be taken by each platoon following cap-ture of its initial objective.(5) Specific instructions for the weapons platoon. These

include definite position areas and targets, or definite mis-sions, for the light machine-gun and mortar sections.(6) The location of the support and, wherever practicable,

an indication of its probable employment.(7) Instructions for maintaining contact and for flank

protection.(8) Location of the battalion ammunition supply pointand the battalion aid station; the initial location of theweapon carriers retained in the company area; and suchother administrative instructions as are desirable.(9) The location of the company command post, and theinitial, and probable future, location of the company com-mander.

46

23. COMMAND POST IN ATTACK. The command post ofan attacking rifle company seldom should be located over400 yards behind the front line. It is moved forward as thecompany advances. The new locations are reported to thebattalion command post. All locations selected shouldprovide concealment from hostile ground observation, de-filade against hostile fire, and, if possible, concealmentfrom aerial observation.

SECTION IIITHE ATTACK

24. MOVEMENT TO LINE OF DEPARTURE. The movementto the line of departure is a continuation of the approachmarch. Security during the movement is provided byscouts, patrols, and observers.

25. CONDUCT OF ATTACK. a. Fire and maneuver. (1)The approach march formation is maintained by the lead-ing platoons until they are compelled to fire in order toadvance. These platoons then complete their deployment.Ordinarily fire is opened on orders of the platoon leader;the company commander may, however, reserve to himselfthe authority for opening fire in order to gain surprise.(2) At the first firing position each attacking platoon seeksto gain fire superiority over the enemy to its front by sub-jecting him to fire of such accuracy and intensity that thehostile fire becomes inaccurate or diminished in volume.Battalion supporting weapons and artillery assist by fireson the hostile forward positions (unless masked by the at-tacking platoons) and by neutralizing rearward hostile ele-ments which could fire on the attacking echelon. For the

47

employment of combat aviation and tanks in the supportof infantry attacks, see FM 7-40, 17-36 (when published),31-35, 100-5, and 100-20. The company commander em-ploys his weapons platoon to neutralize hostile elementswhich are not being neutralized by other fires.(3) Further advances are made by successive rushes, or

movements of individuals or small groups of the leadingsquads and platoons (see pars. 116b and 153b), or by ma-neuver of rear echelons. The movement of advancing ele-ments is covered by the fire of those remaining in positionand by the fire of company and battalion supporting wea-pons and of artillery. Every lull in hostile fire is utilizedto push groups forward and occupy the natural strongpoints of terrain from which fire, particularly that of auto-matic weapons, can be delivered. This combination of fireand maneuver enables attacking rifle elements to reachpositions from which they can overcome the enemy inhand-to-hand combat.(4) Because of unequal resistance by the enemy, differencesin terrain, and variations in the assistance received fromsupporting fires, some units will be able to advance whileothers are held up. A platoon or company not stopped byfire pushes on to capture the final objective, even thoughadjacent units have been stopped. This advance outflanksresistances holding up adjacent units, frequently enableslight machine guns to be placed in positions from whichthey can deliver oblique, enfilade or flanking fire on thehostile resistance, and may permit company supports to bemoved into the gap to envelop the enemy or gain his rear.Islands of resistance are thus overcome by combinedfrontal and flanking action.

b. Reconnaissance and control. (1) Once the fire fighthas commenced the company commander's influence onthe fight is largely confined to the employment of support-ing fires and of his support echelon. To plan ahead and acteffectively at the proper time, he must keep constantly in-formed of the situation on his front and flanks.

(2) The company commander posts himself where he canbest direct and control the action. Whenever practicable heoccupies an observation post from which he can see all, orat least the vital part, of the company zone of action; ob-servers are posted to watch the remainder of the front andflanks. His position must permit messengers free move-ment. He must be able to communicate readily with thecompany command post, with the support, and with sup-porting weapons under his control. Whenever conditionsmake effective control of the entire company impracticablefrom such an observation post, he goes wherever he canbest observe and control the action of that part of the com-pany whose operations are most vital to success.(3) Ordinarily the communication sergeant, bugler, a com-pany messenger, a liaison agent from the heavy weaponscompany, a messenger from each platoon, and a messengerfrom any weapons section operating directly under controlof the company commander are dispersed under cover inthe company commander's immediate vicinity. Other per-sonnel of the command group operate from the companycommand post. The company commander usually sendswritten or oral messages direct to platoon or weapons sec-tion leaders. He sends messages to the battalion com-mander or to commanders of other companies through thecompany command post. He uses radiotelephone or sound-powered telephone to communicate with those elementsof the company with which rapid communication is mostvital or with an element with which communication bymessenger or visual signals would be impracticable. Heoften delegates supervision of the operation of weaponcarriers to the second-in-command, first sergeant, or sup-ply sergeant; but requires that he be kept informed of theirlocation.(4) To maintain control the company commander must

know the location of his platoons and weapons sections andwhat they are doing. In addition to personal observationand that of members of his command group, he requires

49

periodic reports from his subordinate leaders as to posi-tions, effect of supporting fires, and important develop-ments. Messengers reporting to the company commanderare retained, and messengers from the same units who havebeen with the company commander are then sent to rejointheir unit, usually with a brief message informing the sub-ordinate leader of important developments. This periodicinterchange of messengers is one of the most effectivemeans of retaining constant control of the company action.

c. Coordination. Throughout the attack the companycommander seeks to bring about the closest possible coor-dination between the movements of his rifle platoons andthe fire of all supporting weapons. He must not permitrifle units to do slowly that which supporting weapons cando promptly, or to attack without supporting fires whenassistance by supporting weapons will save both time andcasualties. However, the location of attacking elementsmust be known before supporting fires can be employedsafely. Whenever the support of his own weapons platoonis insufficient, he should call for artillery fire (through theforward observer (see par. 10) or the battalion com-mander), and on the heavy weapons company (usuallythrough that company's liaison agent)'for heavy machine-gun or mortar fire. (See par. 9c (3).) For employment ofrocket teams, see paragraph 21i (3).

d. Employment of weapons platoon. (1) The weaponsplatoon should be pushed forward aggressively whenevereffective fire is no longer possible from the position occu-pied, or whenever captured terrain offers positions fromwhich more effective support is possible.(2) The company commander must keep in mind that the

light machine guns are not capable of sustained fire andthat resupply of ammunition usually presents a seriousproblem. Therefore, he should concentrate the fire of bothguns, if possible, on targets of limited extent, when andwhere this fire will best assist the advance of his own oradjacent units or provide flank protection. (See a (4)

above.) Advantage may thus be taken of an open field offire on a flank of the company to bring fire on hostile re-sistance in front of adjacent rearward companies, to pro-tect against hostile counterattack, or to neutralize cross firesfrom hostile elements on the flanks. It is particularly de-sirable to get these guns into positions on the flank ofhostile resistance just prior to an assault, so that they canmaintain flanking fire on the enemy after all other sup-porting fires have been forced to lift.(3) The advance of the mortars must be so regulated as toenable them to respond promptly to the needs of rifle pla-toons. However, since the mortar squad can carry by handonly sufficient ammunition to permit firing continuouslyfor two minutes, care must be exercised in the selection oftargets and the expenditure of ammunition. Hence, mor-tars are used against the following types of targets:

(a) Hostile machine guns or mortars in position defil-ade, or personnel either defiladed or entrenched, which aredefinitely impeding the advance are known to be located ina small area (about 50 yards square).

(b) Hostile forward positions, to maintain fire superior-ity during the final advance of rifle units to within assault-ing distance, when other supporting fires are masked.

(c) Hostile counterattacks, when mortar fire is essentialeither to stop the attacks or to slow them down to gain timefor other measures to be taken.(4) The company commander is responsible that weapon

carriers located in the company area are kept concealed indefilade. Because it is slow and sometimes difficult to carryammunition considerable distances by hand, he moves thecarriers forward whenever practicable.

e. Employment of support. (1) The support must beclose enough to the attacking echelon to permit promptemployment against hostile counterattack. If the supporthas been directed to follow the attacking echelon bybounds from one covered position to another, the companycommander must insure that it remains within supporting

51

distance but does not merge with the attacking echelon. Ifthe company commander initially directed the support toawait orders in a certain location, he must issue timelyorders for its forward movement.

(2) Variations in terrain or in the situation may requirea change in the manner of controlling the movement of thesupport or a change in the distance at which it is to followthe attacking echelon. It is the company commander's re-sponsibility to judge the conditions and direct thesechanges whenever necessary.(3) The support should not be used piecemeal. Except to

take advantage of an opportunity to strike a decisive blowor to repel hostile counterattack, the company supportshould not be employed when the attacking platoons stillhave supports not committed to action, or when support-ing fires alone will permit a resumption of the attack. How-ever, when the opportunity occurs to strike a decisive blowor its use is necessary to renew the impetus of a stalledattack, the company support should be committed withouthesitation. In either case, it should be employed, preferablyfor flank attack or envelopment, where the attack hasprogressed against enemy weakness rather than againststrong resistance. If necessary, it may be employed throughan adjacent zone. It must not, however, interfere with theaction of the adjacent troops and the adjacent commanderis informed of the action taken..(4) Whenever the support is committed, the companycommander seeks to reconstitute another support. How-ever, troops actually under hostile fire cannot be with-drawn for this purpose without suffering excessive casu-alties. In order to provide himself with a small support foruse in case of emergency, the company commander mayforbid the employment, without his prior approval, of theuncommitted support of a rifle platoon, or may gather suchindividuals (messengers or men separated from their unit)as can be safely assembled.

f. Security. The company commander cannot assumethat the original measures taken for flank security willremain effective throughout the entire attack. He requiresconnecting groups and his observers to report frequentlythe location of the nearest flank of each adjacent unit. Ifreports fail to arrive, he takes definite steps to secure thisinformation. He adjusts his flank protective measures tofit changes in the situation as they occur. As long as exist-ing gaps can be covered by fire from his own and the ad-jacent unit, a connecting group to maintain contact issufficient; otherwise, he sends out one or more flankpatrols, depending upon the size of the gaps. (See pars.21i and 1.71 and fig. 60, (, and (.)

g. Assistance to adjacent units. (1) The company as-sists adjacent units -

(a) When such assistance will facilitate its own advance.(b) When directed to do so by the battalion com-

mander.(c) When, without orders, the company commander

estimates that such assistance will best assist in the accom-plishment of the battalion mission.(2) Assistance which enables a rearward adjacent unit toadvance abreast is generally an effective means of insuringthe security of the company's own flank. (See fig. 7.)(3) Assistance by fire and maneuver is usually more effec-tive than assistance by fire only. Such maneuver however,must be strongly supported by the fire of all availableweapons, including those of the unit being assisted.- Alsothe maneuver must not result in depriving the company,for an extended period, of the services of elements essentialto its own further progress.

26. ASSAULT. a. When the attacking echelon has pro-gressed as close to the hostile position as it can get withoutmasking its supporting fires these fires lift and the assaultis launched. If necessary, the company commander causesthe lifting of supporting fires by giving a prearranged

3I

Figure 7. Assistance rendered to adjacent units-Schiematic diagram

NOTES(1) Co A, having captured Hill T, has been directed to assist Co B

in capturing Hitt U. Assistance by fire is impracticable on accountof intervening heavy woods. Co A therefore employs its supportplatoon to attack hostile position on Hill U in flank. Capt Co Aarranges in advance for fire support from artillery, Co D, and Co B.

(2) Co B, taking advantage of the woods on its right, capturesHill V. Co A is held up in front of Hill W. Co B employs its lightmachine guns to assist Co A and thereby assist its own advance byremoving a possible threat to its own right flank.

(3) Co E has captured its final objective, Hill Z. Cos A and B areheld up by machine-gun fire from the east nose of Hill Z. Co E em-ploys the fire of its light machine guns and of part of its supportplatoon in order to assist the advance of Cos A and B.

signal, or estimates when the attacking units will be readyto assault and arranges with the battalion commander forthese fires to lift at that time. When supporting fires arelifted, assault fire may be employed to prevent the enemyfrom manning his defenses. Supporting weapons coverthe assault by directing their fire at those adjacent andrearward hostile elements which are able to fire on theassaulting troops either during the assault or after theposition is captured. For the rifle platoon and squad inassault, see paragraphs 116c and 154.

b. The company commander is responsible that theassault is delivered at the proper time. When the attack-ing echelon has reached assaulting distance, the assaultusually is launched by subordinate leaders; otherwise, thecompany commander orders it by a signal or command,which is repeated by all officers and noncommissionedofficers.

c. Following a.successful assault, the company com-mander moves his support platoon and weapons sectionsforward to secure advantageous positions from which tosupport the continuation of the attack and, if necessary,to protect reorganization. (See par. 28.)

27. ADVANCE THROUGH HOSTILE POSITION. a. The at-tack must be pushed through the depth of the hostileposition to the company final objective without allowingthe enemy any opportunity to reconstitute his defense.The company commander employs every means at his dis-posal to maintain continuity of the attack and exploitswithout delay every advantage gained.

b. If not already committed, the support platoon maybe used to relieve a badly disorganized attacking platoonor to launch a flanking or enveloping attack to assist inthe capture of successive company objectives.

c. If the distance between company objectives is so greatthat leading platoons are not justified in immediatelyopening fire approach march formations may be used

55

initially. Otherwise, the attack on each company objec-tives is made in a manner similar to the attack on thefirst objective.

28. REORGANIZATION. a. Whenever a leader or key manbecomes a casualty during fighting, he is promptly re-placed. If possible, complete reorganization is postponeduntil the final objective of the company is reached. How-ever, the company must be reorganized whenever disorgan-ization prevents its further effective employment as afighting team. If hostile fires permit, the rifle platoonsmove to defiladed positions for complete reorganization;if not, they must make a partial reorganization in place.Time consumed in reorganization must be reduced to aminimum.

b. The company commander must protect the reor-ganization of the company by -(1) Prompt and simultaneous movement of the entire

weapons platoons to cover the front and exposed flank (s).(2) Sending patrols from the attacking platoons, or fromthe support, to cover the front and maintain contact withthe enemy. If the platoon leader of the weapons platoonis given the mission of protecting the reorganization of thecompany, the patrols should operate under his orders.(3) Employing any available support to furnish protec-tion, preferably by holding at least the bulk of it avail-able for prompt action against hostile counterattack.

c. The company commander directs platoon leaders toreorganize their platoons and to report promptly theirremaining effective strength and the state of their ammu-nition supply.

d. Based upon the reports of the platoon leaders, hecauses ammunition to be redistributed. If short of am-munition he secures more by bringing forward a loadedweapon carrier, by using carrying parties, or by callingupon the battalion.

e. He promptly dispatches a message to the battalion

commander, giving the situation, the approximatestrength of the company, and any hostile identificationssecured. Prisoners are sent under guard to the prescribedcollecting point (see FM 7-25 and 30-15).

f. Completion of the reorganization should find the com-pany regrouped into an effective team, with control re-established and with sufficient ammunition to continuethe attack.

29. PURSUIT. a. After the company captures its final ob-jective, pursuit, except by fire, is not commenced untilordered by the battalion commander. Once begun, it mustbe characterized by boldness and rapidity and must bepushed to the limit of human endurance.

b. (1) When the company has been ordered to pursue,its formations and actions are very similar to those of thesupport of an advance guard when contact is imminent,as described in paragraph 100g. Usually one rifle platoonis directed to reconnoiter the entire company zone ofaction and push forward rapidly to gain contact withhostile detachments attempting to delay the pursuit. Ifunable to overcome rapidly any hostile detachments en-countered, it attempts to fix them in position and promptlylocate their flanks. This platoon is usually reinforced witha 60-mm mortar and frequently with one or both lightmachine guns. When the company zone is over 600 yardswide, it may be necessary to employ three rifle platoonsin the leading echelon. (See fig. 40.)(2) The remainder of the company follows closely in sup-port of the leading echelon. It must be prepared to repelpromptly a counterattack directed against either flankor to maneuver rapidly to outflank or envelop any resist-ance fixed by the leading echelon. With one platoon inthe leading echelon, a formation with the weapons platoon(less detachments) moving in the center of the companyzone and a rifle platoon echeloned toward each flank isfrequently suitable.

c. If the company support is still intact when the pursuitbegins, it may be employed to commence the pursuit atonce, passing through the attacking echelon and movingforward without delay. The platoons of the attackingechelon are directed to complete any necessary reorgani-zation and follow in support without delay. On the otherhand, if the company support is not intact, it may be neces-sary to complete the reorganization of one or moreplatoons before taking up the pursuit.

d. For the pursuit the battalion commander frequentlyattaches units of the heavy weapons company to a riflecompany. The rifle company commander controls theirmovement and action, and becomes responsible for theirammunition supply. He seldom attaches these units to hisplatoons but employs them under his control to giveclose support and protection to his leading platoons.

30. ACTION WHEN ADVANCE IS HALTED. a. When the ad-vance of the battalion is definitely halted by hostile re-sistance, the leading rifle companies pass immediately tothe defensive on the ground held. Foxholes are dug im-mediately. The company commander issues instructionsfor such organization of the area as is possible. Organi-zation of the ground is usually difficult because of disor-ganization of units and intensity of enemy fires. It maybe necessary for the platoons and squads to dig in as bestthey can and wait for darkness to complete the organiza-tion of the position. The supporting weapons must bepromptly sited for defense and all other practicable prep-arations made so that the company will be prepared eitherto defend its position or to resume the offensive whenordered to do so. For the organization of a companydefensive area, see paragraphs 78 and 82.

b. During a temporary halt not forced by enemy re-sistance, such as a halt ordered by the battalion com-mander to permit supporting weapons to be brought for-ward to support a continuation of the attack, the company

commander issues necessary instructions to provide secur-ity for the company and reduce losses. The measures takenare similar to those of reorganization discussed in para-graph 28. Maximum advantage will be taken of such haltsto reorganize the platoons, replenish ammunition supply,and make preparations for the continuation of the attack.Men will be required to construct foxholes to protect themfrom enemy smallarms or artillery fire and from aerialbombardment.

SECTION IVRESERVE RIFLE COMPANY

IN ATTACK

31. MOVEMENT TO INITIAL POSITION. a. The battalionorder designating a rifle company as battalion reserveprescribes the initial location of the company, and mayinclude instructions as to subsequent movements, flankprotection, preparations of plans to meet various contin-gencies, and maintenance of contact with adjacent units.

b. Upon receipt of the battalion order, the companycommander considers possible covered routes from theassembly position to the initial reserve position. Theselection of the route is made only after reconnaissance,preferably by the company commander. Every effort ismade to avoid disclosing to the enemy the location ormovement of the reserve. The company commander sendsa representative to the battalion commander and estab-lishes liaison with the attacking rifle companies and heavyweapons company, and with battalion or attached anti-tank units.

e. Having made his reconnaissance of the initial reserveposition and the route thereto, the company commanderissues his orders. He gives subordinates all necessary in-formation of the enemy and our supporting troops; thebattalion plan of attack; and instructions for the move-ment to the initial position, including security en route,its occupation and protection, and connecting groups.

d. If practicable, the company commander personallyleads his company to the initial reserve position, arrangingthe movement to avoid interference with other units mov-ing to their attack positions. In moving to and whileoccupying reserve positions, the company takes advantageof all cover and concealment in order to avoid disclosingthe battalion scheme of maneuver and to avoid losses. Heplaces platoons so as to facilitate their planned employ-ment. Local security is provided against attack by hostileground forces and maximum advantage of the terrain istaken to provide passive antimechanized and antiaircraftprotection. Foxholes are dug for individual protection.(See app. I.)

e. The company is ordinarily moved by bounds onorders of the battalion commander. Should the companyat any time be located so far in rear of the attacking riflecompanies that it cannot effectively support them in caseof hostile counterattack, the company commanderpromptly reports the situation to the battalion com-mander and requests instructions. He recommends a suit-able new position.

32. PLANNING POSSIBLE MISSIONS. a. The reserve com-pany commander should attempt to visualize how andapproximately when conditions requiring employmentof his company may occur and prepare plans to meet allpossible contingencies. Plans should be as detailed aspracticable and should be completed prior to the time thesituation they are designed to meet can reasonably occur.If time permits, he submits his plans to the battalion

commander for approval. He informs subordinate leadersof the details of these plans. Estimates are made as to thetime necessary to put each plan into effect.

b. The reserve company may be assigned one or moreof the following missions:(1) To envelop points of resistance located by the attack-ing echelon, frequently by movement through the zone ofadjacent battalions.(2) To protect the flanks of leading companies.(3) To repel counterattacks, especially against the flanks.(4) To assist the progress of adjacent units.(5) To take over the role of all, or a part, of the attacking

echelon.(6) To provide contact with adjacent units.

c. When the company is given a mission of maintainingcontact on the flanks, the company commander shouldtake the connecting groups from the platoons on the flanksof the reserve position. Their strength should be appro-priate to the terrain in which they must work. Connectinggroups should be sent out promptly so that they can gaincontact before the attack starts. (See pars. 21i and 25f andfig. 6®, ®, and (D.) They may be used for route recon-naissance on their respective flanks for movements of thereserve company beyond its initial position if this dutywill not interfere with their contact missions. They shouldbe instructed to send their reports directly to the battalioncommand post and each member of the groups should beinformed as to its initial and proposed locations.

33. RECONNAISSANCE AND LIAISON. In order to be pre-pared to execute promptly any of the missions outlinedabove, the company commander keeps himself constantlyinformed of the situation -

a. By personal reconnaissance and observation from ad-vantageous points of the terrain.

b. By means of observation posts manned by personnelof the company.

61

c. By observers accompanying leading companies.d,. By remaining with the battalion commander, or at

the battalion command post, or detailing another officerto do so.

e. By means of messenger communication with the bat-talion commander and with the battalion command post.

34. ACTION WHEN COMMITTED. When the reserve com-pany is committed to action by the battalion commander,it operates as a rifle company in the attack.

SECTION VNIGHT ATTACK

35. GENERAL. a. The rifle company may be employed ina night attack as part of a battalion or as the principalattacking force. For the general characteristics of nightoperations, see FM 7-40 and 100-5. For the heavy weaponscompany in support of a night attack, see FM 7-15. For therifle battalion in a night attack, see FM 7-20.

b. Consideration must be given to the desirability ofexecuting the night attack by stealth, or with artillerypreparation placed on the objective immediately preced-ing the assault and lifted on a time schedule. This is acommand decision and will usually be made by the regi-mental commander.

c. Current battlefield experience indicates that nightattacks in dense woods or jungle are seldom successful.

36. COMPANY ORDER. a. The company order for a nightattack goes into much greater detail than a similar order

62

for an attack by day. Provision is made for every event'mality that is reasonably likely to occur.

b. The following outline indicates the matter to be in-cluded in the company order:

RIFLE COMPANY ORDER FOR A NIGHT ATTACK(Oral orders are habitually used)

I.a. Information of the enemy.b. Information of friendly troops, including supporting (prepara-

tory and/or protective) fires, if any.2. Mission of the company.

Objective.Formation.

*Base unit. (For use of asterisk, see c below.)Direction of attack.Boundaries-zone of action.Assembly area, and route forward.

*Platoon release point.Line of departure.Time ot attack.

3a. Specific mission for each platoon and any special instructionspertaining to each platoon to include, when applicable--

*Point or area of departure.*Direction of attack.*Objective.Limit of advance.Reorganization on the objective.

*Platoon mission on capture of the objective and at daylight.*Security measures applicable to individual platoons.

(Use a lettered subparagraph for each platoon.)x. Tactical instructions applicable to all units if not covered

elsewhere in paragraph 3 of the order, to include-Means of identification.Means to maintain secrecy.Security measures.Method of advance.Rate of advance if applicable.

*Special measures for control and coordination.Action when hostile security measures are encountered.When to deploy as skirmishers or line of squad columns.

3

When to load rifles.Reorganization on the objective.

4. Arrangements for feeding.Amount of ammunition to be carried.Disposition of weapon carriers.Battalion ammunition supply point and routes forward.Battalion aid station.

5.a. Pyrotechnics.b. Location of battalion CP.

Location of company CP or where messages will be sent.*Location of company commander during the attack and on

the objective.Signal communication.

c. When the rifle company is part of a battalion whichis making a night attack, the battalion commander willusually prescribe all details except those marked * in thepreceding outline. He will also direct and restrict thereconnaissance of subordinate leaders and give specificorders for night patrolling prior to the attack and afterthe capture of the objective.

d. When a rifle company constitutes the principal at-tacking element of a night attacking force, the battalioncommander may prescribe all of the details listed in babove. In any situation, he states the objective, the missionof the company after capturing the objective, and the timeof attack. Unless prescribed by higher authority, he de-cides whether the attack is to be made by stealth or withpreparatory fires; if the latter, he arranges for the fires.In either case, he prescribes the protective fires to be pro-vided by the heavy weapons company and the artillery -usually after considering the recommendations of theheavy weapons company commander, the supportingartillery commander, and the rifle company commander.

37. RECONNAISSANCE AND OTHER PREPARATORY AC-TIONS. a. Irrespective of the details prescribed by the bat-talion commander, daylight reconnaissance by the com-

64

pany commander and his subordinates is essential and issupplemented by additional reconnaissance at dusk andduring the hours of darkness. During daylight, reconnais-sance of terrain not held by friendly troops is usually im-practicable except by observation from points in rear ofour front lines. The company commander places such re-stuictions on reconnaissance as are necessary to preservesecrecy.

b. The daylight preparation of the company com-mander includes the following:(1) Procurement and study of aerial photographs.(2) Prompt issuance of a warning order giving all avail-able information, including place and hour for assemblyof leaders.(3) Checking equipment and physical condition of troops.(4) Location of exact limits of the company objective.(5) Selection of the point where platoons are to be re-leased and the point or area of departure for each platoon.Points of departure should be on a line perpendicular tothe direction of attack.(6) Reconnaissance and marking of the route from theassembly area to the point where platoons are to be re-leased.(7) Reconnaissance and marking of the exact point atwhich each platoon is to cross the line of departure.(8) Designation and reconnaissance of the route of ad-vance for each platoon beyond the line of departure -reconnaissance to be performed by platoon leaders, and toinclude employment of night patrols prior to the attack.(See a above.)(9) Determination of compass bearings for the advanceof the platoons beyond the line of departure. (When thebattalion commander prescribes the direction of attack,such direction is usually that from the center of the areaof departure to the center of the objective, and will notnecessarily be the same as that for individual companiesor platoons.)

65

(10) Selection by observation, if practicable of line ofprobable deployment.(11) Location of ridges, roads, hedges, telephone lines, or

any other landmarks that may be used at night to assistin maintaining direction and control.(12) The issuance of the company order in time to per-

mit subordinate leaders to make their reconnaissancesbefore dark. Final details of the attack order are usuallyissued after reconnaissances are completed.(13) Arrangements for serving a hot meal prior to the at-

tack, insuring that each individual clearly understands hispart in the operation, and obtaining maximum possiblerest for the troops.

38. PLAN OF ATTACK. a. General. The plan for a nightattack is characterized by simplicity and minuteness ofdetail. Careful preparation is essential. No set method canbe followed. The difficulties of maintaining direction, con-trol, and cohesion vary directly with the degree of visibilityexisting at the time of the attack and the methods usedmust be varied accordingly. To plan the attack the com-pany commander's information of hostile forces (size,composition, and night dispositions), the contemplatedaction of friendly troops, and the terrain to be traversed,must be as complete and detailed as possible.(1) The company commander obtains information of

hostile dispositions -(a) From the battalion commander,(b) By contact with front-line elements.(c) By establishment of observation posts, when suffi-

cient'daylight remains to justify it.(d) By personal reconnaissance and that of his subor-

dinates.(e) By study of available aerial photographs.(f) By night patrolling. (See FM 21-75.) (This is fre-

quently the only means of obtaining detailed informationof hostile outguards and listening posts.)

(2) Information of friendly troops is obtained from thebattalion commander, and by contact of the company com-mander or his representative with the units involved.(3) Detailed information of the terrain can often be

augmented by night patrolling.b. Direction and control. The company commander

takes advantage of every possible means of maintainingdirection and control. Such means are:(1) Prescription of a frontal attack only; never an en-

velopment.(2) Prescription of one objective only.(3) Selection of open terrain favoring the advance. (Seepar. 35c.)(4) The use of guides for movements in rear of, and for-

ward of, the line of departure. Competent guides fre-quently can be selected from patrols who have been overthe area.(5) Designation of boundaries along unmistakable terrain

features, if such exist.(6) Designation of compass directions for each element ofthe company.(7) The use of connecting files or groups, both laterallyand in depth. The need for such elements will be deter-mined by the visibility. (See (10) and e (2) below.)(8) Designation as base platoon of the platoon having themost easily identified route to follow.(9) Regulation of the rate of advance. (See d below.)(10) Prescription that the advance be made by bounds.

Bounds are made from one recognizable terrain featureto another, if possible. Where no such terrain featuresexist, columns may be directed to halt after moving a givendistance, after moving a prescribed number of steps, or atstated time intervals. (See par. 39a (3).)(11) Prescription that platoons will halt briefly at the

respective points of departure to insure coordination.(12) Retention of the company formation in platoon

columns as long as practicable. If practicable, deployment

as skirmishers should be delayed until within 100 or 200yards of the objective. However, deployment should becompleted before coming within view of hostile sentinelslocated on or in close proximity to the objective. (See g (6)below.)(13) Prescription in the attack order of the detailed mis-

sion to be accomplished by each platoon after capturingthe objective. (Platoon leaders assign squad objectives,definitely indicating the flanks.)

c. Time of attack. The time of attack is usually prescribedby the battalion commander in order to secure necessarycoordination, particularly when displacement of heavyweapons to the captured objective is contemplated. How-ever, the company commander may be called upon to sub-mit recommendations for the time of attack when therifle company constitutes the principal attacking force. Insuccessive operations within a theater of operations or ona given front, the time of attack should be varied to effectsurprise.(1) An attack launched during the first hours of darkness

frequently strikes the enemy before he has had time toorganize his position or his artillery support. It may alsoanticipate possible night operations on the part of theenemy. It may be delivered after victorious combat inorder to frustrate the enemy's attempts to organize a with-drawal at nightfall or to consolidate a position for defense.(2) An attack during the last hours of darkness may be

advantageous as a preliminary operation to a general at-tack at daybreak because it gives the defender no timeto reorganize. The attack should begin in time to completethe capture of the objective at least /2-hour before dawnin order to allow time for reorganization of the attackingtroops, as well as for other preparations to meet counter-attacks, under cover of darkness. The time of attack shouldprovide sufficient leeway to compensate for reasonabledelays, such as may be caused by waiting for hostile illu-mination to die down.

68

d. Rate of advance. Normally, the rate of advance tothe assembly area, if made across country, will be about1 mile per hour. Beyond this area, usually the rate will belimited to 100 yards in from 6 to 10 minutes, dependingupon the visibility. If prescribed by the battalion com-mander, a rate should be included in the company order.When advancing by bounds, a rate is not prescribed. Ifpracticable, the company commander should regulate therate himself and not leave it to the leader of the baseplatoon.

e. Formation. (I) Line of platoon columns is the usualformation for crossing the line of departure. If the groundin front of the objective is level or slopes evenly for somedistance and if visibility is sufficient to permit controlto be maintained, it may be desirable to change into lineof squad columns before reaching the locality where de-ployment as skirmishers is to be made. If the distancefrom the line of departure to the objective is only a fewhundred yards, it may be desirable to cross the line ofdeparture in line of squad columns. Whether in line ofplatoon columns or line of squad columns, squads may beformed in column of twos. This facilitates deployment asskirmishers. Intervals between columns are such thatskirmish lines may be formed with not over 2-pace inter-vals between men; when visibility permits, these intervalsmay be increased. Since ordinarily only men armed withthe rifle and bayonet are useful in the assault, a deployedrifle squad can usually cover about 20 yards. All men notarmed with the bayonet are placed at the rear of theirsquads or columns. They do not deploy as skirmishers,but follow closely during the assault.(2) The weapons platoons, less transportation, must be

available shortly after the capture of the objective, butshould not be so close to the rifle platoons during the ad-vance that it can become involved in the assault. It mayfollow the attacking echelon by bounds as directed fromtime to time by the company commander; in this case, a

69

liaison detail from the weapons platoon should be withthe conmpany commander to act as guides. When visibilityis good (moonlight), the platoon may be directed to followan element of the attacking echelon, with a connectinggroup following the prescribed element at the limit ofvisibility and the platoon following the connecting groupat the same distance.(3) Frequently, the width (frontage) of the objective will

require that all rifle platoons may be used in the attackingechelon. However, a support should be held out to meetan expected counterattack if the attack is not to be re-sumed at daylight. When a support is held out, it ordin-arily moves with the weapons platoon if this platoonfollows the attacking echelon. Otherwise, it follows closelythe attacking echelon but at such distance as to preventintermingling of the two elements. The support may beassigned the mission of mopping up when it reaches theobjective. If no support has been held out, one is consti-tuted from the most easily available personnel after theobjective has been captured.(4) The supporting weapons furnishing protective firesto the attacking force may be placed in position for flankprotection of the initial assault. When the terrain isfavorable for overhead fire, they may be emplaced in arearwvard position to support the attack on signal.

f. Flank security. Usually a small patrol, moving at thelimit of visibility abreast of each flank platoon, will pro-vide adequate flank protection during the advance.

g. Secrecy. In a night attack made by stealth (a silentattack), surprise is essential and is obtained chiefly throughsecrecy. Measures to secure secrecy include -(1) Keeping the exact hour of attack secret until the last

possible moment.(2) Restricting the size and activities of parties engaged in

reconnaissances and other preparations for the attack.(3) Prohibiting loading of weapons until after the capture

of the objective. (Whether or not rifles are kept unloaded

70

is a command decision. If troops executing a night attackare untrained or partially trained, rifles should be un-loaded. If troops are well trained, rifles may be kept loadedand locked and instructions given that firing will beopened only on order of an officer.)(4) Prohibiting smoking, use of lights, talking (except to

transmit orders or instructions and then in a whisper), andthe use of shiny or noisy equipment.(5) Instructing all personnel that only the bayonet will beused during the advance and attack; and insuring thatbayonets are fixed before leaving the line of departure.(Battlefield experience indicates the desirability at times

of firing rifles and flares, and employing noise during theassault (see (3) above and par. 39b) to increase the confu-sion and demoralization of the enemy.)(6) Darkening faces and hands with dirt or other available

substance.(7) Holding down the rate of advance from the line of

departure to that at which the entire company can movein silence. This rate will depend upon the terrain andvisibility.(8) Employing patrols to knock out enemy listening posts

and outguards just before the attacking force will reachtheir location.

h. Identification. (1) Means of identification for all per-sonnel must be prescribed. These may be in the battalioncommander's instructions. If not prescribed in the bat-talion order, all identifying measures must be communi-cated to the battalion commander, so that any personnelmoving to the objective before daylight can be properlyidentified. Unless special identifying means are issued, themeans prescribed must be readily available to all men.They should not be conspicuous but must be easily recog-nized at a few yards distance. (A white cloth arm bandaround each upper arm is a suitable means of visual recog-nition.) Words or noises, such as a challenge, password,

71

and reply, given in a low tone without hissing, are valuableas means of identification.(2) Distinctive marks for officers also must be prescribed.When practicable, special distinctive marks for noncom-missioned officers are desirable:

i. Maneuver. Platoons advance and attack straight tothe front, although detours of a few yards to avoid ob-stacles are permitted. Any attempt to combine a frontalattack with an envelopment usually results in an unco-ordinated assault and conflict between the two friendlyforces. (See b (1) above.)

j. Signal communications. The company commandermust insure that he knows the method or methods of call-ing for supporting fires to be put down and lifted. Wiremay be laid between the battalion and company com-manders by a wire party closely following the attackingplatoons. If possible, duplicate means such as pyrotechnicsand radiotelephones are provided. If radio is used, silencemust be maintained prior to assault. Pyrotechnics are usedin an emergency when other means fail. The followingsignals, in particular, should be well understood: objectivetaken; put down protective fires around objective; lift pro-tective fires. Patrols and security groups should improvisecalls, sounds, and noises, and practice their use for signal-ing. Night sounds peculiar to the locality may be used.All ranks should be trained in the recognition of nightsounds that might be used by the enem-

39. CONDUCT OF NIGHT ATTACK. a. Advance. (1) Theadvance is made in compact columns until close to theenemy. A silent, stealthy advance is essential to secrecy.(2) The leader of each column marches at its head. Thecompany commander marches where he can best controland regulate the advance. A noncommissioned. officermarches at the rear of each column to prevent stragglingand enforce instructions for maintaining secrecy. Column

72

leaders and the company commander constantly check onmaintenance of direction and contact.(3) Each column leader is preceded at the limit of visibilityby scouts or a small patrol. It is desirable that men whospeak the enemy language march with the leading scoutsor patrols or with the column leader. At the end of eachbound, the scouts or patrols reconnoiter for the next ad-vance while leaders verify or'restablish contact, intervals,and direction. Contact is made by designated personnelmoving from flank columns to the center column or viceversa. The advance is resumed on the company com-mander's order, transmitted by messengers or by soundsignals. If a hostile sentinel challenges, answer is made inthe enemy language while the scouts or members of theleading patrol close in with the bayonet. Designated menat the head of the column may assist the scouts or patrols;the remainder of the troops lie down until the outguardis disposed of. The company commander must prevent apremature assault from being launched as a result ofenemy fire.(4) Action of hostile patrols or outguards may force all orpart of the company to deploy as skirmishers prior to thetime planned. Elements forced to deploy reform in columnafter the resistance has been reduced. The remainingelements of the company are halted during such periodsor continue movement to the next planned halt and awaitorders.(5) Units which lose contact with adjacent units seek to

regain contact while continuing to press forward to theirown objectives.

b. Assault. Deployment may be forced by the enemyopening fire at close range; it may be executed upon ar-rival at a prescribed terrain feature; or on the order of thecompany commander. Platoon leaders acknowledge re-ceipt of such orders. The deployment must be completedrapidly; any prolonged halt at this stage of the attack in-creases the chances of detection. The advance is then

73

continued at a walk unless unusual visibility enables amore rapid pace to be assumed. Every effort must be madeto maintain the skirmish line to prevent it from breakingup into isolated groups. When resistance is encountered,the attacking personnel launch the final assault. (See par.38g (3) and (5).) Aggressive leadership by officers and non-commissioned officers is essential.

c. Action after capture of objective. Reorganization be-gins as soon as the objective is captured. All leaders,during darkness, will gather together those soldiers nearestthem and place them in position. At dawn (just prior todaylight) soldiers still separated from their units must jointheir leaders; all troops and weapons are redisposed asnecessary, to get better fields of fire. Security measures mustbe taken. Patrols should be pushed out far enough to pre-vent the enemy from secretly re-forming for counterattackwithin assaulting distance of the captured position. Anadequate support must be available by daylight to repelcounterattacks. Supporting weapons are brought up, mendig in and all other possible preparations are made todefend the position gainst hostile counterattacks at day-light. When the attack is to be continued after daylight,immediate preparations are made to continue the attack.During darkness, leaders of elements of the weaponsplatoon can select only approximate positions and observa-tion posts; they select and occupy exact firing positionsand observation posts at dawn.

SECTION VIINFILTRATION

40. GENERAL. a. Infiltration is a method of advancingunobserved into areas which are under hostile control or

74

observation. It requires decentralization of control; itmeans giving a unit, a small group, or even an individualsoldier a mission to accomplish, unaided. Upon the successof this mission often depends the success of larger actions.

b. Infiltration may be accomplished under any condi-tion of limited visibility. Fog, heavy rain, darkness, heavyundergrowth, and extremely rugged terrain, althoughmaking control and coordination more difficult, aid in-filtrating groups in reaching their objectives and accom-plishing their mission.

e. The strength of the infiltrating group or groups isdetermined by the mission. In cases where the missionentails only the securing of information, two or three well-chosen men may be more successful than a large group.On the other hand, units as large as a rifle company maybe directed to infiltrate through the enemy lines andlaunch an attack against the rear of the hostile position,coordinating this attack with the frontal drive.

d. Secrecy is an element common to all missions requir-ing the use of infiltration. If an individual is given themission of securing certain information concerning thedisposition, strength, or supplies of the enemy, he mustpenetrate the hostile lines, secure the desired information,and then return with it in time for it to be used. Themission and the withdrawal must be completed in secrecy.In other cases, such as in the attack of a supply point,destruction of a bridge, or disruption of communications,it may be necessary to maintain secrecy only until theobjective is reached; then, by a surprise shock, accomplishthe mission.

e. During infiltration, control is delegated to juniorleaders who under such restrictions as may be ordered,select their own routes, formations, and rate of advance.Providing that secrecy is not lost, airplanes may be usedto transfer infiltrating personnel across barriers, such aswide rivers or marshes, or for considerable distances intohostile territory. In the event there is a river or stream

75

penetrating the enemy lines, rafts or small boats may beused. Diversions such as firing, movement, racing motors,or pyrotechnics may be used to distract attention and thusassist the advance of infiltrating personnel into enemyterritory.

41. INfLTRATION IN CONJUNCTION WITH A COORDIN-ATED ATTACK. Prior to an attack by a larger force, therifle company or platoon may be directed to infiltratethrough the hostile forward defense during the day or atnight in order to launch a coordinated attack against therear of the hostile position, or to attack and disrupt hos-tile command, communication, and supply facilities. Ifa coordinated daylight attack is planned, the infiltrationshould be completed at least 1/2 -hour before dawn in orderto complete the preparations for the attack under coverof darkness.

a. Preparatory measures. Prior to such action, recon-naissance by the commander and his subordinates is essen-tial. The reconnaissance is supplemented by the studyof maps and aerial photographs, and whenever possible,by information obtained from the leaders or membersof patrols which have operated in the hostile area. Thepreparations of the commander include-(1) Issuance of a warning order, giving all available per-tinent information, in time to permit subordinate leadersto make their reconnaissance and complete their prepa-rations.(2) Selection of an initial assembly area within friendly

lines for initiation of the movement.(3) Selection of the point(s) at which the unit (or itscomponent groups) will pass the friendly outpost. Ar-rangements for passing through the friendly outpost.(4) Reconnaissance and marking of the route (or routes)

from the initial assembly area to the friendly outpost line.(5) Selection and reconnaissance of the route of advancebeyond the outpost line. (When extensive gaps exist be-

76

tween hostile forward elements, it may be possible for theentire unit to move together; when only small gaps exist,the movement may have to be made by small groups ad-vancing over separate routes. If more than one route isused, each group leader is responsible for reconnaissanceof the route he is to take. As few routes as possible shouldbe used, since control and reassembly of several groupswill be difficult.) The reconnaissance, made principallyfrom the map or sketch, should note the location of allridges, roads, streams, and other landmarks that may beused to aid in maintaining direction.(6) Selection of rallying points at which the unit (or eachgroup) will reassemble if surprised and scattered.(7) Selection of the assembly area to be occupied within

the enemy lines, provided the mission requires the unifiedaction of the group (s). The area selected must be easilyidentified, preferably by a predominant landmark that canbe located during darkness.(8) Selection of an alternate assembly area to be used in

case the area originally selected is found to be occupiedby the enemy.

b. Plan. Careful and detailed planning is essential. Thisplanning is not unlike the action taken prior to a nightattack (see par. 38). However, because of the nature of in-filtration missions, additional planning is necessary to in-sure secrecy and facilitate movement during periods oflimited visibility. Plans should insure that-(I) Guides are available to lead the unit up to the friendlyoutpost line; frequently guides for the route through theenemy position can be secured from patrols that have beenthrough the area.(2) Each group proceeds in column. Distances are regu-

lated by unit commanders and security is provided to thefront, flanks, and rear.(3) If the weapons platoon is employed, weapons are car-

ried by hand. If the company moves as a unit, the weaponsplatoon should be in the center of the column. If the

77

movement is made by several small groups, squads of theweapons platoon should be attached to the various groups.(4) No definite rate of advance is prescribed. The rate willdepend upon conditions of visibility, the terrain, andenemy activity. Frequently, groups may have to halt forlong periods while enemy patrols are allowed to pass orare disposed of. Hence, sufficient time should be allowedso that no group will have to hurry. Secrecy depends uponstealth and is more important than speed. For measuresto secure secrecy, see paragraph 38g.(5) Each man is provided with the equipment and suppliesneeded for at least the following day. Available silentweapons (trench knives, small axes, blackjacks, or clubs)should be carried.(6) No radios or pyrotechnics are used during the move-

ment. However, they may be carried for use after the at-tack has been launched from the assembly area in rear ofthe enemy lines.

c. Orders. The orders for such a maneuver are very de-tailed. Each man should know exactly what he is to do.The orders include not only directions for the movementto the assembly area in rear of the enemy lines, but alsofor the attack. If the attack is to be coordinated with alarge scale action, necessary instructions must be included;particular attention must be given to coordination of firesupporting the main attack to insure against losses fromsuch fires.

d. Conduct of the movement. (1) Each group advancessilently. The leader of each group is at its head. A non-commissioned officer brings up the rear of each column toprevent straggling. Each column leader constantly checksthe route and direction.(2) Each column is preceded at the limit of visibility byscouts or a patrol and is provided with flank protection.Every effort is made to avoid enemy outposts and patrols.If a hostile sentinel challenges, answer is made in theenemy language (see par. 39a (3)) while the scouts or mem-

78

bers of the leading patrol close in with bayonet or knife.Hostile patrols are disposed of in the same manner. Desig-nated men at the head of the column may assist the scoutsor patrols; other troops remain quiet.(3) If enemy personnel are found to be occupying a posi-tion where reconnaissance had shown a gap, it may benecessary to work around the enemy position until a gapcan be found.

e. Action on reaching the assembly area. (1) A groupapproaching the designated assembly area within theenemy lines should be halted while the area is reconnoi-tered. If no enemy is found, the group moves into the areaand promptly establishes an outpost.(2) Other groups approaching the area should follow the

same procedure. As soon as they have determined that thearea is occupied by friendly troops, they move in. Troopsnot necessary for the security of the area should be al-lowed to rest.(3) Leaders then reconnoiter for the attack or for what-

ever rear area action is required by the mission. Any neces-sary changes in plans and orders are made so that theattack can be launched as planned and be coordinated,if so directed, with the main attack.

42. INFILTRATION DURING AN ATTACK AND IN DE-FENSE. Small groups may be sent forward by infiltrationduring the attack or in the defense. When the attack isslowed down or stopped, or when the defense is endan-gered, infiltrating elements may be able to work their wayinto enemy-controlled terrain to cause confusion, give theimpression of an attack from a different direction, disruptcommunications or supply, or in other ways confuse andharass the enemy. They may move around organized loca-lities and threaten them from the rear. These elementsmay consist of two or three individuals, or of entire squads.Snipers may be used to infiltrate through enemy lines andoperate in hostile rear areas for extended periods without

79

resupply of food or ammunition. Personnel at commandposts, straggler lines and supply points are remunerativetargets. The action of snipers who have infiltrated to thevicinity of hostile bivouacs and assembly areas is particu..larly harassing to inexperienced troops.

43. INFILTRATION BEGUN DURING DARKNESS. Wheninfiltrating groups are to operate at night, it will be neces-sary to make additional plans in order to insure the co-ordination and control of the movement. Although dark-ness can be a great advantage to infiltrating units, itsbenefits will be lost if every man does not know his joband the detailed plans of the movement. In addition tothe plans and preparations listed in the preceding para-graphs, the following action should be taken when nightinfiltration is contemplated.

a. Warning order. The warning order should be issuedin time to permit all leaders to complete their reconnais-sances before dark. In issuing warning orders, subordinateleaders should be instructed to ready their men for nightoperations. Hands and faces should be blackened; metalor any material that will reflect light must be blackenedor removed. All noisy equipment must be discarded. Allassembly points selected must be easily identified in dark-ness; predominant terrain features are excellent references.

b. Identification. Special means of identification for allpersonnel must be prescribed. (See par. 38h.) If whitearmbands are adopted, they should be worn on each upperarm. Prearranged signals, audible for only a short distance,may be used. Tapping the rifle butt will suffice if the actiontakes place on a still night. Since the group (s) will movein columns, signals should be arranged whereby the menmay be halted and started; bunching is prohibited.

c. Orders. Orders for a night movement should includea compass bearing and all the prominent landmarks likelyto be encountered. The orders must include all of theinformation available and a complete outline of the plan.

so

Coordination and control, once the infiltration has started,will depend largely upon the completeness and thoroughunderstanding of the orders.

44. PROTECTION AGAINST INFILTRATION. Infiltrationby the enemy is guarded against by the all-around protec-tion of every unit, small or large, and by active protectionof crew-served weapons, installations, and vehicles. Notonly must harrassment be guarded against but the enemymust be prevented from gaining information by meansof infiltration. During daylight, observers are posted withineach unit area to keep the ground between these areasunder constant surveillance; areas that cannot be observedare searched by roving combat patrols. At night, listeningposts are established to cover all trails or other avenuesof approach into defense areas. Patrols, moving stealthily,cover the front and the intervals between unit areas.Additional protective measures include the unit warningsystem and use of means of identification (challenge, pass-word, and reply).

SECTION VIIATTACK IN WOODS

45. GENERAL. For the general characteristics of infantrycombat in woods, see FM 7-15, 7-20, 7-40, and 100-5. Thissection discusses the rifle company in attack against thenear edge of woods, the advance through woods, and thedebouchment from woods.

46. AGAINST NEAR EDGE. a. During an advance over openground to the edge of woods attacking rifle companies may

81

be under the observation and fire of a concealed enemy.Consequently they frequently attack at night (see sec. V)or under cover of smoke.

b. When the attack gains the edge of woods, it may benecessary for the company to halt and reorganize. Sincethe edge of the woods is a favorable target'for hostile art-illery and aviation, only a minimum time is allowed forreorganization. In planning his attack against the nearedge of the woods the company commander must also planhis reorganization and advance through the woods. By sodoing, he can reduce the time needed for subordinateleaders to redispose their units.

c. In his initial attack order, the company commandergives platoon instructions for their reorganization and in-cludes provisions for patrols to establish and maintain con-tact with the enemy. He also makes provision for flankprotection and the maintenance of contact with adjacentunits. He gives platoons tentative instructions regardingformations, frontages, and maintenance of contact duringthe advance through the woods.

47. ADVANCE THROUGH WOODS. a. As soon as the neces-sary reorganization has been effected, the company com-mander promptly confirms or modifies his tentative in-structions, prescribes objectives, and starts the advance.A magnetic azimuth is assigned each platoon and specialprecautions are taken to prevent loss of direction. Thecompany commander and his command group generallyfollow close behind the center of the leading echelon. Therate of advance depends upon the degree of visibility with-in the woods; it must permit contact with adjacent units.Periodic halts to restore contact and cohesion may be madeat specified times, or on selected lines as directed by thebattalion commander.

b. Dispositions depend upon the difficulty of movementand the visibility within the woods. In sparse woods, lead-ing elements may be deployed in line of skirmishers. In

82

dense woods, a line of squad columns often is the bestformation for the leading elements of the company. Scoutsprecede each leading unit, reconnoitering to the front andflanks. Rear units of the company ordinarily follow inplatoon column. Connecting files or groups are employedwhenever visual contact between units, or between unitsand scouts or patrols, is impracticable. Unless adjacentunits are in close contact constant flank security is impera-tive on account of the possibility of hostile surprise attack.Unless other elements of the battalion are followingclosely, protection to the rear is also essential.

c. Light machine guns can take advantage of clearingsand gaps in the line of riflemen to deliver a large volumeof fire at short range. They are retained under companycontrol and follow closely behind the attacking echelon.The mortars are used whenever openings in the woodspermit observed fire. A mortar is frequently attached toeach leading rifle platoon because there is seldom suitableobservation for effective employment of mortars fromn acentral location.

d. When scouts or patrols encounter resistance whichthey cannot overcome, leading platoons immediately de-ploy and close with the enemy, employing envelopingmaneuver whenever possible. Success depends largely onintelligent and aggressive leadership by platoon andsquad leaders. The company commander directs such firesupport by his weapons platoon as is practicable, andcalls for heavy machine-gun fire when terrain and otherconditions permit. He employs his support element as thesituation requires. Assistance from 81-mm mortars, in-fantry howitzers, and artillery is frequently limited bylack of observation and the difficulty of defining targets.The company commander, however, calls for'their sup-port when necessary and practicable.

48. DEBOUCHMENT FROM WOODS. The leading platoonshalt short of the far edge of the woods. The company

as

commander sends reconnaissance patrols (see FM 21-75)forward to determine the location and strength of hostileresistance to the front, and directs that supportingweapons of the company be brought up. Reorganizationof the platoons is conducted at sufficient distance withinthe woods to avoid hostile fires on the edge of the woods.The company commander promptly plans his advanceto the next objective and issues orders to platoon leaders.He disposes the weapons platoon to protect the debouch-ment from the edge of the woods and makes arrangementsfor support by heavy weapons, or the artillery, or both.Terrain and volume and kind of enemy fire will greatlyinfluence the debouchment - whether it is made byrushes of small groups or individuals.

SECTION VIIIATTACK OF TOWNS AND VILLAGES

49. REFERENCES. For general characteristics of infantrycombat in towns and villages, see FM 100-5. For employ-ment of individuals and units up to and including theinfantry regiment and its supporting arms, see FM 31-50.

SECTION IXATTACK OF RIVER LINE

50. GENERAL. For the general principles governing opera-tions at river lines, see FM 740 and 100-5. For the

infantry battalion in the attack of a river line, see FM7-20. The company will usually cross as part of its bat-talion. It may be assigned as a leading rifle unit to crossin assault boats or as a reserve to cross on bridges or byferry. This discussion deals with leading units. After re-ceipt of warning orders the company commander recon-noiters the areas in which his units will operate. Uponreceipt of the battalion order, he makes such additionalreconnaissance as time and concealment permit. Whenpracticable, his reconnaissance includes routes from therear assembly area to the final assembly area, and fromthe final assembly area to the river bank.

51. ASSEMBLY AREA. a. Rear. The company moves to andoccupies a position in the rear assembly area as directedby the battalion commander. This area is usually beyondhostile light artillery range and within easy night march-ing distance of the river.

b. Final. Final assembly areas are selected for each bat-talion crossing in the leading echelon. Frequently, finalassembly areas are assigned' to each leading rifle company,the companies of each battalion marching directly fromthe battalion rear assembly area to the company finalassembly areas. Here the engineer crews assigned to indi-vidual boats join the infantry. The final assembly area isthe point where assault boats are placed in readiness byengineers along the foot routes to the river for the finalcarry by hand to the launching area at the river bank.

52. PLANS AND ORDERS. The company commander com-pletes his plan in the rear assembly area. He issues ordersto subordinates in time for their detailed planning. Ifpracticable, he takes them forward to the river bank toissue his order and permit their detailed reconnaissanceon the ground. He plans the movement so as to provideas little delay as practicable in the final assembly area

and no delay at the river bank. In addition to the datausually furnished in combat orders the river crossingorder will cover. the following:

a. Location of the final assembly area, routes thereto,and hour of arrival in that area.

b. Method of march control to the final assembly area(guides, control points, etc.).

c,. Allotment of assault boats to platoons or groups.d. Formation for the crossing.e. Objectives and missions for the respective platoons.f. Time of crossing for each platoon.g. Instructions for division into boat'groups.h. Instructions regarding supply, evacuation, control,

location of company commander, and communication.

53. MOVEMENT TO RIVER. a. The movement of a com-pany to the final assembly area may be made under bat-talion control or it may be under the company com-mander. Prior to leaving the rear assembly area, thecompany commander divides the company into boatgroups. Tactical unity is maintained as far as practicable.Upon arrival of the company at its final assembly area,engineer guides meet the company and conduct groupsto the boats. All subsequent movement to the river isunder control of engineer troops. Groups march in col-umn of twos in order to pick up boats without changeof formation. The engineer guides lead groups to theboats, the boats are picked up, and the groups move onin silence. Each boat is carried by the infantrymen whowill cross in it.

b. (1) An assault boat will safely transport any one ofthe loads listed below:

12 men with individual weapons and combatequipment. 10 men with two caliber .30 light ma-chine guns and 20 boxes of ammunition.

10 men (two 60-mm mortar squads) with two60-mm mortars and 72 rounds of ammunition.

'(2) The capacity loads listed are exclusive of three engi-neer soldiers, who assist in paddling the loaded boat, andwho remain with the boat to bring it back across the streamfor additional loads. For detailed loading tables, see TM5-271.

c. Three engineer soldiers are habitually assigned toeach assault boat as its crew; they guide and supervise theapproach to the river, the launching and loading of theboat, and all movement on the water.

54. CROSSING WATER. Departures from the final as-sembly areas are timed to permit leading units to crosssimultaneously on a broad front, but once these unitsleave the final assembly areas they do not halt and noattempt is made to maintain alinement between boats.Normally, there is no firing from the boats when thecrossing is made under cover of darkness. No effort shouldbe made to paddle upstream in order to counteract drift,unless the relative positions of landing and embarkationpoints and the nature of the current have led to priororders to such effect. Alternate crossing points are de-signated for use by succeeding waves if required.

55. FORMATION. The rifle company usually crosses withthe three rifle platoons abreast. The weapons platoon andcommand group of the company normally follow as soonas the rifle platoons have reached the far bank. The com-pany aid men are attached to one of the rifle platoons inthe first wave.

56. ACTION AFTER LANDING. Platoon leaders selectprominent features of the terrain on which to rally theboatloads of their men as they land. The river bank iscleared promptly. When landing in darkness, all men

hold their fire, and as enemy groups near the bank dis-close themselves by firing, they close with the bayonet.Rifle company commanders usually proceed with orfollow immediately behind the leading elements. Theweapons platoon follows the rifle platoons to the com-pany objective, and emplaces its weapons to repel acounterattack and to support the further advance. Assoon as the company commander has regained control ofhis company, he orders the resumption of the advance toseize the company's portion of the battalion objective.

57. ANTIMECHANIZED DEFENSE. Troops must be pre-pared to meet a counterattack, particularly by tanks,soon after their crossing. Antitank rifle grenadiers coverthe most probable avenues of tank approach, particularlyagainst the flanks of the company. Designated two-manrocket teams are employed as directed by the companycommander.

58. ANTIAIRCRAFT SECURITY. Higher commanders pro-vide both aviation and antiaircraft artillery protectionagainst hostile planes. Antiaircraft weapons remainsilentuntil the crossing is 'discovered by the enemy.

59. COMPANY WEAPON CARRIERS. The battalion orderprescribes the location of company transportation. Com-pany vehicles may be transported across the river by float,by ferry, or may be driven over a ponton bridge after itscompletion. They should be crossed early in the operation.The rifle company takes a limited supply of ammunitionin the assault boats,

60. COMMUNICATION AND CONTROL. Control duringthe crossing and advance to the company objective ismainly a responsibility of squad and platoon leaders. Thecompany commander resumes control as early as possible.

The company will reestablish communication with thebattalion command post as soon as possible after thecrossing is effected. The usual means of signal commn-nication are messengers, radio, and prearranged visualsignals.

61. IMPROVISED CROSSING. a. Rifle companies as a partof advance guards and pursuing detachments frequentlycross a stream or river by surprise, making use of themeans at hand. This operation is usually executed underthe direction of the battalion commander. The rifle com-pany commander may order a crossing on his own initia-tive under similar circumstances. The doctrines andtechnique of crossing with improvised means are similarto those described for a crossing with standard equipment.

b. Crossing is accomplished by use of boats found in theneighborhood, or imperfectly destroyed bridges. Whereno better means are available, the rifle company crossesby swimming and with rafts or floats made from its ownequipment. All the combat equipment of a rifle companycan be crossed with swimmers as follows:(1) The two-man rifle float can be prepared by two

men in 7 minutes. The two shelter halves (one on top ofthe other) are spread on the ground, and the remainingitems of the packs, the clothing, and other equipment oftwo riflemen are placed centrally on the top shelter half.The rifles, with bayonets and scabbards attached, crossedto give rigidity to the bundle, are then placed on top ofthe packs and clothing. The float is completed by bindingthe four corners of the outside shelter half to the fourextremities of the rifles by means of the shelter tent ropes.(See fig. 80 and (.) In a similar manner, using two 4-foot

sticks or two shelter tent poles instead of rifles, a lightmachine gun, a 60-mm mortar, two rocket launchers, ortwo automatic rifles can be floated in a shelter tent. Care

must be exercised to keep moisture from the electricalconnections of rocket launchers.(2) Ammunition and other supplies vital to the initialstage of the operation on the enemy side are apportionedto the two-man teams and ferried across.

.04i

Figure 8

SECTION XATTACK OF FORTIFIED POSITION

62. REFERENCES. For a general discussion of the employ-ment of infantry in an attack against a fortified position,see FM 100-5. For the characteristics of permanent fortifi-cations, the organization of assault units, and the methodsof attack such fortifications, see FM 31-50.

SECTION XIRAIDS

63. BY RIFLE COMPANY. a. The rifle company as a unitwill usually be employed only in a supported raid. (Sup.ported raids, which may be made in daylight or darkness,depend for protection both on surprise and on the fire ofsupporting weapons. Unsupported raids are conductedwithout the fires of supporting weapons and depend pri-marily on surprise and on darkness, fog, or smoke forprotection.) The battalion commander will prescribe themission, objective, and time. He may secure the recom-mendations of the company commander in prescribingthe routes of advance and withdrawal and in arrangingand coordinating the fire support. He will make thenecessary arrangements for rehearsals. Other details maybe prescribed by him or left to the discretion of the com-pany commander.

b. After preliminary reconnaissance, the company com-mander must decide all details concerning organization,equipment, training, and conduct of the raid which have

91

not been prescribed by the battalion commander. Heorganizes assault and support parties and designatesleaders and missions for each party. The weapons platoonmay be employed to protect the flanks; to assist in cover-ing the withdrawal; to reinforce supporting fires; or tofurnish carrying parties for captured material or guardsfor prisoners. In addition to the support parties for theusual missions, the company commander should plan tohave one support party, including rocket teams, directionunder his control for use against unexpected enemy re-sistance or counterattack. During the night, enemy reserveelements may occupy positions which were not occupiedduring daylight. These positions may not have beenlocated. Consequently, the company commander must beprepared to deal promptly with unexpected resistancewhich may endanger the success of the raid.

c. When there are to be no preparation fires by support-ing weapons, the company commander must carefullyplan the time when he is to give the signal for protectivefires which "box-in" the objective. This will involvedetermining just where his assault parties should be whenthe signal is given. If the protective fires come down toosoon, the hostile garrison may be aroused, and if fires aredelayed too long hostile supporting weapons from ad-jacent areas can bring effective fires on the raiding' force.

d. Prior to the raid the rifle company commander andthe leaders of his parties conduct secret daylight recon-naissance and at least one night reconnaissance. Ordersfor the raid must be detailed and complete, and must bethoroughly understood by all participants. All must beable to distinguish between pyrotechnics used as signalsfor withdrawal and those for supporting fires.

e. The raid is conducted as a night attack (sec. V) fol-lowed by withdrawal as soon as the mission is accom-plished. The company commander, with his commandgroup, places himself in the formation where he can best

92

control the action and determine when to order the with-drawal.

64. RAID BY ELEMENT OR RIFLE COMPANY. The rifle com-pany commander may be directed to stage a raid with aplatoon or smaller element of the company. Such a raidmay be supported or unsupported. (See par. 63.) Thecompany commander will detail the leader of the raidand designate the unit to make it. Subject to his instruc-tions from the battalion commander he will order themission, time, objective, and routes of advance and with-drawal. When the raid is to be supported, he will arrangewith the battalion commander for fire support. Whentime permits, he will arrange for rehearsals on ground assimilar to the scene of the raid as can be located.

65. DAYLIGHT RAIDS. Daylight raids will usually be sup-ported. There will usually be preparation fires by sup-porting weapons and smoke will ordinarily be used to pro-tect the raiding force. In other respects the preparation andconduct of the raid are similar to those for the night raid.

CHAPTER 3

DEFENSIVE COMBAT

SECTION IGENERAL

66. TACTICAL EMPLOYMENT. a. General. For the actionsof the rifle company in approach march and in assemblyareas, see paragraphs 16, 17, and 18. For security missionson the march and in assembly areas, see chapter 4. Fordiscussion of defensive doctrine, see FM 100-5.

b. Missions. The rifle company may be employed to or-ganize, occupy, and defend a company defense area on themain line of resistance, or it may constitute the battalionreserve.

67. ACTION BY COMPANY COMMANDER. a. Upon re-ceipt of the battalion defense order, the company com-mander takes the necessary steps to formulate his planand move the company onto the position. These stepsinclude the following:(1) Make a map study and tentative plan of defense.(2) Provide for the movement of the company to theposition.(3)Designate the time and place for the issuance of the

94

company order, and notify the personnel to be present toreceive this order (normally the platoon leaders).(4) Plan the ground reconnaissance and confer with ad-

jacent commanders and battalion staff officers.(5) Check the tentative defense plan by a personal recon-naissance of the ground.(6) Complete the company plan of defense.(7) Issue the company defense order to platoon leaders,(8) Notify the battalion commander as to the company

plan of defense.(9) Supervise the execution of the defense order.

b. The requirements of speed and immediate action mayfrequently require the issuance of fragmentary orders andhasty occupation of a position without prior detailed re-connaissance by the company commander.

68. RECONNAISSANCE. The company commander's recon-naissance is as detailed as time and the situation permit.He first positively identifies his area. The reconnaissancethen covers -

a. The immediate foreground of the position, to deter-mine -(1) Areas which afford the enemy close covered approach

to the position.(2) Natural obstacles and exposed stretches of terrain

over which the enemy must pass.(3) Commanding features of the terrain which may be

occupied as hostile observation posts; and areas withinthe defensive position which will be exposed to hostileobservation. ,(4) Terrain features from which company observers can

overlook the hostile approach.b. The details of the ground within the defense area to

determine -,(1) Coordination with supporting weapons to be placed

within the company area, and coordination with adjacentunits.(2) Locations for subordinate defense areas (usuallyplatoon).(3) Location of the 60-mm mortars to cover with fire theapproaches most dangerous to the position.(4) Positions for rocket teams. (See par. 3f.)(5) Location of the company observation post.(6) Location of the company command post.

69. RIFLE COMPANY DEFENSE ORDER. The company ordershould include -

a. Information of the enemy, including direction fromwhich and time when enemy attack is expected.

b. Information of supporting and adjacent units.c. Company mission.d. Areas and missions of each rifle platoon.a'e Location and missions of the 60-mm mortars, light

machine guns, and rocket teams. The location and mis-sions of the light machine guns are assigned by battalionand coordinated by the heavy weapons company com-mander.

f. Security.g. Priority of construction.h. Engineer tools, ammunition supply, and other admin-

istrative details.i. Location of the battalion aid station.i. Command and observation posts.

70. AMMUNITION SUPPLY IN DEFENSE. For ammunitionsupply in defense, see paragraph 214e.

71. RELIEF. a. The relief of a company on the battle posi-tion is preceded by a detailed reconnaissance of the defensearea by officers and appropriate noncommissioned officersof the relieving unit. Company officers familiarize them-

selves not only with the disposition of the defending forcebut also with the known hostile dispositions on that partof the front. Arrangements are completed for the transferof any supplies and special equipment to be left on theposition by the company being relieved.

b. Usually, the company being relieved takes with it allindividual and organizational equipment, but only theammunition prescribed in the relief order. Emplacements,shelters and latrines are left clean. Guides are detailedfrom the relieved unit to meet each platoon of the reliev-ing company and conduct it to its position.

c. Secrecy in planning and conducting the relief is essen-tial to its successful accomplishment. The relief should bemade under cover of darkness, and at such time as to per-mit the relieved unit to be beyond artillery range prior todaylight. Incoming leaders inspect the position of eachsubordinate element as soon as occupation is completedto insure readiness for defensive action. The company com-mander of the relieving unit reports to his battalion com-mander as soon as the company is in position.

d. The execution of the relief takes place under thedirection of the company commander being relieved; heremains responsible for the defense of the company areauntil the relief has been completed.

SECTION IIFRONT-LINE RIFLE COMPANY

IN DEFENSE

72. GENERAL. a. Mission. The mission of the front-linecompany in defense is, with the support of other weapons,

97

to stop the enemy by fire in front of the main line of re-sistance and, if he reaches it, to repel his assault by closecombat.

b. Dispositions. A rifle company assigned to the defenseof an area on the main line of resistance is disposed tocover the assigned front with fire, coordinate its fires withand mutually support the units on its flanks; afford closerifle protection to the supporting weapons emplaced with-in its area; and be able to offer resistance in any directionfor the protection of its flanks and rear. Its subordinateelements are distributed in width and depth so as to bemutually supporting and capable of all around defense,

73. FRONTAGES AND DEPTH. a. Frontages. Tjhe battalioncommander assigns frontages to his front-line companiesin accordance with natural defensive strength and relativeimportance of their defense areas. Where a company oc-cupies a vital area having poor observation and poor fieldsof fire, such as in heavily wooded, broken terrain, its front-age should not exceed 500 yards. Where the terrain is moreopen and affords longer fields of fire, a frontage of 800 to1,000 yards may be assigned. Where theterrain is open andflat, or natural obstacles across the front render the areaunlikely to be attacked in strength, the frontage assignedto the company may exceed this maximum figure.

b. Depth. The distance from front to rear, between gar-risons in successive platoon defense areas, should notexceed the effective range of rifle fire (500 yards). It shouldbe great enough to insure that no garrison is in the zoneof artillery fire directed at the next garrison to the frontor rear (150 yards).

c. Boundaries. The company defense area is defined inthe battalion order by indicating boundaries, and limitingpoints on the main line of resistance (an imaginary linejoining the forward edge of the most advanced organizeddefense areas). The boundaries define the company area

of responsibility. All defensive elements and installationsof the company are included within its boundaries.

d. Limiting points. Points at which the main line of re-sistance intersect the company boundaries are designatedby the battalion commander and are termed limitingpoints. Adjacent commanders coordinate their defensesin the vicinity of these limiting points to insure that nogaps exist in the fires across the front of the position.

74. DISTRIBUTION OF PLATOONS. a. General. (I) The dis-tribution usually places two rifle platoons in defense ofthe main line of resistance and one rifle platoon in sup-port. However, the tactical requirements of each situationmust be evaluated and distribution of elements made ac-cordingly. Exceptionally, when the area assigned to aplatoon does not lend itself to control by the platoonleader, the platoon may occupy two defense areas with theplatoon sergeant in command of one. Integrity of riflesquads is maintained. For schematic diagrams illustrating

Figure 9. Distribution of company in defense

99

MLR

X/

TWO PLATOONS USUALLY DEPLOYEO ON MLR

SUPPORT PLATOON PLACED TO SUPPORT MLR.MUST BE ABLE TO PROTECT BY FIRE AGAINSTATTACK FROM AREAS K AND Z OR FIRE INTO

AREA Y

distribution of the company in defense, with two platoonson the main line of resistance, see figure 90 to O.;(2) A hostile force (luring daylight makes maximum useof covered approaches to attack a defensive position: atnight his advance usually is made over more open areas.Therefore, where a choice of defensive positions is avail-able, during daylight platoons are disposed to block ad-vances utilizing such covered approaches; while interven-ing areas exposed to hostile observation arid long-rangefires are covered by defensive fires - preferably those ofmachine guns. At night, platoons are disposed to block theopen areas, covered approaches being protected by one ormore stationary flank combat patrols. (See fig. 90 and ®and pars. 21i, 84 g, and 171.)

OSI. DAY

r:

DA LOCANS 0 OWING DISTRIBU~ION OF RIFLE PLATOONS IN DEFENSE

Figure 9. Distribution of company in defense-Continued

b. Front-line defense areas. While a rifle platoon willnot ordinarily actually occupy a width of more than 300yards, it is capable of defending a wider area by its fire.The width that can be assigned to a platoon will be de-pendent upon the fields of fire the obstacles existing in its

front, and the supporting fires covering the area. Widegaps may thus exist between minor defense areas providedthese gaps can be covered effectively by fire and the adja-cent units are capable of a mutual exchange of fires acrosstheir front. The responsibility for defending a hostile


101

C0

IOYEN ITERRAIN

DISRISUTJON Or RIFLE PLATOONS IN DEFENSE ON OPEN TERRAIN


avenue of approach is given to one leader. Likewise wherepossible, the approach and the terrain blocking that ap-proach are included in the defense area assigned to thatleader.

. R COUNTER. 7

OD

POSITIONS AND ASSEMOLES IN COVEREO CENTRAL LOCATION TOEPARETO OCCUPY EITHER POSITI-ONR COUNTERATTACK


c. Support platoon. (I) The support platoon organizesa position from which it is capable of firing to the flanksof the forward platoon defense areas, in the gaps betweenthe platoons, and within the forward areas in case theyare overrun. See fig. 90. It usually provides protection ofthe flanks and rear of the company area.(2) If the terrain is such that the support platoon cannotaccomplish its missions from a single position, and con-cealed routes for movement within the area are available,more than one position may be organized and the platoonheld in a covered position prepared to move to either lo-cation. (See fig. 9®.)(3) Where the open nature of the terrain will prevent

such movement, once the fire fight has commenced, the

support platoon may have to organize and occupy morethan one defense area. (See fig. 9®.)(4) Wheie fire support of the front line cannot be ob-tained and suitable defilade and concealment exist, theplatoon may organize positions in depth and may thenbe held mobile to occupy one or more of these positionsor to counterattack to regain a forward area. (See fig. 9).)(5) The decision to counterattack or to occupy a prepared

position is made by the company commander.d. Weapons platoon. (1) The battalion commander as-

signs the locations and missions of the light machine guns.(2) The 60-mm mortars closely support the forward de-

fense areas and are located to cover the most dangerousavenues of approach to the company area. When a platoondefense area cannot be effectively supported by mortar fireunder company control a mortar squad may be attachedto that platoon. Otherwise, mortars are retained undercompany control.

e. Rocket launchers. Positions for rocket teams shouldbe selected near the perimeter of the company to coverlikely avenues of approach for armored vehicles. When-ever practicable, these positions should permit fire on sec-ondary targets such as crew-served weapons and groupedpersonnel. (See par. 3f.) When required by the nature ofthe terrain, the company commander may assign rocketlaunchers to front line platoon (s).

75. FIRE PLAN. The company commander insures thatthe foreground of his area is covered by small-arms fire andthat his platoon defense areas on the main line of resist-ance are located to facilitate the mutual exchange of fires.He contacts the commanders of the units on his flanks andcoordinates his fires with theirs so that adjacent units aremutually supporting and no gaps are left in the fires alongthe boundaries. He ascertains the locations of the preparedclose defensive fires of the cannon company, the support-ing artillery, the 81-mm mortars, and machine guns; he

covers the gaps with rifle and automatic rifle fires andwith primary target areas of the 60-mm mortars. (See par.198b.)

76. OBSERVATION POST. The company observation post(see app. I) should afford a view of all or the greater partof the company defense area and of the approaches thereto.Observation to the flanks is highly important. The observa-tion post is the battle station of the company commander;however, he is free to go where his presence is demanded.The command post is kept informed of his location.

77. COMMAND POST. The company command post is lo-cated in rear of the organized defense area of the supportplatoon. It should be in defilade and concealed from aerialobservation. Covered and concealed routes to the frontand to the rear are desirable to facilitate communicationwith the platoon leaders and the battalion command post.

78. ORGANIZATION OF GROUND. a. The organization ofthe company defense area is limited only by the time andfacilities available. In the absence of special instructionsall men first dig standing type one-man foxholes. Maxi-mum use is made of natural and artificial concealmentand cover against both ground and air observation andfire. Special construction tasks, such as laying mine fieldsor constructing obstacles, may be allotted to the company.

(See FM 5-30.) The battalion order states the order inwhich the tasks are to be executed. Work is conductedsimultaneously on several tasks. Camouflaging, and otherprovisions for concealment, are performed concurrentlywith other work. (See FM 5-20.)

b. Organization of exposed areas subjected to intenseartillery or aerial bombardment may have to be accom-plished piecemeal during daylight by .scattered individ-uals. If such procedure is impracticable, the organizationof these exposed positions is postponed until dark.

79. ANTIMECHANIZED DEFENSE. a. The company takesadvantage of all passive means of defense. Natural ob-stacles are improved and antitank mines are used whenavailable. Mines are covered by fire to prevent the enemyfrom removing them before or during the tank attack.Mine fields are marked and a record of their locationmade and submitted to the next higher commander.Adjacent units are also informed of their location. Guardsare placed over antitank mine fields to prevent casualtiesto friendly troops and vehicles. In front of the main lineof resistance, guards are withdrawn when the outpost orother covering forces withdraw.

b. Basic principles governing antimechanized fires areset forth in paragraph 12c (2).

80. ANTIAIRCRAFT SECURITY. a. Dispersion, camouflage,and foxholes comprise the individual's best protectionagainst aircraft.

b. For conditions under which fires are delivered at air-craft, see paragraph 12c (3).

c. Weapons on the main line of resistance will not fireat aircraft until it is obvious that the location of thatline is known to the enemy. Weapons of units on themain line of resistance may be located initially in supple-mentary positions to permit them to fire antiaircraft mis-sions.

d. The automatic rifles of the support platoon are lo-cated initially for the antiaircraft protection of the com-pany.

61. LOCAL SECURITY. a. Whether or not the position isprotected by an outpost, the company is responsible forits own local security. During daylight, observers areposted to observe the foreground in order to give suffi-cient warning of hostile approach to enable the companyto man its position. If the planned routes of withdrawal

of the outpost lead past the company area, these routesare included within the areas of surveillance of the ob-servers.

b. Observation posts consist of single or double sentinelsgenerally detailed from the support platoon. They areposted on the nearest terrain features affording the de-sired observation, generally not over 400 yards from theposition.

c. At night listening posts are established on the ave-nues of approach. These are supplemented by patrols.

d. At least one sentinel is on duty at all times withineach subordinate defense area. At night, double sentinelsare posted.

82. HASTY OCCUPATION OF POSITION. In the hasty occu-pation of a position, the first considerations are to get thetroops on the position, to have them start digging in, andto provide for local security. The elements of the com-pany and any attached weapons are located for the all-around defense of the company defense area. As timepermits, coordination with adjacent units is accomplished.

83. NIGHT DISPOSITIONS. It is usually necessary to makecertain adjustments at night to meet the conditions ofreduced visibility. The decision to adopt night disposi-tions in case of fog or smoke rests with the battalioncommander. For the rifle company, these actions include:

a. Laying light machine guns on final protective linesand 60-mm mortars on primary target areas. (See FM23-85.)

b. Placing squads from the support platoon in areas thatcannot be blocked by fire.

c. Detailing patrols to the front to contact the enemy andwarn of his approach.

d. Establishing listening posts.e. Illuminating the foreground by flares,

84. CONDUCT OF DEFENSE. a. During the hostile prepara-tion fires, personnel occupying frontline defense areastake cover in their foxholes or emplacements. The hostileattacking force is not engaged by riflemen or otherweapons occupying positions in the vicinity 'of the for-ward rifle platoons until the enemy is within effectiverifle range (500 yards). Observers in each forward defensearea keep the foreground under continuous observation.

b. As the hostile attacking forces come within range theyare held under fire by weapons sited for long-range fires- artillery, infantry howitzers, mortars, and machine guns.(1) Light machine guns may temporarily occupy supple-

mentary positions for such fire in accordance with thebattalion order. These supplementary positions must beat least 200 yards ahead or in rear of the forward defenseareas in order that the locations of forward defenses willnot be disclosed prematurely. A covered route to theprimary gun postions must be available. Guns occupyingsupplementary positions for the initial fires are movedto their primary or alternate emplacements prior to ar-rival of the attacking force within effective rifle range.(2) Light mortars located in the vicinity of the company

support area execute fire missions within their effectiverange. Mortars emplaced in the vicinity of the forwarddefense areas withhold their fire until the fires of thosedefense areas are opened.

c. As the hostile attack comes within effective riflerange, all weapons of the forward defense areas open fireon appropriate targets to inflict maximum casualties andstop the hostile attack before it reaches their positions.Requests for supporting fires are made by the companycommander or commanders of subordinate defense areasdiiectly to the nearest observers - artillery, cannon com-pany, or heavy weapons company. Requests may also bemade by the company commander to the battalion com-mander for such fires.

d. If the attacking elements reach the area covered byplanned close-in defensive fires, machine guns shift theirfires to final protective lines and mortars fire on theirprimary target areas, while riflemen and automatic rifle-men increase their rate of fire against the most threaten-ing targets. If the enemy assaults, he is met successively byfire, grenades and rockets, and hand-to-hand combat.

e. If the enemy succeeds in penetrating the position, hisadvance is resisted by the company support, either by firefrom its prepared position or by counterattack. The deci-sion to counterattack rests with the company commander.To be successful a counterattack must be delivered quick-ly, before the enemy has a chance to organize to meet it.

f. In case the company becomes surrounded, the com-pany commander makes such redistribution of any sup-porting weapons in his area as he considers necessary forits continued all-around defense.

g. When visibility has been reduced by fog or smoke, thebattalion commander decides whether alternate nightpositions are to be occupied. (See par. 74a (2).)

SECTION IIIRESERVE RIFLE COMPANY

IN DEFENSE

85. GENERAL. The front-line battalion in defense fre-quently places two rifle companies on the main line ofresistance and one in reserve. The battalion order pre-scribes the missions for the reserve company and thepriority of these missions. The battalion commander con-trols the employment of the reserve company.

86. MISSIONS. Missions which may be assigned the reservecompany are -

a. Increase depth of battalion defense area. Where thekey terrain of the battalion defense area is located in therear portion of the battalion area, the position organizedby the reserve company provides the defense of thatlocality. However, the position must be within rifle sup-porting distance (500 yards) of the support echelons ofthe forward companies. It should be at least 150 yardsfrom that echelon, so as to be outside the zone of disper-sion of artillery fire directed at the main line of resistance.Platoons are assigned and defend areas similar to thoseof front-line platoons. Fires and positions are coordinatedwith those of the heavy machine guns located in the bat-talion reserve area in order to prevent or limit hostilepenetrations, to assure a cohesive defense, and to provideclose small-arms protection for the heavy machine guns.

b. Protect flanks of batallion. In case of a penetrationin an adjacent area, the reserve company may occupy aflank line of resistance from which it can prevent thewidening of the penetration and envelopment of thethreatened flank or it may counterattack to assist theadjacent unit. Wthere the battalion has an unprotectedflank, the reserve company is disposed to protect it.

c. Counterattack. (1) The reserve company may be em-ployed in counterattack to restore a portion of the posi-tion or to eject the enemy from a certain area. Plans areprepared in advance to meet various situations.(2) The battalion order states the assumed penetrationsagainst which counterattack plans are to be prepared.The preparation of these plans is the function of thereserve company commander.(3) Counterattacks are planned to strike the enemy inflank with the greatest possible force. They are not di-rected against objectives outside the battalion area excepton orders of higher authority, nor is the enemy pursued

beyond the main line of resistance, except by fire. Use ofroutes of approach through an adjacent battalion areaare coordinated with that battalion commander duringthe planning stage and at the time of execution of thecounterattack.(4) Supporting fires of all classes are planned, to includethe fires of the weapons platoon, the cannon and heavyweapons companies, and the supporting artillery. Co-ordination of these fires is arranged with respective com-pany commanders and the artillery liaison officer. Thesefires should be concentrated across the base of the pene-tration to prevent further hostile entry into the defensearea.(5) The counterattack plins are submitted to the bat-

talion commander for approval. When time and otherconditions permit, each plan should be rehearsad on theground. As a minimum, the subordinate leaders are takenover the ground and the plans explained in detail.(6) The counterattack is launched on order of the bat-talion commander.

d. Establish combat outpost. All or part of the reservecompany may be detailed initially to establish a combatoutpost. For a discussion of combat outposts, see para-graph 106.

e. Assist in organization of forward areas. Workingparties may be detailed to the forward areas to assist inclearing fields of fire, erecting obstacles, laying antitankmine fields, constructing emplacements and entrench-ments, executing camouflage, and performnning similartasks.

87. WEAPONS PLATOON. a. The location and missions forthe light machine-gun section are included in the bat-talion order and coordinated by the heavy weapons com-pany commander.

b. The 60-mm mortar section may be given initial loca-tions and missions by the battalion commander in sup-

port of the main line of resistance. This will generally belimited to close defensive fires. The mortars may be em-placed so as to utilize fire data obtained from the observa-tion and communication system of the 81-mm mortars.

88. OBSERVATION POST. The initial observation post ofthe reserve company should be near the battalion observa-tion post. The company commander must have early in-formation of the situation within the battalion area andbe in close touch with the battalion commander. Subse-quently, the observation post is located to give the bestobservation of the area in which the company is com-mitted.

89. COMMAND POST. The reserve company commandpost is in or near the company assembly area and close tothe battalion command post. When the company occupiesa position or makes a counterattack, the command postmoves with the company.

90. ORGANIZATION OF GROUND. The priority of con-struction of the several defensive positions of the reservecompany is stated in the battalion order. The organizationof each position includes clearing fields of fire and con-struction and concealment of individual shelters, weaponemplacement, and obstacles.

91. COMPANY ASSEMBLY AREA. Within its assembly area,the company is held in platoon groups sufficiently dis-persed to reduce casualties. Depending on the length oftime the company expects to occupy the assembly area, itconstructs individual protection for its weapons and men.(See app. I.)

92. ANTIMECHANIZED DEFENSE. When the reserve com-pany occupies a prepared position, the doctrines of anti-

112

mechanized defense for a front line company apply. (Seepar. 12c (2).) In the assembly area, the antitank rifle grena-diers and two-man rocket teams are disposed to coverpossible tank approaches. A counterattack by the reservecompany is not launched while there is still an immedatethreat of a hostile mechanized attack.

93. ANTIAIRCRAFT SECURITY. Reserve company automaticriflemen are disposed for the antiaircraft protection of theassembly area. The assembly area also receives secondaryprotection from the heavy machine guns in the rear por-tion of the battalion defense area. When the companyoccupies a prepared position, the doctrines of antiaircraftdefense for a front-line company apply. (See par. 80.)

SECTION IVRETROGRADE MOVEMENTS

94. FRONT-LINE COMPANY IN NIGHT WITHDRAWAL.The battalion order usually prescribes the time of with-drawal, company and battalion assembly areas, and thetroops to be left in position by each company as a coveringforce. Supporting weapons in the company area are usuallyattached to the company for the withdrawal to the bat-talion assembly area.

a. Preliminary actions. As soon as the company com-mander is informed of a contemplated withdrawal, heinitiates daylight reconnaissance by subordinates of routesof withdrawal as far as the battalion assembly area. Thecompany commander limits the number and size of recon-naissance groups to a minimum in order to preservesecrecy. He prescribes the reconnaisance to be made by the

platoons and by men to be used as guides in the nightmovement. The company commander contacts his platoonleaders by going personally to their command posts toacquaint them with his plan of withdrawal. He informsthem of the time of withdrawal, the platoon assemblyareas, the company assembly area, and the strength ofunits to be left in position as part of the company coveringforce.

b. Company (less covering force). (1) Rearward move-ment of front-line rifle units, less the covering force, beginsat the designated hour. Individuals move straight to therear to squad assembly areas where the squad leader re-gains control. Squads move to designated platoon assemblyareas. Platoons move to the company assembly area. Smallcolumn formations which facilitate control are adopted.For initial and subsequent dispositions, see figure 10(Dand ®.(2) Company transportation joins the company as far

forward as the situation permits. The limit of its forwardmovement is prescribed by the battalion commander.

c. Covering force. (1) The company covering force willusually consist of one squad left in place by each platoonof the company and such supporting weapons located inthe company area as may be prescribed by the battalion.These are usually single guns left in position with skeletoncrews. Transportation for supporting weapons is left withthe covering force.(2) For the night withdrawal a commander is detailed to

command the company covering force. The time when hetakes over command is prescribed in company orders,and will usually be just prior to the withdrawal of thecompany. During daylight the company covering forcecommander makes a reconnaissance to ascertain the exactlocation of supporting weapons to be left in position, androutes of withdrawal for the covering force. He contactssquad leaders to be left with the covering force and pointsout specific locations for portions of the squad. Some re-

0

Figure 10

115

SO.MM

DIS P051IT ON5 OF COMPANV COYERING FORCE LEF IN POS1TION\ z~~~P '''" "C"', p

distribution of squads in forward defense areas is necessaryto provide observation over the entire defense area andclose rifle protection for supporting weapons. The squadis retained in as large groups as possible. Not less than twomen are placed in any locality. This redistribution ofthe squad should be accomplished after dark. Every effortis made to preserve secrecy.(3) The squad left in the area of the support platoonis usually kept intact for local patrolling and ejectinghostile patrols which may succeed in entering the position.The command post for the company covering force is theold command post of the company. Sufficient messengersare sent to the covering force by the company commanderto provide adequate signal communication within the areaand with the battalion covering force command post.(4) Prior to its withdrawal, the covering force should sim-

ulate normal activity in the company area. Patrolling iscontinued. All activities are conducted to prevent theenemy from detecting the withdrawal from position.

(5) The company covering force may be directed to re-main in its position until a specified time or it may bewithdrawn on orders of the battalion covering forcecommander.

95. FRONT-LINE COMPANY IN DAYLIGHT WITHDRAWAL.a. The daylight withdrawal order is normally oral, brief,and fragmentary.

b. The daylight withdrawal is a series of delaying ac-tions on successive positions. Each echelon covers thewithdrawal of the next preceding echelon. (See fig. 11.)The support platoon covers the withdrawal of the front-line platoons. The battalion reserve covers the withdrawalof the front-line companies.

c. After withdrawal, front-line platoons move directlyto the designated company assembly area. The initialwithdrawal consists of a successive thinning out of theline. Individuals are sent to the rear of the support pla-

toon area where a platoon noncommissioned officer as-sembles them or sends them on to the company assemblyarea. Automatic riflemen in each squad cover the with-drawal of their squads. As soon as the last elements ofthe front-line platoons have passed, the support platoon

.similarly withdraws under the protection of the battalionreserve.

11 '. 3-1~oP PROTECT- [RNT.LN[

O;N RESERVE PROTECTS SUPPORTSI.vQ_~~ 2 WITHDRAWAL

TO DESIGNATED ASSEMBLY AREAS

Figure 11. Front-line rifle company in daylight withdrawal

d. Supporting weapons in the rifle company area arenormally attached to the company for the withdrawal. Forthe use of supporting weapons in daylight withdrawal,see paragraph 209b.

e. Withdrawing elements make maximum use of con-cealed and covered routes.

96. RESERVE COMPANY IN WITHDRAWAL. a. At night.In a night withdrawal, the reserve company commanderinitiates rear reconnaissance as for a front-line company.(See par. 94 a and c (2).) The battalion order may pre-

scribe that one platoon be left in position. This platoon

117

is responsible for patrolling and protecting the battalioncovering force command post.

b. In daylight. In a daylight withdrawal, the reservecompany is left in position to cover the withdrawal ofthe forward elements of the battalion. It withdraws inaccordance with the battalion order under the protectionof the regimental covering force (regimental reserve) orother elements of the battalion which have taken positionin rear.

97. DELAYING ACTION IN SUCCESSIVE POSITIONS. a.Since delay in successive positions is based on limitedresistance' only on any one position the company may beassigned a frontage for such a position which is twice asgreat as would be assigned for a sustained defense. Thecompany commander directs early reconnaissance bysubordinates of successive positions and routes of with-drawal prescribed in orders of the battalion commander.The rifle company on a delaying position may deploy itsthree platoons abreast in order to develop greater firepower. Where one or both flanks are exposed, supportsare held out. Close-in defensive fires are not planned;instead, the position is selected to favor long-range fires.A position near the topographical crest is generally ofgreater value than one on the military crest. The formerpostion affords the unit defilade immediately upon theinitiation of its withdrawal. Fires are opened at extremeranges (rifles and automatic rifles, 800-1,200 yards) inorder to force the enemy to deploy and to make time-consuming preparations for attack. (See fig. 12.)

b. Caliber .30 heavy machine guns and battalion anti-tank guns are usually attached to rifle companies. Theantitank guns open fire at the earliest moment that prom-ises effect against the type of hostile armored vehicleemployed. Weapon carriers and prime movers are utilizedin moving machine guns, mortars, and antitank guns

118

whenever practicable. The rifle platoons organize theirpositions as for defense, and as completely as time per-mits. Foxholes are dug and fields of fire are cleared.

c. The withdrawal to a rear position is made before thehostile rifle fire can pin the troops to the ground and

'C= C-)9 c-ZDC. -) c- ... .. .

. *- - - FLANK>

Figure 12. Rifle company in delaying action

before the enemy can reach assaulting distance. Thewithdrawal may be effected by withdrawing platoons suc-cessively and covering the gaps thus created by the fireof supporting weapons; or by withdrawing platoonssimultaneously, each platoon covering its own with-drawal.

d. Between the successive delaying positions, interme-.diate positions offering good possibilities of delay areoccupied by detachments with automatic weapons. (SeeFM 100-5.)

98. DELAY IN ONE POSITION. The mission of delay mayrequire a force to hold a certain position for a predeter-mined time. The rifle company assigned a portion of a

119

sector on a delaying position with this mission effects itsdistribution of troops, organizes the position, and plansits close defensive fires as for defense of a position. In-creased frontages are obtained by allowing greater in-tervals between adjacent defense areas. Intervals betweenindividuals in platoon and smaller defense areas are notincreased. Intervals between adjacent units must permitmutual support by flanking fire. Mobility is sought forthe support platoon in order to provide adequate sup-port for the entire forward area of the company.

CHAPTER 4

SECURITY MISSIONS

99. GENERAL. a. Security missions which may be assignedto a rifle company include the following:(1) Support of an advance guard.(2) Support of a rear guard.(3) Advance or rear guard.(4) Flank guard.(5) Support of an outpost for a bivouac.(6) Part of a general outpost in defensive operations.(7) Combat outpost of a front-line battalion in defensive

operations.(8) March outpost.

b. A company having security mission is issued its extraammunition before beginning the mission, and its weaponcarriers usually go with the company except as indicatedin paragraph 100c (2).

100. SUPPPORT OF ADVANCE GUARD. a. When a bat-talion constitutes the advance guard, the leading riflecompany will ordinarily be designated as the support.(See FM 100-5.) The mission of the support is to recon-

noiter to the front and to provide security for the elementfollowing in its immediate rear.

b. Upon receipt of the advance guard order, the supportcommander prepares and issues his own order to his as-sembled subordinate leaders. The support commander's

121

order usually contains -(I) Information of the enemy and own troops.(2) Organization of the support.(3) Route and destination.(4) Hour march begins.(5) The distance at which the support is to follow theadvance party.(6) Special security and reconnaissance measures, includ-ing conduct at halts and responsibility for patrolling tothe flanks.

Figure 15. Initial advance guard formation

122

'(7) Conduct of the advance.(8) Position of the support commander.

c. (1) The support marches ahead of the reserve in threegroups from rear to front as follows: the support proper;the advance party; the point. (See fig. 13.) The supportcompany sends forward an advance party which shouldseldom exceed a platoon in strength. The advance party,in turn, sends forward a point, usually a squad or half-squad. (See fig. 14.) Distances between elements of thesupport vary in accordance with the situation, the terrain,and conditions of visibility. These distances are sufficientto allow each succeeding element to deploy withoutserious interference from the enemy. However, the dis-tances are not so great as to prevent each succeedingelement from supporting the element in front before thelatter is destroyed. The following table shows averagefigures for road spaces and the average distances betweenelements for a support consisting of a rifle company fora march in daylight. This table is a guide only. At night,distances are considerably less than indicated in the table.

Element Strength Formation in yards ing ele-(aver- raent inage) yards

(average)

Point ......... Squad .... S... Staggered ...... 35 200Advance party.. Platoon (less Column of twos 50 400

one squad). (extended).Support Rifle company Column of twos 100 500

proper ...... (less one pla-toon).

(2) The company weapon carriers will usually be underbattalion control when contact is not imminent. Whencontact becomes imminent, they should be released to thecompany. For duties of personnel charged with defenseof the weapon carriers, see'paragraph 13a. For conditions

123

under which antiaircraft fires are delivered, see paragraph12c (3).

d. Contact between the support and the advance partyis maintained by connecting files sent forward by thesupport.

e. The advance party is able to patrol, in broken coun-try, to a distance of 200 to 300 yards to each flank of theroute of march. Patrols to greater distances are providedby higher echelons. Foot patrols should seldom be sent todistances greater than 800 yards from the route of march.(See fig. 13.)

f. The support commander. ordinarily marches at thehead of the support proper; however, he is free to gowherever his presence is required. He informs the ad-vance guard commander, by the fastest means available, ofany new information of the enemy or change in thesituation.

g. Upon encountering the enemy, the support com-mander promptly joins the advance party commanderand, where the situation warrants, commits the supportwithout detailed reconnaissance. The attack is launchedat once in order to drive off the enemy or envelop hisposition. It is characterized by rapidity of decision andaction. If unable to drive off the enemy the support at-tempts to immobilize him by fire and sends out patrolsto locate his flanks. (See fig. 15.)

h. If the enemy withdraws or is destroyed before the re-serve of the advance guard is committed, the supportpromptly resumes its advance, in a suitable formation.

i. During halts the support habitually establishes amarch outpost. (See par. 107.) Each element also prompt-ly posts observers at vantage points to the front and flanksto insure that hostile forces cannot approach undetected.The support commander coordinates the locations andsectors of surveillance of oblervers. The support will

124

occupy terrain suitable for the execution of its protectivemission.

Figure 14. Disposition of point and advance party

101. SUPPORT OF REAR GUARD. a. General. Rear guardsare provided for the protection of a foot or motorizedcolumn, which is marching away from the enemy, andfor the protection of the rear of a column advancingtoward the enemy if attack or harrassing action is pos-sible. Whenever a rear guard is protecting motorizedelements, it is also motorized.

125

9Aa2

NO INFORMATION OF LOCATIONOF THIS HOSTILE FORCE RE

CEIVED FROM MOTORIZED RE-CONNAISSANCE ELEMENTS OR

FROM HIGHER AUTHORITY I )

POINT: HOSTILE FIRE FROM A.POINT DEPLOYS NEAR ROAD.SIGNALS TO REAR ANDFIRES ON A- POINT CONTINUESTO FURNISH PROTECTIONALONG ROAD,

UkJ .JJ AI DVANCE PARTY}: DEPLOYS ANDATTACKS AT ONCE TO THE FRONT.

OR AROUND A FLANK. IFPOSSIBLE OVERCOMES RESISTANCE.

AND RESUMES ADVANCE: IF NOT.IMMOILIZES ENEMY AND SEEKSLOCATION OF HOSTILE FLANKS.

SUORT DEPLOYS IN SQUAD COLUMNSCONTINUES AOVANCE, REINFORCES OREXTENDS ACTION OF ADVANCE PARTY,

AND DRIVES ENEMY OFF OR IMMOBILIZESHIM.

Figure 15. Action of support of advance guard

b. Retrograde movement. (1) In a rcar guard protect-ing a withdrawing foot or motorized column, the rearcompany usually is designated as the support. Its missionis to protect that element of the rear guard which imme-diately precedes it in the direction of march.(2) At a considerable distance from hostile forces a com-pany having the mission of support of a rear guard adoptsa formation similar to that of the support of an advanceguard in reverse order of march. It is subdivided intothree groups; the support, the rear party, and the rear

126

point. The company usually details one rifle platoon toact as rear party which, in turn, details either a rifle squador half-squad to act as rear point. The distances betweenelements of the support vary in accordance with the situa-tion, the terrain, and visibility conditions, and correspondgenerally with the distances between similar elements ofthe advance guard. Except when enemy pursuit is close,each element of the rear guard follows the preceding ele-ment at a prescribed distance.(3) When enemy pursuit is close, elements of the sup-port effect such delay of the enemy advance as may benecessary to enable the next preceding unit to make suit-able dispositions. Fire is opened at long range. Usuallyelements do not move toward the enemy to reinforce asubordinate element. The larger element occupies a de-laying position to cover the withdrawal of the subordinateelement which has become engaged. The element in con-tact with the enemy then withdraws under the protectivefires of the element occupying the delaying position. Therate of retirement is coordinated with the main bodyand adjacent rear guard elements. In general, the com-bat action of a company operating as support of a rearguard in close contact with the enemy is conducted inaccordance with the procedure described for delayingaction in paragraph 97.

c. In an advance. When the transportation of the mainbody is moving at the tail of the main body, the rear guardfor the advancing column is motorized and moves bybounds behind it. While moving, the support adopts thesame relative formation as if on foot, except that distancesbetween elements are measured in time rather than inyards. The average time distances are: rear point to rearparty, 2 minutes; rear party to support, 4 minutes. Thesetime distances are subject to the same general variationsas are indicated above for yardage distances for foot ele-ments. When the transportation of the main body halts

at the termination of a bound, the rear support halts,dismounts, and forms a march outpost.

102. COMPANY AS ADVANCE OR REAR GUARD. Whenthe rifle company operates as an advance or rear guard ofa small force, the reserve is omitted. The company dis-poses its elements and conducts its actions as does a riflecompany acting as the support of a larger advance or rearguard. It may have supporting weapons attached.

103. FLANK GUARD. a. General. (I) A rifle company maybe detailed to protect the flank of a marching column.When so detailed the company commander is givendefinite instructions as to what he is to do, and when andfor how long it is to be done. When practicable, this com-pariy should be reinforced with antitank weapons andwith a sufficient number of motors to facilitate rapid com-munication with the unit detailing the flank guard. Sucha security force may be dismounted or motorized. Sinceroads are the most dangerous avenues of approach forthe initial attack by a hostile force, the company com-mander attempts to block these primarily; other avenuesof approach also are covered.(2) In case of attack, the main body commander is im-

mediately notified and the flank guard delays the advanceof the enemy until the main body can prepare for actionor until the tail of the column passes a designated point.For other details, see FM 7-20, 7-40, and 100 5.

b. Occupying simultaneously a series of flank positions.(1) The company generally will occupy these positions in

advance of the march of the main body. Preferably thecompany should be motorized to enable it to form anumber of motorized detachments, each blocking anavenue of approach. A strong supporting element shouldbe retained in a central location so that any detachmentcan be reinforced. As the tail of the main body ap.

128

preaches a point on the route from which elements on thesecond position provide adequate flank protection, thefirst detachment should be moved rapidly to a previouslyreconnoitered location to the front. (See fig. 16.) Thisprocedure is continued; the detachments remain in posi-tion until the main body has passed a point approximate-ly opposite their positions, after which they move to de-signated positions ahead of and to the flank of the leadingelements of the marching column.

POSITION NO. a4 \

ON NO. t 0

I.

I

I

I

I

)OTIN NO. 2

1

_Y3

DIRECTION~C ~ OFADVANCE

9 POINT

B

F1

LI

ADVANCE PARTY

SUPPORT

0 RESERVErn

MAIN BODY

Figure 16. Employ meot of flank guard occupying simultaneoasly aseries of flakll positlion-schemnatic diagrami

P OSlTIO

POSITIC

NOTES1. Detachment No. I moves to position No. 4 when tail of main

body reaches A.2. Detachment No. 2 moves to position No. 5 (not shown) when

tail of main body reaches B.3. Detachment No. 3 moves to position No. 6 (not shown) when

tail of main body reaches C.4. Support at X remains near center detachment location: with

an inadequate road net, support at X (Y) may be omitted and de-tachments are correspondingly reinforced in strength and number.(2) In occupying simultaneously a series of flank posi-

tions, road blocks are established. Demolitions may beaccomplished, and small detachments are posted to coverthem with fire. Antitank rifle grenades, rockets, and anyattached antitank guns are used to attack hostile vehicles.(3) When the company is operating on foot it may bereassembled after the tail of the main body has passed aprescribed location or at a specified time. The company re-joins the main body at the earliest practicable time.

c. Occupying a single flank position. If there is only asingle avenue of approach from a threatened flank, thecompany commander is directed to move to a single keyposition, the possession of which will afford the neces-sary protection to the main body. This key terrain featuremay be defended until the mission is accomplished, orutilized as an initial delaying position.

d. Moving on a parallel route. If moving on a parallelroute, the company commander provides for local secur-ity of the company by employing an advance and a rearguard, and by extensive use of flank patrols. (See par.171b.) Contact with the main body is maintained bypatrols sent to points of observation, and by motor mes-senger, or radiotelephone.

104. SUPPORT OF OUTPOST FOR BIVOUAC. a. General.(1) A rifle company detailed as a support of an outpostfor a bivouac is assigned an area on the outpost line ofresistance and a sector of surveillance. The mission of theoutpost is to provide time for the main force to prepare

130

for combat. Fire is opened at long range and the enemyis held under constant fire as he approaches the position.The support is prepared for close combat. When the sup-port has been assigned a delaying mission, it withdrawsalong previously reconnoitered routes to an intermediatedelaying position or as may be directed by the outpostcommander.(2) Support areas on the outpost line of resistance arenumbered from right to left. Heavy machine guns andother supporting weapons may be attached to the com-pany. The company adopts a suitable formation to pro-tect its movement to the outpost position and provide forits own security. For other details, see FM 7-20, 7-40, and100-5.

b. Preliminary orders. Upon receipt of orders, the com-pany commander makes a map reconnaissance, informshis second-in-command as to his tentative plan, and issuesspecific instructions as to where the company is to bemoved.

c. Reconnaissance. (1) If practicable, the company com-mander precedes his unit to its assigned area and makesa detailed reconnaissance. Frequently enemy interference,or the threat thereof, will require him to make his recon-naissance under the protection of the march outpost.(2) He confers with the march outpost commander as to

the situation and the terrain. As soon as contact can bemade, he also confers with commanders of adjacent sup-ports. During his reconnaissance, the company com-mander determines locations and missions for each pla-toon and for any attached supporting units.

d. Orders. The company commander then decides uponhis plan of organization and issues his orders to theplatoon leaders. Frequently the orders are issued by mes-sage in fragmentary form.

e. Organization of ground. The selected position shouldprovide observation for long-range machine-gun and

131

mortar fires and permit the organization of close defensivefires. The company organizes the position as for a defenseon a wide front (delay on one position.) (See par. 98.)The unoccupied intervals of the area are covered by fireand, wherever practicable, by obstacles. Attached heavymachine guns are employed for long-range direct firecovering the approaches to the position. They are assignedsupplementary positions for reinforcing the flanking firesof the light machine guns. Attached 81-mm mortars arelocated to cover defiladed approaches to the position.They are also assigned close support missions. Designatedrocket teams and any attached antitank guns are locatedto cover the most likely avenues of mechanized approach.Immediately upon arriving on the outpost position, thetroops construct foxholes, clear fields of fire, and developcamouflage in a manner similar to the organization of adefense area on a battle position.

f. Conduct. The company promptly covers its front withoutguards and patrols. (See fig. 17.) Outguards, not ex-ceeding the strength of one squad, occupy day positions(usually within 400 yards of the outpost line of resistance)affording the most extensive views over the foreground.Outguards are numbered from right to left in each sup-port area. At night outguards are posted so as to coverthe most probable routes of hostile advance. Patrolling is -

greatly increased at night. Unless given specific missions,the patrols detailed from the support cover only theirfront and gaps between outguards. The support may berequired to execute distance patrolling to the front andflanks, utilizing motors provided for this purpose. Strong-er outguards (detached posts) are detailed to hold moredistant features such as stream crossings, villages, andimportant road junctions. Communication with adjacentsupports, between platoon defense areas, and betweenoutguards is maintained by visiting patrols or by tele-

phones. Patrols should go over their route during day-light.

OITGUARsD-USUALLY SQUADS OR FRACTIONS TIERESOF

NO 4 NO 2

I VISIONS PATROLS ,/ _ I _ ,

\VISITING PATROLS OR Wi1 /Figure 17. Disposition of outpost for a bivouac-schematic diagram

105. SUPPORT OF A BATTALION ON GENERAL OUTPOST.a. The general outpost is divided into battalion areas. Thebattalion in turn subdivides its position into companyareas. A rifle company occupying an area on the outpostline of resistance organizes its position and may bedirected to conduct its action as for delaying action. (Seepars. 97 and 98.)

b. The outpost order may prescribe that the outpost lineof resistance be held a definite time or until other ordersare received. In such case, the outpost organizes the posi-tion for protracted defense.

c. In the organization of ground, deception is stressed.Dummy emplacements simulating the organization of abattle position are constructed to deceive the enemy anddisperse his fire. The company covers its front with ob-servation groups (outguards) and patrols as for the sup-port of an outpost for a bivouac. (See par. 104f.)

133

106. COMBAT OUTPOST OF FRONT-LINE BATTALION. a.A battalion occupying an area on the main line of resist-ance provides for its local security by posting a combatoutpost. The reserve company, or elements thereof, maybe assigned this mission. If a general outpost is in posi-tion the combat outpost ordinarily consists of a series ofobservation groups placed to observe the approaches tothe position. When the proximity of the enemy does notpermit the establishment of a general outpost, or the con-templated withdrawal of the general outpost will un-cover the battalion front, the combat outpost may bestronger. If the terrain affords good fields of fire andcovered routes of withdrawal, battalion supporting weap-ons are attached to the combat outpost. The combat out-post line is designated by the battalion commander.

b. The combat outpost is organized as a series of out-guards varying in strength from a half-squad to a rifleplatoon. These outguards organize defense areas on posi-tions affording observation and long fields of fire, and pro-vide close rifle protection to supporting weapons. A sup-port echelon may not be required, as the combat outpostordinarily effects an early withdrawal. Since the distancefrom the battle position is short, there usually will be nointermediate delaying positions and the withdrawal willbe made directly to the company assembly area. Out-guards should be located within visual communicatingdistance of each other. If the terrain prevents this, con-tact is maintained by patrols and by telephones if theyare available for this purpose. Patrolling between out-guards is carried on during all periods of reduced visibil-ity. Communication with the battalion command post ismaintained by wire, radio, and messenger.

e. The combat outpost locates forward observers andsends patrols to the front and flanks for its own security.Fire is opened at long range and the combat outpost with-draws before the enemy reaches the area of close corn-

bat. The battalion commander is informed of the firstapproach of hostile forces, is kept advised of the hostilesituation, and is notified when the combat outpost isforced to withdraw. The withdrawal is made along prev-iously designated and reconnoitered routes. Front-lineunits through whose area the withdrawal is made are in-formed when the combat outpost has cleared their front.The battalion commander is notified when the combatoutpost is assembled in the battalion area. When combatis interrupted by nightfall, battalions in contact immedi-ately push forward combat outposts. In this case, the com-bat outpost sends forward patrols to gain and maintaincontact with the enemy.

107. MARCH OUTPOST. The march outpost is the outpostestablished habitually by a marching unit making anytemporary halt. It is established by advance, flank, andrear guards, and is generally formed by occupying criticalterrain features controlling the approaches to the restingcolumn, with special attention to the flanks. The strengthof a march output may vary from a single rifle squadto a rifle company, reinforced with attached supportingweapons. Its size depends upon the size of the main body,duration of the temporary halt, nearness of the enemyand likelihood of early contact, and the nature of theterrain. When detailed as a march outpost, the rifle com-pany receives specific instructions from the battalion com-mander. It then operates generally according to themethods prescribed for the support of an outpost for abivouac. (See pars. 104 and 173.)

135

CHAPTER 5

RIFLE PLATOON

SECTION IGENERAL

108. COMPOSITION. A rifle platoon consists of a commandgroup and three rifle squads. The command group con-sists of a platoon leader, a platoon sergeant, a platoonguide, and messengers.

109. DUTIES OF COMMAND GROUP. a. The platoonleader is responsible for the training, discipline, control,and tactical employment of the platoon. It must betrained to accomplish its combat mission decisively and tofunction as an effective unit in the military team.

b. The platoon sergeant is second-in-command. He as-sists the platoon leader in controlling the direction andrate of movement in the advance. During all operationshe takes post as directed by the platoon leader so as bestto assist in the control of the platoon. He replaces theplatoon leader when the latter is not with the platoon orbecomes a casualty.

c. The platoon guide prevents straggling and enforcesorders concerning cover, concealment, and discipline. Hisposition is usually in rear of the platoon, where he ob-serves the situation on the flanks and rear. He checks am-munition expenditure and takes advantage of every op-portunity to have ammunition replenished.

d. When the company begins its development one mes-

senger reports to the company commander and one re-mains with the platoon leader. (See par. Ilb (7).)

110. CONTROL AND COMMUNICATION. The platoonleader controls the action of the platoon by oral ordersor by arm-and-hand signals. Communication with com-pany headquarters is usually by messenger, radio, or visualsignals.

111. ROUTE MARCH. During the advance in route column,the platoon marches in column as directed by the com-pany commander. The platoon leader prescribes the orderof march of the squads.

112. SPECIAL OPERATIONS. The conduct of a rifle platoonin special operations is similar to that in offensive anddefensive combat. Details involving specific changes areprescribed by the company commander. (See chs. 1, 2,and 3.)

113. AMMUNITION SUPPLY IN COMBAT. See paragraph214.

SECTION IIATTACK

114. APPROACH MARCH. a. Dispositions. (1) In ap-proach march, by day or night, the platoon moves as apart of the company under orders issued by the companycommander. (See pars. 15, 16, and 17.) The platoon dis-positions most frequently used are shown schematicallyin figure 18 O and 0: platoon column; line of squads; twosquads forward, one squad back; and one squad forward,two squads back. The initial dispositions of the platoonmay be prescribed by the company commander; ordi-

137

narily, however, he allows the platoon leader to deter.mine which formation best suits the ground and thehostile situation.(2) "Platoon column" is vulnerable to fire from the front,and requires a change in disposition to employ the weap-ons toward the front; however, it is easily controlled andmaneuvered. It is especially suitable for narrow, covered

' PLATOON LEAD. PLATOON LEA. E I

[E MESSENGER [a MESSENGER

i PLATOON SERGEANT

PLATOON .LATOONSERGEANT GUIGE

C PLATOON OUIDE

PLATOON COLUMN LINE OF SOUADS

DISTANCES ANO INTERVALS BETWEENSQUADS AND BETWEEN INDIVIDUALS AREVARIABLE. SCOUTS NOT SHOWN

Figure 18. Rifle platoon formations in approach march

138

routes of advance, for maneuvering through gaps betweenareas receiving hostile artillery fire, and for movingthrough woods, and in fog, smoke, or darkness. The depthof a platoon column averages 150 to 200 yards.(3) "Line of squads" enables the platoon leader to de-

velop the maximum fire power to the front in the shortesttime. It is more difficult to control, and lacks maneuver-ability; but it is less vulnerable to fire from the front. Itis suitable for rapidly crossing an area exposed to hostilelong-range machine-gun or artillery fire which cannot beavoided.

'pLATOON LEADER

MMESSENCER

W PLATOON

EPLATOON GUIDE

TWO SOUADS FORWARD.ONE SQUAD BACK.

PLATOON LEADER

'PLATOON SERGEANT

3 PLATOON GUIDE

ONE SOUAD FORWARD.TWO SQUADS BACK.

DISTANCES AND INTERVALS BETWEENSQUADS AND BETWEEN INDIVIDUALS ArEVARIABLE. SCOUTS NIOT SOWN.

Figure 18. Rifle platoon formations in approach march-Continued

139

(4) (a) "Two squads forward, one squad back" and "onesquad forward, two squads back" are formations whichprovide security to both front and flanks, favor maneuverand control, and also provide flexibility in meeting newtactical situations. The factors usually determining whichof these formations is to be employed are the terrain, thefrontage which the platoon must cover, and the proximityand actions of the enemy.

(b) A formation with squads echeloned to the right orleft rear may be used to protect an exposed flank andpermits maximum fire to be delivered promptly towardthat flank.

h. Direction and rate of advance. (1) The companycommander usually designates a base platoon. He maydirect it to guide on a specified element of another com-pany. The platoon leader of the base platoonr is responsiblefor the direction and rate of advance. A uniform rateshould be maintained. The platoon halts only on ordersfrom the company commander or when hostile resistancestops the advance.(2) Each platoon leader designates a base squad on which

.other squads regulate their movements. He indicates thedirection of advance by pointing or moving in the desireddirection, or by indicating to the leader of the base squadthe route, unit, or magnetic azimuth to be followed. Anycombination of these methods may be used. The platoonleader makes minor deviations from his assigned route orzone of advance to avoid prominent points on whichhostile artillery may have registered or other dangerousareas and obstacles. To escape observation in daylight, theplatoon takes advantage of cover and concealment pro-vided by ravines, draws, and woods.(3) For night movement, unless the platoon follows an-other unit, the platoon leader usually reconnoiters in day-light and plots the route, by compass bearings, on a sketchor map. A circuitous route which follows easily distin-

140

guishable terrain features is often preferable to one moredirect but less clearly marked.

c. Contact. When a platoon follows another unit atnight, contact is maintained by connecting files unless thetail of the preceding unit is clearly visible. In daylight,contact is similarly maintained whenever the interveningterrain makes visual contact difficult. The use of doubleconnecting files increases the certainty of maintaining un-broken contact.

d. Movement to successive objectives. In the daylightapproach march the platoon is assigned an initial marchobjective by the company commander. When this objec-tive cannot be pointed out to the base squad, movementto it must be made in a series of bounds to intermediateplatoon march objectives. The platoon leader indicateseach march objective to the leader of the base squad intime to prevent any unavoidable halt. The platoonleader precedes the platoon at a sufficient distance toreconnoiter the zone of advance. He detours the platoonaround a heavily shelled area or takes advantage of lullsin the hostile fire to cross the area by rushes. The squadsreform in a designated area as prescribed by the platoonleader. Areas exposed to hostile observation are crossedrapidly, often in a single rush. Gassed areas are avoided.When an area is being gassed or when gas is discoveredin an area, it is reconnoitered to determine its extent,marked, and immediately reported to higher headquart-ers, giving the exact location and extent of the area withthe type of gas encountered.

e. Action when enemy is encountered. When fire isopened on any element of a platoon the remainder ofthat platoon, and adjacent platoons continue to advancetoward their march objectives, taking every advantage ofconcealment and cover and assuring necessary security oftheir flanks. From favorable positions on the hostileflanks, they assist by fire, or fire and movement, the unit

141

held up. In case of mechanized or air attack, action istaken as prescribed in paragraph 12c.

f. Zone of reconnaissance. In a daylight approachmarch, the commander of a leading company assigns hisleading rifle platoon (s) zones of reconnaissance. Thesezones may be 300 yards or more in width. A leading pla.toon covers its zone with scouts or patrols. Frequently itis reinforced by a 60-mm mortar squad. The platoon lead-er regulates the movement of scouts and patrols so as toinsure security of the platoon against hostile fire frompoints within midrange (400-600 yards). This movementmay be regulated in three different ways, depending uponthe imminence of contact with the enemy:(1) The platoon leader may hold the platoon under

cover and await reconnaissance of the assigned march ob-.jective by the platoon scouts. When the scouts signal"forward," the platoon leader advances the platoon tothe line of scouts and again sends the scouts forward tothe next objective. This method affords the best securitybut is the slowest and ordinarily the least desirable ofthe three methods. (See par. 151d.)(2) The platoon may be held under cover while the scouts

are sent forward to the next objective with the platoonleader following close behind. Wheni the scouts havereconnoitered the objective, the platoon leader by signalsends them forward to the next objective and signals theplatoon to come forward. This method insures thesecurity of the platoon by having it under cover untilthe next objective has been reconnoitered, but requireslong and careful training to attain the desired speed andproficiency.(3) The platoon leader may direct the platoon scouts toprecede the platoon at midrange (400 to 600 yards) whilehe follows behind the scouts. This method permits theplatoon to advance rapidly without being exposed toenemy small-arms fire within midrange, and is appropri-

ate for an advance over terrain lacking suitable marchobjectives, for example, over level, open terrain.

g. Duties of platoon scouts. See paragraph 151d and e.h. Termination. The approach march for the platoon

terminates when the fire fight commences.i. Preparation for attack. When extra ammunition is is-

sued and rolls are disposed of prior to or during the ap-proach march, the platoon may attack directly from theapproach march. Since this procedure affords little op-portunity for reconnaissance and coordination of plans,it is adopted only when thie situation demands an im-mediate attack. Otherwise, the platoon halts in a desig-nated portion of the company assembly area. Here, whilethe platoon leader and higher commanders make theirreconnaissances and issue orders, extra ammunition is is-sued, rolls (if not previously disposed of) are dropped,and the men prepare for the attack. The platoon leaderrequires that each man's physical condition, ammunition,and equipment is checked by his immediate superior, and,if time permits, personally supervises this inspection.

115. RECONNAISSANCE, PLANS, AND ORDERS. a. Gen-eral. The company order prescribes whether a platoonis to be initially in the attacking (leading) or supportechelon. If his platoon is in the attacking echelon, theplatoon leader is given a line or area of departure, adirection of attack, and a specific terrain objective to becaptured. For details concerning the support platoon, seeparagraph 118.

b. Reconnaissance. Upon receipt of the company attackorder, the leader of a platoon assigned to the attackingechelon makes the necessary preparations to have hisplatoon ready to attack ih conformity with the companyorder. His reconnaissance is so arranged as to permit himand his noncommissioned officers to reconnoiter the ter-rain prior to the attack. This may frequently require the

143

movement forward of the platoon while the platoonleader and his subordinate leaders are reconnoitering andthe attack orders are being issued. During his reconnais-sance the platoon leader formulates his plan of attack.

c. Plan of attack. (1) In the brief time available for plan-ning his attack, the platoon leader must consider thefollowing items:

(a) The terrain as it affords the enemy observation andfields of fire against his own and nearby friendly troops,and concealment from which to launch surprise counter-attacks. Since his knowledge of the enemy's strength andexact dispositions usually will be incomplete or even non-existent, he must determine not only where enemy gunsand men are located but also where others might reason-ably be located.

(b) The terrain as it affords opportunity for the move-ment of his squads. He endeavors to locate a favorableapproach (ditch, wooded draw, brush) leading toward, orpast, his objective.

(c) The situation on his flanks. He must determinewhether his flanks will be exposed, or protected, by thelocation or action of friendly troops.

(d) The localities where smoke or supporting fires, tobe provided by higher units, are to be placed.

(e) The localities where he must be prepared to placethe fire of his rifles and automatic rifles (and of any at-tached mortars or light machine guns) in order to coordi-nate their fires with the fires provided by higher units, andin order to support the advance of any part of the platoon.

(f) The terrain as it affords firing positions from whichthese fires can be delivered, and covered routes to thesepositions.(2) The above items form a picture of the situation as itexists on the ground over which the platoon must attack.With this picture in mind the platoon leader considers

possible methods of attack (see d below) and makes hisplans by answering the following question:

"How can I use my weapons and men to best advantagein order to accomplish my assigned mission with the leastpracticable delay and with the fewest casualties?"

d. Methods of attack. (1) Unless the platoon zone ofaction and the strength of the enemy immediately in itsfront are so great that all the platoon's fire power is re-quired at the start of the attack, the platoon leader shouldinitially hold one rifle squad in support as a maneuveringelement. When the attack is over open, level ground, orwhen the maximum fire power is desired initially, theplatoon may attack straight to the front in line of squads.

(2) Frequently the most effective method of attack is tohave a small group work close to the target under coverwhile the remainder of the platoon's attacking echelonattacks straight to the front. A few riflemen can oftenwork close to an enemy position, without being seen, overground which affords insufficient cover for a larger group.An automatic rifleman may be included in the group.(3) In other situations, the ground and character of the

resistance may favor an attack straight to the front witheither two squads or a single squad, while the other (s)maneuver to a suitable position on the flank. From thisflank position, the maneuvering squad (s) may assist by firethe advance of the other squad (s) or may close with theenemy.(4) When the terrain and situation will permit, it is often

desirable to attack against a flank of the enemy with theentire attacking echelon of -the platoon.

e. Attached weapons. When a 60-mm mortar squad isattached to a rifle platoon, the platoon leader employsit as described in paragraph 21h. When a light machine-gun squad is attached to a rifle platoon, the platoon leaderemploys it to reinforce the rifle and automatic rifle fires

of the platoon in a manner similar to that described inparagraph 21h.

f. Platoon attack order. Having decided on his plan ofattack, the platoon leader issues his order at the previous-ly selected point. He orients his subordinates by pointingout important terrain features within the area of opera-tions. He informs them of any new enemy information;the company objective; missions of adjacent units; sup-port by the company weapons platoon, battalion heavyweapons, elements of the regimental cannon company,and artillery; the platoon objective; and the hour ofattack. He outlines his scheme of maneuver, includingthe initial and subsequent platoon objectives; the line(point or area) of departure for each squad; the mission

or target (s) of each squad; and security measures. He in-forms the squads of the location of the battalion aid sta-tion and of his own position and expected movement.He makes certain that all squad leaders understand hisorder, having them repeat it back when necessary. Uponreceipt of these instructions, the squad leaders return totheir squads and issue their own orders, and the platoonmoves to the attack at the appointed hour or on a pre-arranged signal.

116. ATTACK. a. Movement across line of departure. Themovement of the platoon from the assembly area across ·the line of departure should be conducted so as to pre-serve secrecy for the attack. Scouts from the leadingsquad (s) precede the platoon to protect its advance; theformation is determined by the terrain and the likelihoodof coming under hostile observation and fire. Before ar-riving at the line of departure, the platoon takes up itsattack formation. The squads, however, continue acrossthe line of departure in squad column or diamond forma-tion and do not deploy further until compelled to fire onthe enemy.

146

b. Conduct of attack. (I) LOCATION OF PLA-TOON LEADER. The platoon leader follows his attack-ing echelon closely. He goes wherever he can best observedevelopments and influence the action of his platoon.(2) FIRE AND MANEUVER. (a) When the platooncomes under effective small-arms fire, further advance isusually by file and maneuver. The enemy is pinned tothe ground by frontal (and flanking) fire, under coverof which other elements of the platoon maneuver forward,using all available cover to protect themselves againsthostile fire. In turn, the original maneuvering elements.may occupy firing positions and cover the advance of theelements initially firing. The platoon leader hits weakspots in the enemy position by having his support attackagainst the point of least resistance, or by maneuveringhis support around a flank to strike the enemy with sur-prise fire on his flank or rear.

(b) When fire from other hostile positions situated tothe flank or rear makes it impossible to launch a flank-ing attack against a particular area, an assaulting forceis built up by irregular or successive movements of in-dividuals or small groups close to the hostile resistance.This force is protected by the fire of the remainder ofthe platoon and of supporting weapons. One or moreautomatic rifles may be employed to neutralize the firesof the hostile flank or rear elements. For this purpose, theplatoon leader may detach the automatic rifle teamstemporarily from one or more rifle squads. The positionis then taken by assault.

(c) When opposed by weak resistance, the platoondrives rapidly ahead until the company objective is cap-tured regardless of the lack of progress on its flanks.(3) FLANKING MOVEMENTS. (a) The platoon is es-sentially a driving unit. Wide flanking movements by anypart of the platoon are rarely practicable. However,maneuvering in the zone of an adjacent platoon is often

147

the only feasible method for a squad or small group toapproach the enemy position. A platoon leader utilizessuch a route without hesitation provided it does not inter-fere with the action of the adjacent unit.

(b) When nearby platoons are advancing approximate-ly abreast, and it is necessary to maneuver in one of theirzones, the platoon leader sends a messenger to the adjac-ent platoon leader advising him of the contemplatedaction.(4) CONTACT WITH ADJACENT UNITS.. The pla-

-toon protects its flanks by providing-connecting groups oftwo or three men on each flank to maintain contact withadjacent units. When a considerable gap between his pla-toon and an adjacent platoon develops, the platoon leaderverifies the facts by personal reconnaissance. He reinforcesthe connecting group and reports the facts and his actionsto the company commander promptly. (See pars. 21i, 171.and 172.)

c. Assault. The assault may take place either on theorders of the platoon leader or as a part of a general as-sault ordered by the company or battalion commander.The attacking, echelon of the platoon works its way asclose as it can get to the hostile position without maskingfriendly supporting fires (machine-gun, mortar, infantryhowitzer, artillery, and sometimes aircraft). For a platoonassault, the prearranged signal for the lifting of support-ing fires is given by the platoon leader. A general assaultis delivered at an hour fixed by the company or battalioncommander or on his signal. Frequently in the heat ofbattle the assault is started on the initiative of a squador even of a few individuals. Wherever and whenever theassault begins, it should receive. the immediate coopera-tion of every individual and unit within sight. When theassault is launched, assault fire may be employed on thedefender's position in order to keep it under fire and pre-

vent the enemy from manning his defenses. For definitionof assault fire, see paragraph 155.

' d. Advance through hostile position. Upon capture ofthe initial objective, the platoon leader makes a quickpersonal reconnaissance and promptly issues his ordersfor renewal of the attack. A platoon in the attackingechelon does not delay its advance to clean up isolatedpoints of resistance, but leaves them to be reduced bysucceeding echelons. Every effort is made to press the at-tack without pause.

e. Reorganization. (1) As the attack progresses the pla-toon leader effects reorganization as casualties occur.Leaders and scouts are replaced; ammunition from deadand wounded is collected and redistributed; a messageis sent to the company commander stating the effectivestrength of the platoon and the status of ammunitionsupply. Prisoners are sent to the company command post.(See par. 28e.) Men from other units who, during the as-

sault, have become separated from their units are sentback to their own organizations, if time permits, with abrief written message stating the nature of their conductduring the attack. If time does not permit their beingsent back, they are attached to squads within the platoonand returned to their organizations at the first opportun-ity. A squad greatly reduced in strength may be com-bined with another squad or its personnel distributedamong the other squads. However, even a squad of 5 men,including a competent leader, an automatic rifleman, anda rifle grenadier, may constitute an effective fighting unit.(2) Unless the attack is to be resumed almost immediately,the platoon should dig in to be prepared to meet a hostilecounterattack.(3) After issuing his orders for reorganization, the pla-

toon leader makes a brief personal reconnaissance to thefront and flanks to observe the area over which his platoon

149

may be ordered to advance, in order to select the bestavailable routes for moving his squads forward.

f. Resuming attack after reorganization. When thecompany objective is captured, orders for the furtheremployment of the rifle platoon will be issued by thecompany commander. The attack upon new objectives ismade in a manner similar to that described for the initialattack. If other troops are used to continue the attack bypassing through the platoon, any elements of the platoonexposed to hostile flat-trajectory fire remain in positionand support the new attack by fire until it has progressedfar enough to permit them to be assembled without ex-tensive losses.

g. Action when halted. When the advance of the pla-toon is stopped by hostile fire and the platoon leader hasemployed all means at his disposal to continue the ad-vance, he notifies the company commander. The platoonholds the ground it has gained and starts digging foxholes.(See fig. 19.) In the meantime, the advance of adjacent

units may force the enemy to withdraw. The platoonleader watches for the first change in the situation permit-ting his advance to be resumed, and plans ahead so as tobe prepared to issue orders promptly when such an op-portunity occurs.

h. Antimechanized defense and antiaircraft security.(1) Whenever the platoon is assembled, air-antitankguards are posted to give warning of the approach ofhostile aircraft and tanks.(2) The platoon leader advances his platoon through ter-

rain containing obstacles to tank movement. He insuresthat exposed flanks and routes by which tanks could ap-proach close to the platoon are covered by the antitankrifle grenadiers. For action to be taken in case of mecha-nized attack, see paragraph 12c (2).(3) For security against air attack, rifle platoons and

squads make the maximum use of concealment. For use

of antiaircraft fire against hostile aircraft, see paragraph12c(3). Rifle platoons and squads do not fire on hostileairplanes when their fire is required on ground targets.

117. PURSUIT. a. When the platoon reaches its final ob-jective, the enemy is kept under fire as long as he is withineffective small-arms range. Pursuit is taken up only onorders of the company commander.

b. The actions of a platoon during the pursuit resembleits actions during the approach march and the attack.Formations are changed as necessary to facilitate controland rapid advance, and to develop maximum firepowerwhen the enemy resistance stiffens. Light machine gunsand 60-mm mortars frequently are attached to rifle pla-toons for the pursuit.

118. SUPPORT PLATOON. a. In the early phases of an at-tack, the rifle company usually retains one or two platoonsin support. The support echelon constitutes the companymaneuvering force. The missions which may be assignedto a support platoon include one or more of the following:(l) To envelop, or attack in flank, points of resistance

holding up the attacking echelon.(2) To reinforce the attacking echelon by fire.(3) To furnish security to the flanks (connecting groups

or flank combat patrols).(4) To assist the progress of adjacent units by fire and

movement.(5) To furnish protection against counterattacks duringthe reorganization of the attacking echelon.(6) To relieve a platoon of the attacking echelon.(7) To mop-up a position overrun and passed by the at-

tacking echelon.b. (1) The support platoon advances by bounds in ac-

cordance with instructions of the company commander.It employs approach march formations until committed

151

to action. (See par. 114a.) The platoon leader preventsit from becoming merged with the attacking echelon.

1*t}3Al~~I 4AV

Figure 19. Rifle platoon in defense (see also fig. 32)

(2) During the advance the leader of a support platoonconstantly observes the action of the attacking echelorand the situation on the flanks. As the situation progresse&he makes tentative plans for the employment of theplatoon.

c,. A support platoon is charged with its own protection,and may be ordered to protect the flanks of the attackingechelon either by sending out flank patrols or by the occu-pation of positions from which it can fire or maneuver tothe flank. It frequently is charged with maintaining con-tact with adjacent companies; connecting groups sendinformation direct to the company commander. For theplatoon leader's instructions to flank patrols and to con-necting groups, see paragraphs 171 and 172. If the com-pany commander does not prescribe the strength of theconnecting group (s), the platoon leader makes them assmall as practicable considering the difficulties of the ter-rain, the distances they are to operate, and the probablenumber of messengers required.

Explanation of figure 19

I. Platoon leader.2. Platoon sergeant.3. Squad leaders.4. Assistant squad leaders.5. Light m:lachine gun section leader.6. Light machine gtll squad leaders.7. Light minacllille gunL a nuniition bearers.8. Messengers.9. Observel, 60-mm mortar squad-beside platoon leader.

10. 60-mm ni orltar ith clew-gullner. assistalnt gollncl, ald ammu-nition bearer.

11. Automatic riflemen.12. Ditch used as a covered route to individual supplelnenlary fox-

holes so as to provide for defense to the rear.13. Adjacent defecse allea.14. Squad sector of file-center squad; inlter flanks of other squads

indicated by broken lines.15. Platoon guide.16. Cache dug to serve as protection for mortar ammunLition.

SECTION IIIDEFENSE

119. TACTICAL EMPLOYMENT. a. General. (1) A rifle pla-toon of a front-line rifle company may be employed toorganize and defend an area on the main line of resist-ance, or it may organize and defend the company supportarea. It normally occupies one defense area. When itoccupies more than one defense area, each area is inde-pendently commanded and operates directly under thecompany commander. (See fig. 19.)(2) The rifle platoon of a reserve company organizes aposition in the reserve area according to the doctrinesapplicable to a platoon of a front-line company.

b. Missions. (1) FRONT-LINE PLATOON. The mis-sion of the front-line platoon is, with the support of otherunits, to stop the enemy by fire in front of the main lineof resistance and to repel him by close combat if hereaches it.(2) SUPPORT PLATOON. The mission of the supportplatoon is to assist the front-line platoon by fire, limitpenetrations within the company area, execute localcounterattacks, and protect the flanks and rear of thecompany.

120, ACTION BY PLATOON LEADER. Upon receipt of thecompany defense order, the platoon leader takes such ofthe steps described in paragraph 67 as apply to a platoon.

121. RECONNAISSANCE. The method of reconnaissancedescribed in paragraph 68 for the company commander isused so far as it pertains to the rifle platoon. Duringthe reconnaissance, the platoon leader contacts leaders ofsupporting weapon units on the ground before determin-ing final locations for rifle squads and for any attachedmortars.

122. PLATOON DEFENSE ORDER. The order should in-clude:

a. Information of enemy, including probable directionand time of enemy attack.

b. Information of supporting and adjacent units.c. Platoon mission.d. Location and mission of each squad, including the

automatic rifle team and men equipped with grenadelaunchers and rifle grenades.

e. Location and missions (primary and secondary tar-get areas) of any attached 60-mm mortar (s).

f. Location and missions of any rocket launcher (s) as-signed to the platoon. (See par. 74e.)

g. Security.h. Priority of construction.i. Ammunition supply, battalion aid station, and other

pertinent administrative details.j. Command post.

123. AMMUNITION SUPPLY. See paragraph 214.

124. FRONTAGES. The company commander assigns front-ages in his front-line platoons in accordance with the nat-ural defensive strength and relative importance of theirdefense areas. W here a platoon occupies a vital area hav-ing poor observation and poor fields of fire, such as inheavily wooded or broken terrain, the frontage of its areashould not exceed 250 yards. Where the area is moreopen and affords longer fields of fire, a frontage of 400to 500 yards may be assigned. Where the terrain is openand flat, or an obstacle across the front would make anenemy attack in strength very difficult, the frontage as-signed to the platoon may exceed this figure. The frontagephysically occupied by the platoon usually will not ex-ceed 300 yards. The platoon covers by fire that part of itsfront that is not occupied.

125. DISTRIBUTION OF SQUADS. a. Front-line platoon.(1) A platoon occupying an area on the main line of

resistance disposes the rifle squads to cover the front ofthe platoon area, the intervals on the flanks, and to fur-nish mutually supporting fires with adjacent platoons.Where the assigned frontage is so narrow that there arefew or no gaps between platoons, the rifle squads may belocated generally abreast. When occupying an area witha wider frontage, better fire to the flank and mutual firesupport with adjacent platoons are obtained by drawingback the flanks. The exact trace of the platoon disposi-tions is coordinated with supporting weapons located inits area. This coordination provides the best fields of firefor all weapons. (See fig. 19.)(2) The automatic riflemen and antitank rifle grenadiersnormally remain with their squads.(3) If a 60-mm mortar is attached, it is located in suitable

defilade within arm-and-hand signaling distance (100yards) of the observer, and is sited to cover the most dan-gerous covered approaches to the platoon area. The mor-tar observer posts himself within signaling distance of theplatoon leader.(4) Supplementary positions for all-around defense to theflanks and rear are constructed and provision is made forshifting part of the platoon to these positions. Theyshould be located as close to the forward positions as theterrain permits. On flat terrain, riflemen can shift theirfire to the rear from their primary individual emplace-ments. Wherever possible, natural cover, drainage lines,ditches, and other defilade are used for movement to sup-plementary positions.

b. Support platoon. (1) The support platoon organizesits position in a manner similar to a front-line platoonoccupying a wide frontage. It may be required to or-ganize more than one position and then be held mobilein an assembly area, ready to occupy either its prepared

position or to counterattack. The general location of theassembly area is prescribed by the company commander.It must afford cover and concealment and be readily ac-cessible to the areas where the platoon is to be used. Areasin which hostile tanks are likely to operate are undesir-able as assembly areas. Routes affording cover and con-cealment from the assembly area to prepared positionsare selected. All men in the platoon area are acquaintedwith these routes and with their positions and missions ineach organized defense area.(2) Within the assembly area, squad areas are allotted;each should be large enough to prevent congestion. Indi-viduals take cover in ditches and other defilade. If nonatural cover is available, foxholes are dug for shelterfrom artillery fire and aerial bombardment. (See app. I.)(3) When he assigns the platoon a counterattack mission,

the company commander prescribes the objective anddirection of attack. The counterattack is launched againsthostile elements which have overrun a front-line defensearea, or against hostile elements effecting an infiltra-tion that threatens to envelope a forward area. When adefense area has been lost, the counterattack seeks to re-gain the position. It should strike hostile forces in flankwith the full force of the platoon. The counterattack of asupport platoon is a bayonet assault delivered quicklybefore the enemy has time to reorganize. The platoondoes not pursue beyond the main line of resistance, exceptby fire. The counterattack plan is fully explained to allmen of the platoon and, if time permits, is rehearsed.(4) The company commander decides whether the sup-

port platoon is to counterattack or to occupy a preparedposition.

126. FIRE PLAN. a. The front-line platoon distributes itsfire to cover its front and flanks and the fronts of adjacentplatoons. Each rifle squad is given a sector of fire. The

157

flanks of the sector are indicated to the squad leader byterrain features. To insure complete coverage of the tar-get, the rifle squad sectors of fire overlap. The area infront of adjacent platoons is included in the sectors offire of flank squads. Automatic rifles are emplaced tocover the major portion of the squad sector of fire and beable to fire across the fronts of adjacent squads. They areassigned a principal direction of fire to cover specific ter-rain features or gaps in the close defensive fires of thesupporting weapons. They are valuable for covering smalldraws or other approaches to the position.

b. The support platoon assigns sectors of fire to itssquads to cover the flanks of the forward platoons and thegaps between the platoons. It must be capable of shiftingits fire to either flank or to the rear to defend against anattempted envelopment of the company.

c. Platoon fire plans are coordinated by the companycommander.

127. ANTIMECHANIZED DEFENSE. See paragraph 79.

128. ANTIAIRCRAFT SECURITY. See paragraph 80.

129. COMMAND AND OBSERVATION POST. The platoonleader stations himself where he can best observe thefront and flanks of his area and can signal his squadleaders. His position should afford nearby cover for mes-sengers and defiladed routes to the company commandpost. The platoon sergeant is near the platoon leader.

130. ORGANIZATION OF GROUND. The extent of organ-ization of the platoon defense area is limited only by thetime and facilities available. The order in which thisconstruction is to be executed is expressed in orders inthe form of priorities. Simultaneous work is done on sev-eral tasks where possible. Automatic weapons are

158

mounted and crews are ready to fire during this organiza-tion. Camouflage and other provisions for concealmentprecede, or are concurrent with, other work. After thelocations of weapon emplacements have been fixed, theprimary considerations are to get the men dug in, theposition concealed to the maximum extent from both airand ground observation, and the foreground cleared suf-ficiently to permit effective fire.

131. LOCAL SECURITY. The platoon provides for its ownlocal security by constant observation to the front andflanks. An observer is posted at all times in each subordi-nate defense area to give warning of any hostile groundor air approach. At night double sentinels may be re-quired as listening posts to cover possible avenues ofhostile approach. Sentinels are regularly relieved at leastevery 2 hours; more frequent relief may be advisable.

132. CONDUCT OF DEFENSE. a. Successful defense is pre-dicated on each subordinate unit holding its area. Theplatoon holds its position at all costs. It never withdrawsexcept upon the verified order of higher authority. Theplatoon takes cover during the hostile artillery prepara-tion and assumes firing positions as soon as the artilleryfire has lifted. Fire is withheld until the attacker ap-proaches within effective rifle range (500 yards). The ac-curate fire and close combat of riflemen and automaticriflemen is the deciding issue in battle. As the hostile ad-vance draws nearer, rates of fire are increased. Muchdepends on the subordinate leaders controlling the fireof their units and directing it against the most threaten-ing targets. The company commander is kept informed ofthe situation. If the attacker succeeds in rushing the posi-tion, he is met with fire, grenades, and the bayonet. Theplatoon holds its ground and repulses or destroys theattacker.

b. When an adjacent defense area is penetrated, fire isdirected against that hostile force to prevent him fromwidening the break in the adjacent area and thereafterenveloping nearby platoons. Should the platoon be threat-ened with envelopment, its leader makes changes in dis-positions of his personnel and of any supporting weaponsin his area so as to insure all-around defense of hisposition.

133. PLATOON AS COMBAT OUTPOST. The battalionmay prescribe that front-line companies establish combatoutposts. The battalion order will indicate the locationand may prescribe the strength of the outpost. The sup-port platoon will usually perform this mission. While theplatoon is engaged on this duty the platoon leader or theplatoon sergeant reconnoiters the support area and out-lines its defensive position. For details pertaining to theplatoon as a combat outpost, see paragraph 106.

134. RETROGRADE MOVEMENTS. For the rifle platoon inretrograde movements, see section IV, chapter 3.

SECTION IVSECURITY MISSIONS

135. GENERAL. a. The rifle platoon usually performssecurity missions as a part of the rifle company. In somesituations the platoon performs missions similar to thosedescribed for the rifle company in chapter 4.

b. On the march, security missions of the rifle platooninclude its employment as an advance party, rear party,flank guard, or march outpost.

c. The platoon may be detailed on outpost duty toprotect a bivouac, as part of a general outpost, as a com-bat outpost of a front-line battalion in defensive opera-tions, or as a flank patrol.

160

136. ADVANCE PARTY. a. When the platoon is employedas an advance party it is sent forward from the support.(See figs. 13 and 14.) The mission of the advance party isto provide for the security of the support by firing on anyenemy encountered and by moving rapidly to determinethe hostile dispositions. The advance party, in turn, sendsforward a half-squad or squad as a point. For the dutiesof a point, see paragraph 167.

b. An advance party is disposed in column of twos withone file on each side of the road. The advance party com-mander usuallv marches at the head of the advance partyor between the point and the advance party. He goes,however, where he can best observe the ground and, if re-sistance is met, direct the action to be taken. He is respon-sible that the assigned route or direction of march isfollowed. He usually is responsible for the rate of marchof the advance guard. He prescribes the distance at whichthe point is to precede the advance party. In open coun-try, this varies between 150 and 250 yards. In woodedcountry or at night, distances are considerably reduced.The advance party sends forward connecting files to main-tain contact with the point.

c. An advance party the size of a platoon may be calledupon to furnish two or three small foot patrols of fromtwo to three men each to provide for patrolling up to200 or 300 yards to each flank. The support commanderprescribes exactly what patrolling is to be done by theadvance party. If the support comander fails to state thesedetails, the advance party commander should ask specifi-cally what is desired.

d. Any resistance which the point is unable to overcomeis attacked at once by the advance party, which deploysand attacks to the front or around a flank, without hesi-tation or special reconnaissance. Every effort is made toclear the way quickly for the remainder of the column.

161

When the resistance has been overcome, the march ispromptly resumed. (See fig. 15.)

e. When the advance guard halts, the advance partyforms a march outpost. It immediately sends observers tonearby points affording observation to the front andflanks.

f. A platoon acting as the advance guard of a smallforce is organized and conducts its action as an advanceparty.

137. REAR PARTY. a. A company employed as support ofa rear guard will ordinarily employ a platoon as rearparty to provide security to the rear. The rear party, inturn, sends back a rear point, usually a half-squad; how-ever, a squad may be employed. (See par. 169.) The pla-toon also drops back connecting files to maintain contactwith the rear point.

b. When on foot, the rear party is disposed in column oftwos with one file on each side of the road. The rear partycommander normally marches behind the rear party.From this position he can quickly decide what to dowhen the rear point is fired on. He states in his ordersthe distance, or time interval, at which the rear point isto follow the rear party - usually, if on foot, not morethan 200 yards in open country and less in close countryor, if motorized, a time interval of two minutes. The dis-tance between the rear party and the support is pre-scribed by the support commander. (See par. 101.)

c. Patrolling to the flanks by a rear party of the size of aplatoon is rarely undertaken. Rear guard patrols whichare sent out from the support rejoin the rear party.

d. When the rear party commander decides that it isnecessary to fight in place, he selects a firing positionproviding long fields of fire and well to the rear of thatoccupied by thepoint. He sends a runner to the leader

of the point to tell him where the position is and to leadthe point back in its withdrawal. The withdrawal of therear party is covered by the rear support.

e. When the-rear support halts, the rear party forms amarch outpost, dismounting if motorized.

f. A platoon acting as rear guard of a small force isorganized and conducts its action as a rear party.

138. FLANK GUARD. See paragraph 103.

139. OUTPOST DUTY. a. Protection of a bivouac. (1) SUP-PORT (OR OUTGUARD) OF AN OUTPOST. Seechapters 4 and 6.(2) DETACHED POST. (a) The platoon may be be de-

tailed as a detached post to hold a terrain feature suchas a stream crossing or important road junction outsideof the outpost zone. The platoon organizes for all-arounddefense, posts observers to keep all approaches under ob-servation, and executes such patrolling as is necessary forits own security.

(b) The platoon constructs road blocks and preparesdemolitions as specifically ordered. Road blocks and de-molitions are kept under constant surveillance. The pla-toon position is within effective rifle fire of such roadblocks, but sufficiently removed to prevent casualties fromartillery fire or dive bombing on the road block (200 to400 yards). The antitank rifle grenadiers remain withtheir squads for close antimechanized protection.

b. March outpost. See paragraphs 107 and 173.c. Part of general outpost. See paragraph 105.d. Combat outposts. See paragraph 106.

140. FLANK PATROL. The platoon acting as a flank patrolconforms, in general, to the doctrines governing the em-ployment of a rifle squad as a flank patrol. (See par. 171.)The platoon leader is told to go to a certain place, or to

13

move abreast of the attacking echelon. On the march,the leader sends a point of four to six men 50 to 200yards to his front. He protects his flanks, if necessary, bysmall patrols. When the platoon halts, observers are postedin pairs to watch the front, flanks and rear. The remain-der of the platoon is held under cover ready to resist inany direction. Contact is maintained with the group beingprotected. See paragraph 103 for use of the platoon as amotorized flank patrol.

SECTION VSNIPING

141. SNIPING. a. General. A sniper is an expert rifleman,well qualified in scouting, whose duty is to pick off keyenemy personnel who expose themselves. (See FM 21-75.)By eliminating enemy leaders and harassing the troops,sniping softens the enemy's resistance and weakens hismorale. Snipers may be employed by the company com-mander and platoon leaders in either offensive or defen-sive situations. (See par. 2b (2).)

b. Defense against snipers. Any fire from hostile snip-ers should be reported and special effort made to deter-mine the direction from which the sniping comes. In orderto locate the sniper, decoys to draw fire may be successfullyemployed. In woods, snipers must be promptly dislodgedby rifle fire or by bursts of automatic rifle or light machine-gun fire.

164

CHAPTER 6

RIFLE SQUAD

SECTION IGENERAL

142. COMPOSITION. The rifle squad consists of a squadleader, an assistant squad leader (who also functions as arifle grenadier) an automatic rifle team (automatic rifle-man, assistant automatic rifleman, and ammunition bear-er), and seven riflemen, two of whom are designated asscouts and two of whom are equipped with rifle grenadelaunchers and rifle grenades. (See par. 2f (3) and (5).)

143. DUTIES OF LEADERS. a. The squad leader is respon-sible for the discipline, appearance, training, control, andconduct of his squad. He leads it in combat. Under theplatoon leader's direction, the squad leader arranges forfeeding his men, enforces proper observance of rules ofpersonal hygiene and sanitation, requires that weaponsand equipment be kept clean and in serviceable condition,and checks and reports on the ammunition supply withinthe squad. His squad must be trained to use and care forits weapons, to move and fight efficiently as individuals,and function effectively as a part of the military team.

b. The assistant squad leader performs duties assignedby the squad leader and takes command of the squad inhis absence. The squad leader may designate him tocommand a portion of the squad, to act as an observer,or to supervise replenishment of ammunition.

144. TARGET DESIGNATION. Battlefield targets are gener-ally indistinct. They must be designated with such accu-racy and simplicity as to be unmistakable. Squad leadersand other members of the squad are trained to designatethe location and extent of such targets. For technique oftarget designation, see FM 23-5, 23-10, and 23-15.

145. FIRE CONTROL. a. Fire control implies the ability ofthe squad leader to open fire when he desires, adjust thefire of his squad upon the target, shift the fire of all orpart of the squad from one target to another, regulate therate of fire, and cease firing at will.

b. The squad leader announces the range, designatesthe target, and gives the command for opening fire. Incombat, he controls the fire as long as possible by employ-ing signals or by requiring skirmishers to transmit oralorders along the front of the squad. He concentrates thefire of the squad on the assigned target. On orders of theplatoon leader, or on his own initiative, he shifts the fireof all or part of his squad to new targets.

146. FIRE DISCIPLINE. Fire discipline in the rifle squad ismaintained by careful observance of instructions relativeto the use of its weapons and exact execution of orders.It requires care in sight setting, aim, and trigger squeeze;close attention to the squad leader; and cessation orchange of rate of fire on the squad leader's order or signal.Fire discipline also requires that upon release or fire con-trol by the squad leader, to individual skirmishers, eachmember of the squad acts on his own initiative, selects

his target, estimates the range, opens and ceases fire Inaccordance with the situation, and conserves his ammu-nition.

147. RANGE. Ranges can be determined most accuratelyby sighting shots where the strike of bullets can be ob-served, or when tracer ammunition is used. Estimation ofranges by eye enables a squad to place surprise fire on thetarget. All personnel must be trained to estimate rangesby eye. (See FM 23-5.)

148. AMMUNITION SUPPLY. a. Each member of the squadhabitually carries an initial supply of ammunition on hisperson; in addition, the assistant automatic rifleman andthe ammunition beater also carry ammunition for theautomatic rifle. The assistant squad leader and other menequipped with rifle grenade launchers carry some rifleammunition in addition to rifle grenades. Prior to entryinto combat, hand grenades and an additional supply ofammunition are issued. For additional details pertainingto ammunition supply, see paragraph 214.

b. During combat the squad leader requests the platoonleader to replenish ammunition and insures that all un-expended ammunition on casualties is secured by mem-bers of his squad.

SECTION IIATTACK

149. FIRE ORDERS. The details included in fire ordersare dependent upon the time available, cover, and char.acter of the target.

&67

a. If the target is at close range and unmistakable, fireorders may be limited to the command "commence fir-ing."

b. Detailed fire orders are not practicable when thesquad occupies an exposed position, and fire control mustbe released to the individual skirmishers.

c. Whenever practicable, preliminary fire orders are is-sued under cover before the skirmishers occupy firing posi-tions. When the target cannot be easily identified, thesquad leader will have the men creep or crawl sufficientlyclose to the crest or other mask to see the foreground. Hecompletes the fire order when the men have signifiedrecognition (signal "Ready"). For examples of fire orderssee FM 23-5, 23-10 and 23-15.

150. ANTIMECHANIZED DEFENSE AND ANTIAIRCRAFTSECURITY. See paragraphs 12c and 21i (3).

151. APPROACH MARCH. a. Dispositions. When the pla-toon leaves the route column to take up the approachmarch the squad marches with the platoon as ordered bythe platoon leader. (See par. 114.) The squad dispositions(formations) are squad column (either opened or closed),skirmishers, and diamond formation. (See FM 22-5.) Theinitial (first) formation may be prescribed by the platoonleader; thereafter a squad leader changes the dispositionof his squad to meet changes in the situation and terrain.In selecting a formation, the squad leader considers thenecessity of employing his weapons promptly, of present-ing a poor target to the enemy, and of retaining controlof his squad.

(I) "Squad column," either opened or closed, is vulner-able to hostile fire from the front and requires a changeof formation to permit the employment of all the squad's

weapons to the front, but is easily controlled andmaneuvered. It is suitable for crossing areas exposed toartillery fire and for movement in woods, fog, smoke, anddarkness. Squad column, opened, provides some degreeof all-around protection and is suitable for crossing opencountry. Squad column, closed, is suitable for movingthrough narrow defiles or along trails. Both formationsfacilitate immediate action toward the flanks. The auto-matic rifleman is posted close to the squad leader nearthe head of the column. A squad column does not usuallyexceed 60 paces in depth.

(2) "As skirmishers" is less vulnerable to hostile fire fromthe front, ahd enables the squad to employ its weaponsto the front without change of formation; but it is moredifficult to control than either of the squad column for-mations. It is adapted to rapid dashes across open spaces,particularly shelled areas. When the squad is deployed inskirmish line its front ordinarily should not exceed 60paces.

(3) "Diamond formation" combines most of the advant-ages, with few of the disadvantages, of the other two dis-positions. It is especially adapted to situations whenreadiness for action in any direction is required; it isfrequently used when emerging from cover or from adefile. It is also adapted to take best advantage of coveron broken ground and for traversing zones near theenemy but beyond effective rifle range of known hostilepostions.

b. Passing through long-range fire. When the enemy iscovering a zone across the line of advance with long-rangemachine-gun or artillery fire (interdiction fire), the squadfrequently crosses short stretches of such exposed terrain

by successive movement of small groups or ihdividuals.This action is taken by the squad leader, upon his owninitiative or when directed by his platoon leader. Thegroups or individuals do not stop until they have passedthrough the area covered by fire; this is particularly im-portant when crossing crests or passing through defiles.The squad leader moves across the area first and reformshis squad beyond the area as the men come through.

c. Position and duties of leaders. (I) SQUAD LEAD-ER. During the approach march the position of the squadleader is at the head of, or in advance of, his squad. Heregulates his advance on the base squad or, being in com-mand of the base squad, advances as directed by theplatoon leader. He studies the ground to the front tochoose the best route and to control and regulate themovement of his squad. He decreases distances and in-tervals between individuals as conditions of visibility be-come poor. He, or a member of the squad designated byhim, maintains the prescribed direction. He makes minordetours to take advantage of better routes of advance.(2) ASSISTANT SQUAD LEADER. The assistant squad

leader is usually posted in rear of the squad to preventstraggling, to prevent elongation or closing up of thesquad, and to insure its orderly advance. During a hostiletank attack he and the other men equipped with riflegrenade launchers and antitank rifle grenades take posi-tions where they can best combat the tanks.

d. Duties of scouts. (1) When it is not preceded byfriendly troops within view, a rifle platoon in the at-tacking echelon of a leading company is preceded by itsscouts. The scouts operate under control of the platoonleader. (See paragraph 114f.) Deployed in pairs at wideand irregular intervals, they move out boldly to the frontto reconnoiter successive positions (objectives) along theroute of advance, and seek to force enemy riflemen and

machine guns to disclose their position. One member ofeach pair watches for signals from the platoon leader.They take advantage of cover without delaying theiradvance, and cross exposed ground at a run. Their dis-tance in front of the platoon is governed by orders ofthe platoon leader and varies with the ground and withthe probable position of the enemy. One moment theymay be 500 yards ahead; at another time they may beabsorbed within their units. In approaching houses, na-tural defiles, and villages, one scout of each pair coverthe movement and reconnaissance of the other.(2) When scouts reach woods, one scout of each pair re-connoiters within the woods for a short distance while theother covers his movement. As soon as the leading scoutdetermines that the edge of the woods is free of the enemyhe returns within view and signals "forward." The secondscout repeats this signal to the platoon leader. Both scoutsthen enter the woods and maintain observation towardthe enemy until the platoon comes up. Scouts passingthrough woods ahead of their platoon keep within sightof each other. If an obstacle is encountered, they recon-noiter to the front and flanks. When advancing along aroad or path, scouts reconnoiter well to the flanks beforesignaling "forward" to the platoon. Scouts halt at the faredge of a woods until the platoon leader arrives; he thengives them further directions. When sent ahead to recon-noiter dangerous points, they signal back whether condi-tions indicate that the platoon halt, continue to march,or quickly rush across the area. They are continually onthe lookout for signals from the rear. For signals, see FM22-5.(3) If the enemy opens fire, the scouts stop, seek cover,and try to determine the enemy's position. When theenemy postion is located, one scout of each pair crawlsto the best nearby firing position and opens fire withtracer ammunition to indicate the target. The second

scout observes and orders necessary changes in range.When adjustment of fire is completed, he also opens fire.If the scouts have no tracer ammunition, one opens fireand the other points out the target to the platoon leader.(4) When the squad is acting alone, the scouts function

as squad scouts. They precede the squad leader, who isat the head of or in advance of his squad. Their dutiesare the same as when acting as platoon scouts.

e. Action when scouts are fired upon. When the scoutsare halted by fire, the squad leader immediately gets thesquad under cover, studies the terrain for covered routesforward, and watches the platoon leader for orders. Thesquad leader may be directed to re-form his squad on theline of scouts and open the fire fight, or to move his squadto some other firing position from which he can moreeffectively engage the enemy. In either case, the squadleader makes his plan for the employment of thile auto-matic rifle team and for the disposition of the menequipped with rifle grenade launchers and rifle grenades.He plans the advance of his squad to avoid as much aspracticable the hostile fire holding up the scouts.(2) When the squad leader is directed to reform his squad

on the line of scouts, he advances his squad by -(a) Rushes. When the enemy fire permits, and the dis-

tance to be covered is short, the squad is moved forwardby a series of squad rushes.

(b) Creeping and crawling. When the terrain affordscover and concealment, the men creep and crawl to theirfiring positions.

(c) Movement of individuals or small groups. Wherethere is little cover or concealment and the area betweenthe firing position and the squad is under enemy obser-vation or fire, the advance is continued by sending for-ward individuals or groups of two or three men at a time.The designated individual or small group advances by ashort rush, or a series of short rushes, to the firing position

and opens fire. Then other individuals or small groupsare advanced under cover of this fire. This procedure iscontinued until all men have reached the firing line.(3) When the squad leader is directed to move his squadto some other firing position from which he can moreeffectively engage the enemy, he should make use of thefires of the scouts, the cover and concealment offered byaccidents of the terrain (ditches, brush, woods, anddraws), anti the fires of supporting weapons to get hissquad as close to the enemy as possible before returningthe fire. When there is a covered route to the firing posi-tion, the squad leader advances the squad as a unit, usingeither a column or diamond formation. He issues his fireorder under cover, has the men creep or crawl to theirfiring positions and, when all are in position, has themdeliver a surprise volume of accurate fire.

f. Fire distribution. (1) Each member of the squad fireshis first shot on that portion of the target correspondinggenerally to his position in the squad. He then distributeshis next shots to the right and left of his first shot, cover-ing that part of the target on which he can deliver accu-rate fire without having to change position. The portionof the target which one man can cover will depend uponthe range and the position of the firer. Frequently eachman will be able to cover the entire target with accuratefire; this should be done whenever possible. Fire is notlimited to points within the target known to contain anenemy; on the contrary, all men space their shots so thatno portion of the target remains unhit.(2) From a position best suited to provide support, theautomatic rifleman distributes his fire over the entiretarget, or on any target which will best support the ad-vance of other members of the squad. The automaticrifleman fires rapid single shots or bursts of two or threerounds; he does not fire longer bursts unless he is able

173

to take the target in enfilade or unless the target is at veryclose range. (See FM 23-15.)(3) This method of fire distribution is employed withoutcommand. The squad leader observes the fire, to insurethat the entire target is kept under fire. If other targetsappear, he announces such changes in fire distributionas are necessary.

152. PREPARATIONS FOR COORDINATED ATTACK. a.Assembly areas. (1) Unless the squad, during the ap-proach march, is part of a leading platoon and becomesengaged with the enemy as described in paragraph 114e,it usually is directed to halt briefly in a covered area des-ignated by the platoon leader. This area is usually partof a company or battalion assembly area. Immediatelyon arrival in this area the squad leader disperses his menin the area allotted him by the platoon leader. He takesadvantage of all natural cover and concealment to protectthem from aerial and ground observation and fire. Everyman must take advantage of existing holes or furrows,or must be required to dig a foxhole, so that his body willbe below the level of the ground in order to reduce thedanger from bomb or shell fragments. (See app. I.)(2) The squad may furnish an interior guard for the pla-

toon; the principal duty of such a guard is to see thatmen do not congregate or expose themselves or theirequipment to hostile observation. It also may post one ormore sentinels to guard against surprise attack by hostilepatrols or may furnish air-antitank guards.(3) As soon as his men are disposed in the assembly area,the squad leader inspects the physical condition andequipment of every man. Extra ammunition usually isissued in the assembly area. (See par. 214.) The squadleader insures that each man receives the proper quan-tities and types.

b. Reconnaissance. The squad leader may move for-ward in advance of his squad to receive the platoonleader's attack order, or may receive it after the squadhas left the assembly area and arrived in the vicinityfrom which the attack is to start. (See par. 1151.) He maybe able to reconnoiter or observe the ground over whichhis squad is to attack in much the same manner as de-scribed in paragraph 115b and c for the platoon leader.During his reconnaissance, the squad leader must decidehow and where he will employ his automatic rifle team.If there is so little time remaining after receiving theplatoon order that he must lead his squad at once intoits position, the squad leader, during his return to thesquad, selects a route of advance. Thereafter, having is-sued certain parts of his order, he precedes his squad andcontinues his reconnaissance as he advances. He neverexposes his squad in an area subject to enemy small-armsfire without prior reconnaissance.

c. Squad attack order. (I) The squad leader issues hisattack order to all men of his squad. Orders are well exe-cuted only when they are clear and definite and all 12minds in the squad understand the squad mission andthe plan for accomplishing that mission. To be certainthat nothing is left out, a definite sequence is followed.The' squad leader -

(a) Tells the men all that he knows about the enemyand about his own troops that they do not already knowand which directly affect their conduct in the action.

(b) Tells the men what the squad is to do and what hisplan is for doing it.

(c) Tells each man what he is to do. If all are to do thesame thing, there is no need to tell each one separately.

(d) Tells the squad where he is going to be. When heis to be at a distance from the squad, he tells them exactlywhere he will be. For example: "I will be ahead of the

175

squad, with the scouts, in those bushes" (pointing tothem).(2) Squad leaders can most effectively give instructions to

their squads under cover. It is very difficult to communi-cate instructions and insure their execution after thesquads have occupied the firing position.

153. CONDUCT OF ATTACK. a. Movement to attack. Thesquad usually moves from the assembly area to the areafrom which it is to start its attack under control of theplatoon leader or company commander. This movementis a continuation of the approach march. (See par. 151.)The platoon leader's attack order will direct that thesquad start its attack on a prescribed signal or at a spe-cified time. The squad may be directed to attack from acertain small area or from the vicinity of a certain point.The squad must be in its assigned place, ready to moveforward or commence firing, at the prescribed time. Some-times, however, the squad is directed to cross a certainroad or other "line of departure" on a prescribed signalor at a specified time. In this situation, the squad shouldbe held under cover a short distance in rear of the desig-nated line until just before the time of attack. If possible,the start of its movement should be so timed that, withouthalting, its leading man crosses the line at the specifiedmoment.

b. Fire and maneuver. (1) Unless otherwise ordered bythe platoon leader, the squad leader permits his squad toopen fire only when fire action is necessary to cover a fur-ther advance. At the first firing position, the squad seeksto gain fire superiority over the enemy to its front. Firesuperiority is gained by subjecting the enemy to fire ofsuch accuracy and intensity that his fire becomes so in-accurate or so reduced in volume as to be ineffective; oncegained, it must be maintained. Unless supporting weaponsor other units are able to maintain fire superiority with-

176

out any help from the squad, enough members of thesquad must remain in position and continue the fire tomaintain it. The automatic rifle's capacity for puttingdown a large volume of fire makes it especially usefulfor this purpose. Meanwhile, other members of the squadmove forward, take up firing positions closer to the enemy,and, by their fire, cover the forward movement of therearward members. By this combination of fire andmaneuver, the squad advances close enough to capturethe hostile position by assault. (See pars. 154 and 155.)(2) When the squad begins firing, the method of its fur-ther advance is determined by the effectiveness of thehostile fire and by the terrain features affording cover.The squad must take advantage of every irregularity ofthe ground to provide protection against hostile fire.Complete fire superiority is required for men to advanceover open ground in the face of an unbeaten enemy. Thesquad can advance as a unit only when completely de-filaded from hostile small-arms fire or when the hostilefire is kept neutralized by the fire of other units or ofsupporting weapons. Therefore, the squad usually worksforward by irregular or successive advances of individuals.(3) Rushes by individuals or small groups are used to

move from cover to cover across short stretches of terrain.Even in very open terrain the well-trained rifleman willbe able to locate and use all kinds of limited cover, suchas slight depressions or rises. However, in very open areas,an advance will usually necessitate overwhelming firesuperiority with consequent longer bounds between firingpositions. To leave a covered position, make a short rush,and drop into a position which affords no protectionfrom enemy ground fire, serves only to increase losseswithout commensurate gain.(4) The automatic rifleman supports the rapid advance

of other members of the squad from positions best suitedto provide support. Because of the difficulty of maintain-

ing an adequate supply of ammunition, and because itis more easily spotted by the characteristic fire in bursts,the fire of automatic rifles is conserved for the actualneeds of the situation. Thus, when the fires of individualriflemen serve to accomplish the desired effect, they areused in preference to the automatic rifle.(5) The squad increases its rate of fire during periods

when any part of it or of an adjacent squad is in move-ment.(6) When the squad leader decides to advance with cer-tain individuals, he turns command of the remainingmen over to the assistant squad leader. The assistantsquad leader causes the remaining men to advance on hisorders. The squad leader decides whether the automaticrifleman will accompany'him in the first group of indi-viduals or remain under the control of the assistant squadleader. In other situations, the squad leader may directthat his assistant control the advance of the first fewindividuals, while the squad leader remains in his presentposition. Exceptionally, when the squad is able to ad-vance in a single rush, the squad leader gives the necessarycommands. The intensity of the hostile resistance and theavailable cover will indicate which method should beused.(7) (a) In moving forward from one firing position to

another, and if a defiladed area is available behind thenew position, the men are halted in rear of it. The squadleader creeps forward quickly to locate and observe thetarget, and to decide where to place the individual mem-bers of his squad. First he selects a position for the auto-matic rifleman; then he decides how and where to employhis riflemen. He requires the men to move forward andobserve the target with a minimum of exposure andgives his preliminary fire orders (sight setting and de-scription of the target). He then commands: FIRE POSI-

TION, and his men crawl to a position from which theycan open fire on the target at the leader's signal. Thesquad leader then orders or signals COMMENCE FIRING.

(b) When this method cannot be followed, the squadleader may designate the new firing position to the firstindividuals to advance, send them forward, and there-after build up the new firing line with other men as theyarrive. At times it may be necessary to advance to a newfiring position merely by signaling FORWARD to individ-uals or groups in the squad and then leaving it up to theleading element to select the new firing position.

c. Position and duties of squad leader. (1) During thefire fight, the primary duty of the squad leader is to placethe fire of his squad on the target. In accomplishing this,he keeps in mind the fire power of his automatic rifleteam, which he employs to place automatic fire on suit-able enemy targets and support the rapid advance ofother members of the squad. He enforces fire discipline.The squad leader takes a position from which he can bestcontrol his men and observe the effect of their fire. Inselecting his position, he considers the necessity of main-taining contact with the platoon leader. At times, onaccount of the noise and confusion of battle, the leadermay have to go to the firing line and move from man toman to give instructions. He fires only in emergency, orwhen he considers that the fire power to be gained byhis firing outweighs the necessity for his close control ofhis squad. Experienced soldiers maybe designated tosupervise the fire discipline of the two or three men intheir immediate vicinity.(2) WThen the squad leader cannot personally maintain

effective control over the fire of the squad as a whole, hemay retain control over a portion and temporarily dele-gate control over the remainder to the assistant squadleader.

179

(3) He requires that firing be limited to enemy troops orthose positions (small areas) where enemy troops areknown or believed to be located.(4) He looks ahead for firing positions which his squad

can use as the platoon moves forward.(5) He seeks a position for his automatic rifleman from

which he can deliver effective fire on any target holdingup the remainder of the squad. Where practicable, thisposition should permit the automatic rifle to fire acrossthe entire squad front. The selected position will usuallybe one with the best field of fire, although tactical or ter-rain considerations may require that fields of fire begiven secofidary consideration.(6) He is constantly on the alert to advance his squadto a location nearer the enemy.(7) He is responsible for maintaining contact with the

platoon leader at all times; he may delegate this duty tothe assistant squad leader.(8) He prevents the members of his squad from becomingso widely separated that he loses control.(9) He prevents several men from bunching behind coversuitable for only one man. Isolated trees, stumps, bushes,or other well-defined objects should be avoided.(10) He observes the location of units on his flanks andmakes a prompt report to the platoon leader wheneverwide gaps occur in the attacking echelon.(11) During lulls in the fight, the squad leader checks am-munition and has ammunition collected from the deadand wounded.(12) In the absence of instructions from the platoon

leader, particularly during the last stages of the fire fight,the squad leader may often have to attack important ordangerous targets without orders.(13) He resists by fire sudden attacks from the flanks. Inthe event of hostile tank attack, he employs the assistantsquad leader and other men equipped with rifle grenade

launchers and antitank rifle grenades to combat tankscoming within effective range. (See par. 12c (2).)(14) If the squad becomes separated from its platoon, hemakes every effort to locate and join the nearest friendlytroops. The squad leader then takes orders from theleader of these troops. At the first favorable opportunitythe squad is released and rejoins its platoon.

d. Position and duties of assistant squad leader. Theassistant squad leader's position is not fixed; he takesposition where he can best assist the squad leader-and beprepared to protect the squad from tarnk attack. Heusually assists in enforcing fire discipline, &ntrolling thefire, supervising the replenishment of anfmunition, andmaintaining contact with the'platoon leader. He may berequired to fire caliber .30 ammunition when the squadleader believes his fire is necessary. He is always preparedto fire antitank rifle grenades on hostile tanks comingwithin range.

e. Automatic rifle team. The automatic rifleman andhis assistant function as a team in order to keep the auto-matic rifle in a state of constant readiness for action.

154. ASSAULT. The assault is delivered on orders, on sig-nal of the platoon leader, or on the initiative of the squadleader. It is delivered at the earliest moment that prom-ises success and without regard to the progress of adjacentsquads. The squad approaches the hostile resistance bykeeping as close as practicable to the supporting fires.When these fires are lifted, the squad may employ assaultfire to prevent the enemy-from manning his position. Inthe final stage of the assault the hostile position is overrunin a single rush with the bayonet. Against an intrenchedenemy, the final charge may be preceded by a handgrenade volley.

181

155. ASSAULT FIRE. Assault fire is the fire. delivered by aunit during its assault on a hostile position. Automaticrifleman and riflemen, with bayonets fixed, all taking fulladvantage of existing cover such as tanks, boulders, trees,walls, and mounds, advance rapidly toward the enemyand fire as they advance at areas known or believed to beoccupied by hostile personnel. Such fire is usually deliv-ered from the standing position and is executed at a rapidrate.

156. REORGANIZATION. After a successful assault, thesquad leader reorganizes his squad. He may use the auto-matic rifle team to cover this reorganization. He thenprepares to advance or to repel hostile counterattacks.(See par. 116e.)

157. SUPPORT SQUAD. a. Before the attack, the squadleader of a squad in support informs his men of thesituation and proposed action of the platoon. He ad-vances his squad in accordance with the orders or signalsof the platoon leader or platoon sergeant, keeping itunder cover as far as practicable, and preventing it frommerging with the attacking squads.

b. When directed to reinforce the attacking squads, hepoints out the positions of the enemy and of theattack-ing squads. He indicates the part of the line to be rein-forced and prepares the squad for a rush (see FM 22-5),extending intervals if necessary.

c. If ordered to attack a definitely located hostile re-sistance from a flank, the squad leader locates a departureposition for the attack and the best-covered route ofapproach thereto. He then moves the squad, precededwhen necessary by scouts, to the position selected, andendeavors to overwhelm the enemy by opening surprisefire and delivering the assault from an unexpected direc-tion.

182

SECTION IIIDEFENSE

158. GENERAL. The platoon leader's defense order assignsto the rifle squad the general trace of the line to beoccupied, a specific sector of fire, and general locationsand principal directions of fire for the automatic riflemanand men equipped with rifle grenade launchers and anti-tank rifle grenades. The location of each member of thesquad and the assignment of individual sectors of fire isa function of the squad leader. As soon as the squadreaches the position, the automatic rifle is set up andprepared to fire. (See fig. 19.)

159. SQUAD DEFENSE ORDER. Upon receipt of the pla-toon defense order the squad leader looks over his areasand notes the locations of adjacent squads and any sup-porting weapons for which he must provide close protec-tion. He then issues his order to the squad. The ordercovers -

a. The enemy situation.b. Location of adjacent squads and supporting weapons.c. The extent of the squad area and sector of fire.d. General location for each member of the squad.e. Location of command posts of the platoon and com-

pany.

160. ORGANIZATION OF SQUAD DEFENSE AREA. a. Thesquad leader then has each man lie down in a firing posi-tion. Individuals are placed at least five yards apart. Hethen adjusts their positions until each man is able tocover the desired sector of fire. Minor clearing is accom-plished in the immediate foreground and foxholes areconstructed. (See app. I.)

1!3

b. The squad leader assigns a sector of fire to each firingmember of his squad. Adjacent individual sectors of fireoverlap. The field of fire of the weapon on the extremeflank of the squad includes the front of the adjacentsquad.

c. The automatic rifle is located where it can accomplishthe mission assigned by the platoon leader. The sector offire for the automatic rifle includes the squad sector offire and the front of adjacent squads. (See par. 126.)

d. After the squad digs in, the squad leader examineshis position from the direction of the enemy to check onindividual camouflage. Special emphasis is placed on con-cealing the position from both ground and air observa-tion.

e. To expedite the opening of fire, ranges are estimatedto the most important landmarks in the squad sector offire.

f. The squad leader takes position where he can bestobserve the squad area and exercise control. He posts theassistant squad leader and other men equipped with riflegrenade launchers and antitank rifle grenades where theycan cover the most favorable approaches for hostile tanks.In addition, the position selected for the assistant squadleader must be such that he can assist the squad leaderin exercising control.

g. As time and other duties permit, the squad leader pie-pares in duplicate a rough sketch of the squad's sector offire showing prominent terrain features with the esti-mated ranges thereto. He submits the sketch to the pla-toon leader and retains a copy for his own use.

161. ANTIMECHANIZED DEFENSE AND ANTIAIRCRAFTSECURITY. See paragraphs 79 and 80.

162. CONDUCT OF DEFENSE. a. During a hostile prepara-tory bombardment the squad takes cover in its prepared

184

positions. As soon as the artillery fire or aerial bombinglifts, firing positions are taken to meet the hostile attack.Fire is withheld until the enemy comes within effectiverifle range (500 yards).

b. Members of the squad open fire upon an approach-ing enemy on command of the squad leader, given inaccordance with the platoon leader's orders. The successof the defense depends upon each squad defending inplace. If enemy riflemen enter the squad area, they aredriven out by fire, grenades, and the bayonet. A stubborndefense in place by front-line squads break up enemyattack formations, and makes him vulnerable to counter-attacks by higher units. The squad withdraws only onorders of a higher commander.

163. NIGHT WITHDRAWAL. In a night withdrawal, thesquad leader withdraws his men at the designated timedirect to the rear and assembles them in the first positionwhich affords cover. He then forms squad column andconducts the squad to the platoon assembly area. (Seepar. 94.)

164. DAYLIGHT WITHDRAWAL. When the squad is or-dered to withdraw during daylight, individuals are sent tothe rear, thinning out the squad as rapidly as possible;those left in position cover this withdrawal. The squadleader withdraws with the last man of the squad, usuallythe automatic rifleman. The men retire from cover tocover, taking advantage of defiladed routes. The assistantsquad leader, or a designated member of the squad, as-sembles the squad as rapidly as possible at the platoonassembly area.

185

SECTION IVSECURITY MISSIONS

165. GENERAL. The rifle squad, or fraction thereof, maybe detailed to perform reconnaissance missions, to func-tion as a combat patrol, or to defend obstacles. For prin-ciples of dismounted patrolling, conduct of reconnais-sance patrols, and conduct of combat patrols other thanthose assigned security missions, see FM 21b75.

166. COMBAT PATROLS ASSIGNED SECURITY MISSIONS.Combat patrols assigned security missions are used toprotect a body of troops or an organized tactical localityagainst surprise, observation, harassment, and infiltration,or to maintain contact with other friendly units. Theyregulate their movement with reference to the unit theyare protecting. The strength of a patrol assigned a secur-ity mission may vary from a rifle squad to a half squad;the automatic rifle team is frequently included, sincesuch a patrol usually is required to fight when it gainscontact with hostile forces. Combat patrols assigned secur-ity missions include the point of an advance, flank, orrear guard, flank patrol, connecting group, march out-post, and outguards.

167. POINT OF AN ADVANCE GUARD. a. The point isthe name given the few infantrymen (usually a riflesquad or half-squad) sent forward by the advance party.Motorized reconnaissance and security elements fromhigher units usually precede the point.

b. The point of an advance guard moves along the axisof advance; it gives warning of the presence of any enemythat may have eluded motorized or mechanized coveringforces; and prevents an enemy in the immediate vicinity

of the route of march from opening surprise fire on thetroops in rear.

c. The poinlt precedes the advance party by a distancevarying with the nature of the terrain, but usually notexceeding 300 yards. To permit control by the squadleader, reduce the danger from hostile small-arms fire,and facilitate prompt fire action toward the front oreither flank, the point marches in column of twos withone file on each side of the road and with a minimum of5 paces between individuals. Two scouts precede the pointby 50 to 100 yards. The squad leader may go whereverhis presence is demanded, usually near the head of thepoint. The assistant squad leader marches at the tail ofthe point.

d. The point fires on all hostile elements within effec-tive rifle range. The presence of a distant enemy, beyondeffective rifle range, is reported by the signal ENEMY IN

SIGHT; the point continues to advance until within effec-tive range; it then opens fire and endeavors to drive theenemy off. When forced by enemy fire to stop, or whenunable to drive off the enemy, the point holds its posi-tion and covers the action of the advance party. Rapid,aggressive movement and fire action by the point not onlymay drive off small enemy groups, but may force a largeenemy group to commit itself to fire action and discloseits dispositions, and thus materially assist the rapid andeffective employment of the advance party.

e. The point observes toward the front and flanks, Butexecutes no flank reconnaissance.

f. Except to open fire, the point stops only when soordered by the advance party commander. When the col-umn halts, the point sends forward one or more observersto guard against surprise attack. (See par. 136.)

168. POINT OF A FLANK GUARD. The point of a flankguard performs its missions in accordance with the in-

187

structions of the platoon leader, and in a manner similarto that prescribed for the point of an advance guard. (Seepar. 103.)

169. POINT OF A REAR GUARD. a. The rear point is thename given to the few infantrymen (usually a rifle squador half-squad) farthest to the rear in a column on themarch. It is detailed from the rear party. (See par. 137.)

b. The dispositions of a rear point are similar to thoseof a point of an advance guard, in reverse order.

c. The rear point stops to fire only when enemy actionthreatens to interfere with the march. It signals the rearparty commander when the enemy is observed.

d. The rear point can expect no reinforcement fromother troops. When the enemy presses closely, othertroops take up a position farther to the rear: the rearpoint, when forced back, withdraws around a flank ordesignated route so as not to mask their fire.

170. CONNECTING FILES. a. Connecting files are fur-nished by the larger units to keep contact with the nextsmaller unit or element. -

b. Connecting files pass along all orders and messagesreceived from the unit sending them out. They halt onlyon orders or signals from that unit, or when the smallerunit halts. They pass to the larger unit no signals except"enemy in sight," and special signals previously agreedupon.

c. If a connecting file consists of one man, he looks alter-nately to the rear and to the front for signals. When theconnecting file consists of two men (double connectingfile), one man watches the larger unit for signals, theother to the fiont; and they remain near enough to eachother to communicate by voice.

171. FLANK PATROL. a. General. (1) Throughout the

188

various phases of an attack, as well as in defense, a riflesquad or half-squad may be sent out as a flank patrol toafford protection. Such a patrol may be told to go to acertain place, or simply to move generally abreast of theattacking echelon. (See pars. 21i and 25f.)(2) If the patrol is to remain for a time at one locality,

the leader selects, and has prepared, one or more firingpositions for each man, to insure all-around defense. Thehalf-squad posts one man to observe; the squad usuallyposts two men; another man watches for signals from theunit whose flank is being protected. The remainder ofthe patrol remains under cover, ready to go immediatelyto the selected firing positions.(3) If the patrol is not directed to a specific location, theleader must choose a position from which he can protectthe flank of his unit by holding off the enemy, or at leastby giving warning of his approach.(4) In the absence of instructions, the patrol leader moveshis patrol so as to protect the flank of the unit sendinghim out. He selects routes and successive positions whichenable him to perform his mission and at the same timeto maintain contact with the unit protected. He detailsone or more men to observe constantly for signals, andinforms his commander of his movements and plans, bymessengers or visual signals.

b. On the march. (1) A rifle squad or half-squad isoften detailed to act as a flank patrol to protect a unit onthe march. The squad leader is given orders either to goto a designated locality, remain for a specified time andthen rejoin the column, or to march along a certain routeor at a specified distance to the flank. (See par. 95.) Flankpatrols may be required to move an equal distance in ashorter time than the main body, or a longer distance inthe same time. Therefore, when vehicles are available,it may be highly desirable to provide them with motortransportation.

189

(2) The patrol moves so as to prevent the enemy fromplacing small-arms fire on the column within midrange(400-600 yards). It investigates areas likely to conceal

hostile elements and locations which might permit goodobservation by the enemy on and near the route of thepatrol. It observes from commanding ground and movesrapidly from point to point so as to keep between theprotected unit and possible locations of hostile elements.(3) Hostile elements are reported by signal or messenger;

large forces advancing toward the main body are reportedboth by signal and messenger. Hostile patrols movingaway from the main body are reported but are not firedon; all other hostile forces within effective range are im-mediately attacked by fire. If the enemy opens fire eitheron the patrol or on the column, the patrol determineshis strength and dispositions, and reports these promptlyto the unit or column commander. Meanwhile, the patrolresists to the last man an enemy attack on the column,unless ordered to withdraw.(4) Contact with the patrol is maintained by the com-

mander of the unit sending it out.

172. CONNECTING GROUP. a. A rifle squad, half-squad,or smaller fraction sent to the flank of a company orplatoon to keep in contact with the unit on that flankis called a connecting group. It moves and operates sothat it knows at all times the location of the near flankof each unit with which it is maintaining contact.

b. The primary mission of a connecting group is to in-form the commander who sent it out of the location andsituation of the unit with which the patrol is maintainingcontact. It may have one or both of the following second-ary missions:(1) To inform the commander of the unit with whichit is maintaining contact of the situation of its own unit.(2) To cover any gaps which exist between its own unit

190

and the adjacent unit by giving warning of and resistingany hostile penetration.

c. If an adjacent unit falls behind, immediate reportshould be made to the commander who sent out thegroup. The connecting group may be divided into twosmaller patrols in order to cover the widened intervaland maintain contact with both units.

d. If contact with the adjacent unit is lost, a report ofthat fact is made immediately by messenger to the com-mander who sent out the group. Unless ordered to return,the group remains out to protect the flank and becomesa flank patrol. (See pars. 21i, 25f, 103d, and 171a.)

e. While maintaining contact, the connecting groupfires only for self-protection or to give warning of a flankattack by the enemy.

173. MARCH OUTPOST. When detailed as a march out-post and assigned an area of observation, a squad leaderplaces his squad under cover so as to maintain thoroughobservation of his area. Men are assigned to reliefs to in-sure alert observation. (See pars. 107 and 174.)

174. OUTGUARDS. a. A squad, or a portion of a squad,may be detailed as an outguard of an outpost for bivouacarea. (See par. 104f.) The support commander prescribesthe posts of the outguard and the number of sentinels.Sentinels are designated as "Sentinel No .............Outguard No ............. Support No ............ "

b. The outguard commander selects the posts for senti-nels covering his sector of observation. During the daythey are placed primarily to observe; at night, to listen.The positions of the sentinels at night should be differentfrom those occupied the day. Any talking at night mustbe in whispers.

c. Sentinels are given the following information:(1) As to enemy -

191

(a) Direction.(b) Patrol or other activity in the area.(c) Special sector to watch.

(2) As to own troops -(a) Location of the support and outguards to the right

and left, a number of his relief.(b) Any patrols which have gone out and will return

through his post.(c) Where prisoners are to be taken and where messages

are to be sent.(3) Special signals, such as gas alarm and countersigns.(4) Names of features of military importance, such as

roads, villages, or streams.(5) Members of the outguard not posted as sentinels rest

nearby under cover (natural cover if available, otherwise'oxholes) but remain fully equipped and close to theirweapons.(6) The outguard commander is told what to do if the

enemy attacks. When his orders direct that he resist ahostile attack, he organizes his position for defense. (Seepar. 160.)

175. DEFENSE OF OBSTACLES. a. A rifle squad, reinforced,is frequently detailed to cover an obstacle with fire. Themen are so placed that they can cover both the obstacleproper and its flanks.

b. When the squad is protecting a mine field or minedroad block, the leader establishes guards to preventcasualties to friendly troops or vehicles.

c. The men defending the obstacle are concealed fromhostile observation, and placed at such distance from theobstacle as to be outside the zone of dispersion of artilleryfire or dive bombing (200 to 400 yards) directed at theobstacle. (See par. 139a (2).) After dark, they occupy posi-tions closer to the obstacle, but beyond hand grenadethrowing distance therefrom.

192

CHAPTER 7

WEAPONS PLATOON

SECTION IGENERAL

176. COMPOSITION. a. The weapons platoon consists ofa platoon headquarters, one light machine-gun section,and one 60-mm mortar section. The platoon headquarters(command group) consists of a platoon leader, a platoonsergeant, and several privates or privates first class (truckdrivers and messengers.)

b. The light machine-gun section consists of a sectionheadquarters and two light machine-gun squads. The 60-mm mortar section consists of a section headquarters andthree mortar squads. Each section headquarters consistsof a section leader and a messenger. Each squad consistsof a squad leader, gunner, assistant gunner, and ammu-nition bearers. In addition to individual weapons, eachlight machine-gun squad is equipped with one lightmachine gun and each mortar squad is equipped withone 60-mm mortar. Prior to combat, the light machineguns, the mortars, ammunition, and accessories are trans-ported by motorized weapon carriers (see pars. 3e and6); during combat, they usually must be carried by hand.

177. DUTIES OF PLATOON COMMAND GROUP. a. Pla-toon leader. The platoon leader is responsible for the

193

.

training, discipline, control, and tactical employment ofthe platoon. His platoon must be trained tactically andtechnically to function effectively as a unit and as partof the military team. During route and approach march,the platoon leader leads his platoon, less any elementswhich have been detached. (See pars. 186 and 193b.)During combat, he employs the platoon as ordered by thecompany commander. The platoon leader keeps himselfinformed of the locations of the company command post,the elements of his platoon, the rifle platoons in theleading echelon of the company, and the carriers fromwhich his ammunition is being obtained. When prac-ticable, he supervises the fire of all elements of the platoon.When direct control of the action of both sections is im-practicable, he supervises the action of one section asdirected by the company commander. He may designatethe platoon sergeant to supervise the other. The platoonleader is responsible for the supply of ammunition fromcarriers, or other point designated by the company com-mander, to all elements not detached from the platoon.(See par. 214.)

b. Platoon sergeant. The platoon sergeant is second-in-command. During movement he marches at the rear ofthe platoon and prevents straggling. During combat hetakes charge of either weapon section when directed bythe platoon leader; otherwise, he keeps constantly intouch with the situation to the rear and flanks of theplatoon, supervises ammunition supply, assists the pla-toon leader as directed in observation and control of fire,and in displacements follows the foot elements of therearmost echelon.

c. Messengers. One messenger accompanies the platoonleader; another reports to the company commander whenthe company takes up a deployed formation. (See par.1 lb (7).)

d. Truck drivers. Truck drivers conceal and camouflage

194

.

their carriers at all halts and are responsible for drivermaintenance. They employ antitank rifle grenades forthe antimechanized defense of their vehicles. When noother personnel is present, the driver of the weapon car-rier on which the caliber .50 machine gun is mountedmans that weapon in case of air attack. For conditionsunder which antiaircraft fires are delivered, see paragraph12c (3).

178. DUTIES OF SECTION AND SQUAD LEADERS. a. Gen-eral. Section and squad leaders are at all times responsiblefor the training, discipline, appearance, and conduct ofthe members of their units.

b. Section leaders. (1) Section leaders lead their sec-tions in route and approach march. In combat, sectionleaders employ their sections in accordance with ordersreceived from the platoon leader or company commander.(2) They select and assign general locations for theirsquads within the area assigned their section, assigntargets or sectors of fire to squads, regulate the displace-ment of the weapons, regulate the expenditure of ammu-nition, and insure its replenishment by the ammunitionbearers (combined under section control whenever great-er efficiency will result). Whenever the bearers are unableto maintain an adequate ammunition supply, they maketimely requests for ammunition to the leader under whoseorders the section is operating. The light machine-gunsection leader usually exercises direct control over thefire of his section. The 60-mm mortar section leaderconducts fire when the fire of more than one squad isdirected on a target; otherwise, his principal duty is toobserve closely the rifle troops and regulate the move-ment and positions of the mortar squads in accordancewith the action and changing situation of the rifle ele-ments.

c. Squad leaders. Squad leaders are charged with the

195

movement of their squads to designated locations; theselection, preparation, and occupation of firing positions;intrenchment; camouflage; observation and adjustmentof fire; fire discipline; and the employment of ammuni-tion bearers to replenish the ammunition supply.

179. CONDUCT OF FIRE. a. Light machine-gun section.(1) The light machine-gun section may be assigned a

definite target or a sector of fire. If assigned a definitetarget, the section leader determines the method of en-gaging it. As a general rule, most effective results areobtained by the simultaneous concentration of the fireof both guns on the same target. The section leader, inconformity with the platoon leader's orders, designatesthe targets, specifies the rate of fire, and gives the com-mand or signal for opening fire. Whenever practicable, heestablishes contact with the rifle unit leaders in his vicin-ity and informs himself as to their situation and intentions.(2) If assigned a sector of fire, the section leader may

divide the sector, giving a part to each squad, or he mayengage targets in the entire sector by the fire of bothsquads.(3) When the squads have been assigned sectors of fire,

each squad leader takes, as his primary missidn, fire onthe targets developing in his own sector, and as a second-ary mission, fire on those targets developing in the ad-jacent sector. When the squad leader acts entirely on hisown initiative, he decides how he can best support thegeneral plan of the company and leads his squad accord-ingly.

b. 60-mm mortar section. Initial supply of ammunitionfor the mortars is limited and resupply is difficult. Conse-quently, the platoon leader or company commanderusually determines the targets upon which fire is to beplaced. Their orders may be to engage specific targets orto engage any of certain types of targets which appear in

196

a prescribed sector or target area. In the absence of orders,squad and section leaders must rely on their own judg-ment and exercise proper initiative to furnish obviouslyneeded fire support. During an attack, section and squadleaders must be alert to locate hidden machine guns thatmay open surprise fire on the advancing riflemen; theappearance of such a gun constitutes an emergency andrequires that the squad leader engage it without orders.

180. OBSERVATION. a. Light machine-gun section. Theplatoon leader provides for constant observation of thecompany zone of action and the terrain to the flanks. Thesection leader establishes his own observation post at apoint from which he can observe his targets or sector offire and control his squads. Squad leaders place them-selves where they can observe their assigned sectors ortargets and control the fire of their units by voice or arm-and-hand signals.

b. 60-mm mortar section. Each mortar squad observa-tion post must afford observation of friendly troops andobservation over the target area or sector of fire. It mustbe within voice or arm-and-hand signaling distance ofthe mortar position and should be at or as near the posi-tion as possible. Usually one of the squad observationposts will serve for the section leader.

181. ANTIMECHANIZED DEFENSE. a. Light machine-gunsection. (1) When practicable, an emplacement is dug forthe light machine gun and crew. Other members of thesquad dig foxholes. (See app. I.) When time does notpermit the construction of emplacements, maximumsecurity is obtained by locating firing positions amonglarge trees, boulders, or other natural antitank obstacles.(2) For basic principles governing action in case of

mechanized attack, see paragraphs 12c (1) and (2).(3) Light machine-gun squads may be employed to cover

197

antitank obstacles such as road blocks and mine fields toprevent removal by the enemy. Positions selected to per-form such a mission should be from 200 to 400 yards fromthe obstacle and well concealed. Ammunition bearers, orattached riflemen, are so located as to observe approachesand prevent hostile patrols nearing the position withoutcoming under observation and fire.

b. 60-mm mortar section. Mortars are emplaced, when-ever possible, so as to take advantage of natural tank ob-stacles. In defensive situations, an emplacement is dug foreach mortar and crew; other members of the squad digfoxholes. (See app. 1.) Upon the close approach of hostiletanks, mortars are dismounted and individuals take coverwithin their emplacements or foxholes, or in any nearbyholes or narrow ditches or among boulders or othernatural tank obstacles. When the hostile threat haspassed, mortars are remounted and personnel resume theirnormal positions.

182. ANTIAIRCRAFT SECURITY. The light machine gun,with its present mount, is not well suited for antiaircraftfire. For expedients used when required to fire at hostileaircraft, see FM 23-45. The platoon relies for securityprimarily on passive measures. For conditions underwhich antiaircraft fires are delivered, see paragraph 12c(3). For antiaircraft defense of organic transport, see

paragraph 13a and 177d.

183. SIGNAL COMMUNICATION. a. lWithin the weaponsplatoon and its elements the usual means of signal com-munication are messengers and arm-and-hand signals.Radio, messengers, arm-and-hand signals, and pyrotechnicsignals are used for communication with the company.For use of telephones, see paragraph 225.

b. Fire and maneuver of the squads and sections arenormally controlled by voice and arm-and-hand signals.

198

When operating as part of the section, squad leaders placethemselves so that they can see both the target and thesection leader.

184. WEAPONS CARRIER LOADS AND AMMUNITIONSUPPLY. The weapon carriers transport the weapons ofthe platoon and ammunition for each weapon in pre-scribed amounts. For ammunition supply, see paragraph214.

185. ROUTE MARCH AND BIVOUAC. a. In route march,the weapons platoon (less weapon carriers) marches inthe company column as directed by the company com-mander.

b. Except as indicated in c below, the weapon carriersand their accompanying personnel move with the bat-talion transport.

c. When the company has a security mission (such assupport of an advance guard or flank guard) or other mis-sion requiring complete readiness for action, the weaponcarriers march with the company under direct control ofthe platoon leader.

d. The location and missions of the platoon in bivouacare assigned by the company commander. (See par. 14.)

SECTION IIATTACK

186. APPROACH MARCH. a. General. When the platoonis to march as a unit, the company commander prescribesits place in the company formation and informs the pla-toon leader whether the weapons carriers are to movewith the platoon or with the battalion transport. He also

199

prescribes a march objective and, usually, a rifle elementon which the platoon is to guide. He indicates any spe-cial mission which the platoon is to perform or to beprepared to perform. When the elements of the platoonare to be distributed for the execution of tactical mis-sions, he prescribes missions for each section and directs

Z SECTION LEADER

{l.o PACESQ.OR OTHER

INTERVAL ASuPRESCRIE .

SQUAD SOUAOCOLUMN COLUMN

LINE OF SQUADS

* PLATOON LEADER

rE: MESSNr ...

SECTION OT SECTIONO ABOUT

PACES

i PLATOON SERGEANT

LINE OF SECTIONS

%3 SECTION LEADER

U2 CU ES N

OR OTHER DISTANCE AS PESCRIBOEOD

COLUMN

SECTION COLUMN

4 PLATOON LEADER

r MESSENGER

SECTION ()ABOUT SO PACF

SECTION 6LATOON

SERGEANT

PLATOONCOLUMN

Figure 20. Dispositions of weapons squads mid sections in approachmarch

200

where each is to march in the company formation, or heattaches certain squads or sections to rifle platoons. Sec-tions or squads assigned specific tactical missions may berequired to carry weapons and a small supply of ammuni-tion by hand. Mortar squads move to successive positionsin readiness, and when two or more squads operate to-gether, at least one squad is prepared to occupy a previ-ously reconnoitered position and open fire promptly.

b. Dispositions. (1) In either "platoon column" or "lineof sections," the sections may be in line of squads or insection column. (See fig. 20.) The formations and move-ments of the platoon, section, and squad conform gen-erally to those described for the rifle platoon and squadin paragraphs 114 'and 151. (See fig. 180 and ®.)(2) The platoon leader studies the terrain and orders suchinitial dispositions of the platoon, less any detached ele-ments, as will best enable him to screen his unit fromhostile observation, move it so as to avoid or minimizethe effect of hostile fire, and retain the greatest practicabledegree of control over all platoon elements. He variesdispositions throughout the approach march in accord-ance with changes in the nature of the terrain and thesituation. Section leaders place their sections in the com-pany formation and take up initial formations as directedby the platoon leader. Thereafter section leaders maychange formation whenever necessary to maintain con-trol, take advantage of cover, or reduce losses.(3) (a) Where conditions do not permit rapid movement

of the carriers, the foot elements and the carriers maymove together. On open ground, in daylight, the carriersare usually moved by bounds in rear of the foot elements.At the end of each bound the carriers should be haltedin defilade from flat-trajectory fire and, if possible, insmall gullies or swales for protection against shell frag-ments.

(b) At night, weapon carriers are usually held in rear

201

and moved forward, under battalion or regimental con-trol, in time to reach the assembly area shortly after thefoot elements.

(c) For antiaircraft and antimechanized defense ofweapon carriers during the approach march, see para-graph 151h.

c. Contact. If the platoon, section, or squad is directedto guide on another unit, connecting files (preferablydouble) should be employed whenever the terrain or lackof visibility make it likely that visual contact may bebroken.

d. Movement by bounds. (1) Movement in daylight ap-proach march takes place in a series of bounds. The pla-toon leader designates a base section and indicates itsinitial march objective or directs it to guide on anotherunit. If one section is detached, the remaining section isgiven appropriate instructions as to direction, bounds,and objectives. When an assigned march objective cannotbe pointed out, intermediate platoon march objectives aredesignated. (See par. 114d.)(2) The platoon leader, accompanied by the command

group, precedes the platoon along the route of march. Hefrequently moves with the company command group.When absent from the platoon, he leaves the platoonsergeant in charge and maintains contact with him bysight, connecting files, or messenger. He observes the routeof advance and the next terrain objective of the com-pany for possible off-carrier positions and for suitable fir-ing position areas, so that he can promptly place his pla-toon in action in the event the company becomes engagedwith the enemy. He reconnoiters for crossings or minordetours by which the weapon carriers may pass obstacles.He detours the platoon around gassed areas and, if prac-ticable, around areas being shelled. In order to crossdangerous areas such as roads or ridges which are exposedto hostile observation, he may prescribe a single rush in

202

line of skirmishers; each section may be closely followedby its carriers or the latter may be directed to cross thearea, in line and at high speed, when the foot elementshave crossed.(3) Areas under fire, when they cannot be avoided, arecrossed by rushes of individuals or small groups undercontrol of section leaders. When under enemy observa-tion, sections and squads adopt formations similar tothose used by rifle units under the same conditions.(4) If a section is detached from the platoon, the sectionleader should precede his unit by a short distance andconduct reconnaissance similar to that prescribed for theplatoon leader.

187. PREPARATIONS IN ASSEMBLY AREAS. See para-graphs 18 and 114i.

188. RECONNAISSANCE. a. Platoon leader. (1) The com-pany commander either may take the weapons platoonleader on reconnaissance or direct him to reconnoiter forspecific information. (See par. 20d (2).) Frequently, how-ever, the platoon leader may have only general informa-tion of his missions and no opportunity for detailed re-connaissance prior to the issuance of the company attackorder. (See pars. 21h and 22b (5).)(2) The weapons platoon-leader makes his personal recon-

naissance and completes his plan of attack in a mannersimilar to that described for the rifle platoon leader. (Seepar. 115b and c.) He allows sufficient time for-.

(a) His noncommissioned officers to reconnoiter andselect firing positions, targets, and target areas for weaponsthat are to be emplaced at the start of the attack or toobserve the ground over which weapons must be ad-vanced when the initial mission is to follow a designatedrifle unit.

203

(b) All squads to occupy initial positions and completepreparations for initial missions.

(c) Mortar squads to locate observation posts fromwhich fire can be adjusted on initial target areas by arm-and-hand signals.(3) While waiting for his section leaders to report for

orders, the platoon leader can often speed up prepara-tions for the attack by personally selecting observationposts or firing positions for that section whose completereadiness at the hour of attack is most important in carry-ing out the company commander's plan. This should bedone whether that section is later to be under his controlor not.(4) The platoon leader issues timely instructions for the

forward movement of the platoon. Unless the companycommander has directed that the off-carrier position belocated in the assembly area or at a more forward loca-tion, the platoon leader must select the off-carrier posi-tion and the most forward point to which ammunition canbe brought by carrier. (See fig. 3.) At the completion ofhis reconnaissance the platoon leader meets his sectionleaders and issues his attack order.

b. Section leaders. Having received the platoon leader'sorders, each section leader precedes his section to theposition area, notes the location of the front-line troops,locates his targets or target area, selects an observationpost for the section, and selects general locations for hisweapons. He also selects cover positions and directs themovement of the squads and their weapons from off-car-rier positions to the cover positions.

189. SELECTION OF FIRING POSITIONS. a. Light machine-gun section. Light machine-gun positions are selected topermit direct fire on the target or targets assigned, or tocover an assigned sector of fire. If possible, locations forlight machine guns should permit fire, with only a slight

204

change of position, on actual or suspected locations ofhostile machine guns sited to take advancing units of thecompany under cross fires. The location of the front-linetroops and the target must be visible from the firing posi-tions. Whenever practicable, cover in rear of the firingpositions (for cover positions see par. 4b) should be avail-able to facilitate the supply of ammunition and to pro-vide shelter for the gun crews when not firing. From thiscover position there should be a covered route to anyalternate position selected. When possible, the firing posi-tions should afford protection against hostile observationand fire from all directions other than that in which thegun is to fire. (See fig. 21.) Gun positions are separatedby a sufficient interval, ordinarily 50 yards, to safeguardagainst both guns being hit by the burst of the same pro-jectile. However, the positions should permit the sectionleader to control the fire by voice or arm-and-hand sig-nals. In selecting positions the location of other troops,in the area must be considered, so as to avoid congestion.Occupation of positions in zones of adjacent companiesis subject to the restriction that the fire or movement ofunits of those companies must not be impeded.

b. 60-mm mortar section. (1) The firing positions of themortars must be within effective range of the targets andwithin voice or arm-and-hand signaling distance of a pointaffording observation of the targets and friendly front-line troops. If radiotelephones are made available, thefiring position of the mortars may be at considerablygreater distance from the observation point. In the selec-tion of firing positions, the section leader also considersthe location of friendly troops, and the requirements ofcover, separation of weapons, ease of control, and facilityof ammunition supply as mentioned above for the lightmachine guns.(2) Whenever practicable, mortars fire from fully de-

filaded positions just in rear of the friendly front line, Be-

z

Figure 21. Light machine-

z0

0oL

AiI'

gun firing position

206

i

It/

cause of the necessity of keeping the mortars well forward,firing positions are frequently located in shell holes,ditches, or folds in the ground.

190. ORDERS. a. Platoon leader. The scope of the wea-pons platoon leader's orders varies widely in differentsituations. His orders include as much of the followingas is necessary for the intelligent functioning of subordi-nates:(1) Information of the enemy and our own troops, includ-ing the contemplated action of the leading rifle platoonsof the company and the positions and missions of themachine guns and mortars of the battalion heavy weaponscompany.(2) Attachments, if any, to rifle platoons.(3) Detachments, if any, to direct control of company

commander.(4) Missions of the sections, to include -

(a) Initial position areas and, where necessary, the routeor unit to be followed thereto.

(b) Initial targets or sectors of fire.(c) Time of opening fire.(d) Subsequent action.

(5) Instructions concerning supply of ammunition.(6) Location of the battalion aid station and any other

administrative instructions.(7) Instructions concerning signal communication, includ-ing prearranged signals.(8) Location of platoon leader and company commander.

b. Section and squad leaders. (I) Section leaderspromptly notify any squad leader whose squad is attachedto a rifle unit. Attack orders of section leaders to squadleaders remaining under their command include: neces-sary information of the enemy and friendly troops; mis-sion (s) of the section; general location of each squad's fir-ing position and any instructions concerning movement

to it; each squad's target (s) or sector of fire; any restric-tions on the opening or conduct of fire; any instructionsconcerning ammunition supply; prearranged signals, ifany; and the location of the battalion aid station, sectionand platoon leaders, and the company commander.(2) Each squad leader includes in his attack order all

items of the section leader's order which pertain to hissquad or its members. After the initial firing position hasbeen occupied he issues the fire order for engaging thefirst target.

c. Fragmentary orders. Platoon, section and squadleaders frequently issue their attack orders in fragmentaryform, particularly when all or part of the unit is initiallyto follow a rifle element of the company. Such items as thelocation of firing positions, targets, or sectors of fire, and soon, are then frequently not issued until the vicinity of theinitial firing position has been reached.

191. MOVEMENT INTO FIRING POSITION. From the off-carrier position sections move by hand to cover positionsdesignated by section leaders. (See par. 4b and c.) Uponreceipt of his section leader's order, each squad leader con-ducts his squad to the assigned position area, selects theexact position for his gun or mortar, directs and supervisesthe occupation of the firing position, and issues his fireorders. In moving to firing positions, squads make allpossible use of cover and concealment so as to get theirweapons into action without being discovered by the en-emy. Ammunition bearers usually remain in cover posi-tions when not delivering ammunition.

192. TARGETS. For appropriate targets for light machineguns and mortars, see paragraphs 3b and c (2), and 179.

193. SUPPORTING FIRES DURING ATTACK. a. General.For the tactical employment of light machine guns and

208

60-mm mortars during attack and pursuit, see paragraphs25d and 29b.

b. Control. Whenever the platoon leader is controllingthe platoon as a unit, his position should if practicable, beclose enough to the company commander to facilitateready intercommunication between them. When the com-pany commander detaches one section to operate under hisown control, the platoon leader accompanies and controlsthe remaining section.

c. Light machine-gun section. (1) In the attack the lightmachine guns are usually employed under company con-trol. The missions assigned the light machine-gun squadsin the attack generally will be one or more of the follow-ing:

(a) To support, by fire, rifle units of their own companyor adjacent companies. Frequently the section is directedto follow a specified rifle unit, or a general route along aflank of the company, and occupy successive firing posi-tions to accomplish this mission.

(b) To protect the flanks of the company.(c) To cover the reorganization of the company.(d) To break up hostile counterattacks.

(2) The section leader, or platoon leader if he is control-ling the section, must be constantly in touch with the sit-uation on the nearest flank of the company and alert foropportunities to maneuver his squads to positions fromwhich oblique, flanking, or enfilade fire may be deliveredon enemy groups holding up the advance rifle units.

d. 60-mm mortar section. During the attack, the mis-sion of the section and squad leaders is to have their mor-tars in position with observation established so as to beable promptly and effectively to take under fire thosetargets assigned by the company commander or platoonleader. Squad leaders are particularly alert to engagetargets which are too close to friendly troops to permit theemployment of artillery or 81-mm mortars against them.

194. DISPLACEMENT. a. When the mission assigned canno longer be effectively accomplished from the initial fir-ing position, the section leader effects a displacement ofhis unit. The displacement must be regulated so as tocause as little interruption as possible in the continuity offire support. Sections may move forward as a unit duringa lull in the fighting or when continuous support is notrequired. When the leading rifle echelon is in motion orwhen continuous fire support is required for other rea-sons, displacement is by squad echelon. Squads remainingin position take over the fire missions of those movingforward. Planning ahead for displacement begins as soonas squads occupy initial firing positions and are ready tofire. When advancing by squad echelon the section orplatoon leader, followed by the first echelon, goes forwardto select the new positions. He prescribes the time the rearechelon will displace, or he may signal it forward. Whenthe section or platoon advances as a unit, the leader, ac-companied by a messenger, moves forward to reconnoiterthe new positions. After locating the general position area,he selects a cover position nearby, and by signals or mes-senger directs the squads or sections to move to the coverposition. Squad leaders conduct their squads to the desig-nated point. In moving forward all squads make use ofavailable cover, concealment and defiladed routes.

b. When detached from his section, a squad leader ad-vances his squad to new positions when the progress of theattack makes it impossible to continue firing on the as-signed mission or sector from the old position. Forwarddisplacement must be made aggressively, the squad fre-quently moving close behind or on the flank of the leadingechelon of a rifle platoon.

195. SUPPORTING FIRES DURING ASSAULT. When theadvance of the assaulting echelon of the company maskstheir supporting fires, sections shift fires as follows:

a. Light machine guns, to hostile elements on the flanks

210

of the position being assaulted, in order to neutralize theircross fires on the assaulting riflemen. Squad leaders shiftfires on their own initiative, if not ordered to do so by thesection leader.

b. 60-mm mortars, to suitable targets in adjacent orrearward hostile positions which open fire on the assault'ing riflemen. (See par. 179b.)

196. REORGANIZATION. a. As soon as a hostile positionis captured or the attack is halted for any reason, the com-pany commander or platoon leader directs section leadersto positions from which their weapons can protect thefront and flanks of the leading rifle platoons against coun-terattack during reorganization. In the absence of orders,section leaders take prompt action to insure this protec-tion.

b. Section leaders replace squad leaders and key menwho have become casualties and report their strength andammunition requirements to the platoon leader, or, ifdetached from the platoon to the company commander.Reconnaissance for positions to support a resumption ofthe attack is commenced promptly by the platoon andsections leaders.

197. NIGHT EMPLOYMENT. a. Under conditions of re-duced visibility the effectiveness of the light machine gunand 60-mm mortar as weapons of opportunity is corre-spondingly reduced. At night they are seldom employedexcept in the execution of prearranged fires.

b. The light machine guns and 60-mm mortars are notordinarily employed for protective fires during a nightattack. (See par. 38.) Sections move to the objective asdirected by the company commander. During darkness,approximate position areas are located. Section leadersshould be prepared to select and prepare the actual firingpositions quickly in the semidaylight available at dawn.

SECTION IIIDEFENSE

198. GENERAL. a. Light machine guns. (1) In order tocoordinate their action with the battalion plan of defen-sive fires, the battalion order assigns the locations, sectorsof fire and final protective line of the light machine gunsplaced in close support of the main line of resistance; andthe locations and missions for light machine guns locatedin the rear of the main line of resistance. The commanderof the heavy weapons company may be charged by thebattalion commander with the coordination of the lightmachine guns with the heavy machine guns. A reservecompany's light machine guns initially emplaced in rearof the main line of resistance are released to the companywhen it is ordered to counterattack.(2) Whenever practicable, the light machine guns are em-placed within their company defense areas for the execu-tion of their missions.(3) The orders to the light machine-gun section include

the limits of its assigned sector of fire; the direction of thefinal protective line, if the section is covering a part of themain line of resistance; when to open or withhold fire;and other instructions necessary to meet any probableenemy action.

b. 60-mm mortars. (1) The mission of 60-mm mortarsof a front-line rifle company in defense is to fill with firesmall gaps in the final protective lines of the machineguns not covered by 81-mm mortar artillery, or other fires,and to place fires in defiladed areas in front of the positionto break up the hostile attack before it reaches the battleposition. When the enemy penetrates a portion of themain line of resistance, the 60-mm mortars fire on enemyforces trying to deepen or widen the gap and also fire insupport of friendly counterattacks.

212

(2) Whenever observation can be obtained over the frontand flanks of the company area from a single locality, allmortars are emplaced so that fires can be conducted bycentralized control. When necessary because of lack ofsuitable observation or positions from which the wholecompany sector can be covered, squads are attached to rifleplatoons. The company commander's order for the de-fense designates the mortar units to be attached to rifleplatoons and those that are to be held under companycontrol. When a mortar squad is attached to a rifle pla-toon, the rifle platoon leader directs its action. However,primary target areas (final protective fires) are assignedthe squads by the company commander and take prece-dence over other fires.(3) The 60-mm mortars of the reserve company may be

used initially in close support of the main line of resist-ance, provided they can be made available to the reservecompany when that company is committed. W\hen thereserve company occupies a prepared position the 60-mmmortars are attached to rifle platoons or held tnder com-pany control as for a front-line company. When the re-serve company counterattacks, the 60-mm mortars are employed as in attack.

c. Rocket launchers. For employment of rocket launch-ers by the commander of a frontline rifle company, seeparagraph 74e. The commander of the reserve companyemploys his rocket launchers to cover the most likely ave-nues of mechanized approach to the area occupied by hiscompany. (See pars. 86a and b, and 92.)

199. RECONNAISSANCE. Section leaders precede theirsections to position areas to receive the platoon leader'sorder. They reconnoiter for and select firing positionsbefore issuing their orders.

200. SELECTION OF FIRING POSITIONS. a. General. Inthe defense, primary and alternate firing positions are pre-

pared for light machine guns and 60-mm mortars. Supple-mentary firing positions are prepared as required. (Seepar. 4a.)

b. Light machine guns. (1) The mission assigned thesquad governs the selection of firing positions. Other fac-tors in selecting a position are:

(a) Safety for gun and personnel (cover and conceal-ment).

(b) Routes of approach for the occupation of the posi-tion and for the supply of the position after occupation.

(c) Availability of one or more alternate positions.(2) Missions for light machine guns located in the rearpart of the battalion area include limiting likely penetra-tions, fire into forward platoon defense areas should thesebe captured by the enemy, and flank protection of the bat-talion. Supplementary positions usually will be required.

c. 60-mm mortars. Firing positions selected for the mor-tars must -(1) Be defiladed from hostile view.(2) Permit the accomplishment of the assigned missions.(3) Provide observation close to the mortar position. The

mortar should be emplaced within approximately 100yards of the observer. The firing positions should be wellforward and included in or be directly protected by therifle platoon defense areas. Ammunition bearers armedwith carbines afford close protection. The mortar observeris located within easy signaling distance of the companycommander or platoon leader, depending upon which iscontrolling the fire. If attached to a rifle platoon, the ob-server's position is near the rifle platoon leader.

201. SECTORS OF FIRE AND TARGET AREAS. a. The twolight machine-gun squads are usually employed by sectionand assigned the same sector of fire. Both guns are sited tofire as nearly as possible on the same final protective line.In a defense in woods it may be necessary to employ theguns singly in order to avoid clearing obvious fire lanes.

214

b. Each 60-mm mortar squad is assigned a sector of fire,one primary target area, and any number of secondarytarget areas. The company commander assigns primarytarget areas. The weapons platoon leader assigned second-ary target areas and sectors of fire in accordance with thecompany plan of defense. Rifle platoon leaders assignthese for mortar squads attached to their platoons. Targetareas should not exceed approximately 50 by 50 yards.Mortar squads attached to rifle platoons include in theirsectors of fire the frontage of the rifle platoon.

202. ORDERS. a. Orders of the platoon or section leadersmay include -(1) Essential information of the enemy.(2) Location of the main line of resistance and security

forces.(3) Primary and alternate firing positions.(4) Sectors of fire. Also final protective lines for lightmachine guns on the main line of resistance, and primaryand secondary target areas for all mortars.(5) Supplementary firing positions (if any) and missionsto be fired.(6) Organization of the ground, including type of em-

placements and accessory defenses to be constructed.(7) Instructions concerning ammunition supply.(8). Instructions for opening fires.(9) Instructions for final protective fires (fires on final

protective lines and on primary target areas) to include -signal for this fire, location from which signal will begiven, and rates and duration of fire.(10) Location of battalion aid station.(11) Location of company and platoon command posts

and of section leaders.b. The squad leader bases his orders on those of the sec-

tion or platoon leader. He indicates the exact spot onwhich the gun or mortar is to be mounted and directsclearing of fields of fire and the preparation and camou-

flage of primary, alternate, and supplementary firingpositions.

203. OCCUPATION AND ORGANIZATION OF FIRINGPOSITIONS. a. Arrival at position. Upon arrival at the fir-ing position each light machine gun and mortar is mount-ed concealed, and camouflaged in an emergency firingposition prepared to open fire at once and to cover itsassigned sector of fire.

b. Light machine-gun section. (1) Work is begun onprimary emplacements, clearing fields of fire, and distrib-uting ammunition to the firing positions. (See par. 181a(1).) The two guns should be placed at least 30 yardsapart. When the necessary clearing for the primary posi-tion is completed, similar work is commenced on alternateemplacements. Supplementary emplacements are next inpriority.(2) Natural cover, drainage lines, ditches and other defi-lade are used for communication and movement to alter-nate and supplementary positions. Dummy positions arecoordinated with those of the rifle units located in thearea.(3) Range cards are prepared by squad leaders for eachfiring position. Preparations are made to lay the guns andfire on final protective lines both from primary and al-ternate firing positions.(4) For details of defensive works, see appendix I; for

preparation of range cards, see FM 23-45.c. 60-mm mortar section. (1) As soon as the mortars

are mounted in temporary positions, the actual positionsare constructed, camouflaged, and stocked with ammuni-tion; the mortars are mounted in these positions. (See par.181b and app. I.) The primary mortar position and theobservation post are first constructed and then shelter forthe ammunition bearers. Alternate positions are con-structed in a similar manner. The alternate positionshould be sufficiently far from the primary position to be

out of the zone of fire directed at the primary position(usually about 50 to 100 yards) and have a covered routeof movement to it. Supplementary positions are also pre-pared as necessary.(2) Firing data are recorded by each squad leader as de-

scribed in FM 23-85; one copy of each range card is fur-nished the officer directing the fire. For coordination ofdefensive fires, see paragraphs 74d and 75. The weaponsplatoon leader prepares and furnishes the company com-mander with a sketch showing the prepared mortar fires.(See fig. 22.)

d. Camouflage. Camouflage is executed concurrentlywith the construction of the defensive works. Spoil notused in parapets is disposed of as soon as dug. Parapets aretramped down and sodded as fast as they are finished. Themaking of new paths ending at installations is avoided.

204. STORAGE OF AMMUNITION AT FIRING POSITION.Ammunition placed at light machine gun, 60-mm mortar,and rocket launcher emplacements in a defensive situa-tion should be protected in ammunition shelters con-structed at or near the emplacements. Ammunition shel-ters may be provided by extending the emplacement toeither side and roofing the top of the ditch with light logsand earth, suitably camouflaged, or by tunneling out toprovide storage space. The floor of the ammunition shel-ter should be slightly higher than the floor of the emplace-ment and sloping to provide drainage. The essentialrequirements for ammunition are that it be convenientfor the gun crew, and be kept dry and concealed.

205. POSITION OF LEADERS. a. Platoon. The platoonleader takes position where he can best observe and con-trol the units of the platoon under his control. His posi-tion should permit easy communication with the companycommander.

217

b. Section. During combat, section leaders select a posi-tion from which they can best observe the sector of fireassigned the section and control the actions of theirsquads. The light machine-gun section leader directs andcontrols fire and gives specific orders as to when the gunsshould switch to final protective fires. When two or moremortars are grouped together the 60-mm mortar sectionleader usually remains with this group.

Figure 22. Prepared mortar fires

c. Squad. (1) Each light machine-gun squad leader sta-tions himself close to and in rear of the gun position. Hesupervises the actions of the gun crew and ammunitioncarriers. He observes the fire for effect and directs adjust-ment,

(2) In combat the mortar squad leader is the observer. Helocates his observation post near, or within easy signalingdistance of, the commander controlling the fire of hismortar.

206. CONDUCT OF THE DEFENSE. a. Light machine-gunsection. (1) Fires of all guns on the main line of resistanceare withheld until the enemy is within 500 yards. As theenemy attack advances, the light machine-gun section en-gages any suitable targets in its sector of fire. Individualscouts preceding the hostile attack are not remunerativemachine-gun targets. As the enemy closes with the position,guns are fired on their final protective lines. Final protec-tive fires may be released upon pyrotechnic signals sent upby front-line commanders or upon orders of higher com-manders. Whenever the guns are not firing they are laidon their final protective line.

(2) When final protective fires are called for from thefront line, only those machine guns open fire whose finalprotective lines protect the unit calling for such fire.

(a) When visibility is good the section leader determinesthe rate and duration of fire on final protective lines.

(b) Under conditions of reduced visibility, the com-pany order may specify the rate and duration of fire. Inthe absence of instructions, the usual section rate is 125rounds per minute for two minutes and then 60 roundsper minute until ordered to cease fire. The latter rate offire is maintained by firing single shots.

(3) Light machine guns (usually those of the reserve com-pany) located in the rear part of the battalion defense

area are assigned the missions of stopping any hostile ele-ments which succeed in breaking through the main lineof resistance, stopping a hostile envelopment, or support.ing counterattacks.(4) Because of certain limitations of mount and gun, the

light machine guns are rarely employed for long-rangefires or for antiaircraft fires.(5) In event of a hostile penetration of a portion of the

main line of resistance, light machine guns fire on thehostile troops within their sectors of fire. They supportfriendly counterattacks in accordance with the plan ofattack developed by the company commander of the re-serve company. As the enemy is forced out of the salienthe is pursued by fire.(6) Leaders of the light machine-gun section and squads

observe the hostile approaches within assigned sectors,including flanks and rear. Once he appears, the enemy iskept under direct observation. The leaders strive to takethe enemy under the combination of surprise and enfiladeor flanking fire.

b. 60-mm mortar section. (1) When not firing on othertargets, mortars are laid to fire on their primary targetareas.(2) The fire plan includes conditions under which fires

are released; conditions for moving to supplementary posi-tions; conditions for firing on primary target areas, specialsignals for such fire, and location from which the signalwill be fired or given.(3) During periods of visibility the section (or squad)

leader determines the rate and duration of fire on primarytarget areas. Where final protective fires are called forduring periods of reduced visibility, only those mortarsopen fire whose primary target areas are in support of thearea calling for such fire. The company order may statethe rate and duration of fire under conditions of lowvisibility. In the absence of instructions the usual rate is

9 rounds per minute for two minutes and thereafter 6rounds per minute until ordered to cease fire.(4) When an ample ammunition supply is available at

the various positions, squad and section leaders may beauthorized to take favorable targets of opportunity underfire. Squads attached to rifle platoons will normally placefires on orders of the rifle platoon leader, except whenfiring on their primary target area; squads not so attachedreceive fire missions directly from the company com-mander or from the weapons platoon leader.(5) Except when firing on the primary target area, squadleaders are authorized to move to an alternate positionwhen the effects of hostile fire indicate that the move willinsure a more certain continuance of the fire mission.

c. Rocket launchers. The leader of a platoon to which arocket launcher is assigned (see par. 74e) will familiarizethe designated rocket team with pertinent details of thecompany fire plan, including signals for fires againstarmored vehicles and secondary targets (see par. 3f), pre-scribe the rate of fire, have range cards prepared, and in-sure ammunition supply.

207. AMMUNITION SUPPLY. For ammunition supply inthe defense, see paragraph 214e.

208. NIGHT EMPLOYMENT. a. (1) At night the light ma-chine guns of front-line rifle companies are laid on theirfinal protective lines. In case of a raid or night attack,machine gunners deliver final protective fires to break upthe assault.(2) Light machine guns of rear areas may be ordered to

occupy supplementary positions in close support of themain line of .resistance at night to cover probable enemyapproaches.

b. The mortar squad and section prepare and recordfire data during daylight. They fire for adjustment whenpermitted.

209. WITHDRAWAL. a. Night. In a night withdrawal onelight machine gun, one or two 60-mm mortars, and oneor more rocket launchers may be left in position with thecompany covering force. (See fig. 100 and (.) Only twomen stay with each weapon left with the covering force.It is desirable that carriers be available close by for ex-pediting the withdrawal of these personnel and weapons.The remainder of the weapons platoon withdraws withthe rifle company.

b. Daylight. (1) LIGHT MACHINE-GUN SECTION.(a) In a daylight withdrawal, the light machine guns areemployed by the company commander to cover the with-drawal of the company. When the company withdraws byplatoon the light machine-gun section may be withdrawnfirst to a position from which it can cover the gaps createdby the withdrawal of platoons. The section then with-draws under protection of rifle elements.

(b) When the company withdraws platoons simultan-eously by thinning from all platoons, the light machineguns initially may be held to cover the entire companyfront. They withdraw with the last of the rifle elementsfrom the forward position. The two gun squads withdrawsingly, one gun moving to a rear covering positionestablished by rifle elements of the company, the othergun remaining in place until the first gun is in the rearposition.

(c) Battalion supporting weapons in the rifle companyarea may be attached to the company for the withdrawal.The actions of the light machine guns are coordinatedwith any attached heavy machine guns.(2) 60-MM MORTAR SECTION. During a daylight

withdrawal, mortar squads usually are attached to rifleplatoons. They effect their withdrawal under the order ofthe rifle platoon leader. When employed as a section thewithdrawal is under the direction of the weapons platoonleader.

(3) ROCKET LAUNCHERS. Rocket launchers may beassigned to front-line platoons in a daylight withdrawalfor use against armored vehicles, crew-served weapons, orgrouped personnel. (See par. 3f.)

CHAPTER 8

ADMINISTRATION

SECTION ISUPPLY

210. REFERENCES. For definitions, fundamentals, andmethods relating to supply, see FM 100-10; for logisticaldata, see FM 101-10; for supply within the infantry regi-ment, see FM 7-30 and 740.

211. RESPONSIBILITY. Supply is a responsibility of comrnmand. This responsibility cannot be delegated. The com-pany is the basic unit with administrative functions. Thecompany commander is responsible for making timely re-quests for supplies and for distributing supplies receivedto the members of his company. He is also responsible forthe supply of attached units or personnel.

212. MEANS. a. Personnel. The administration group incompany headquarters consists of the following person-nel, whose duties and locations are as indicated.(1) MESS SERGEANT, COOKS, AND COOKS' HELP-ERS. The mess sergeant is responsible for checking therations and water issued the company, the division ofrations into meals, the supervision of the cooks and cooks'helpers in the preparation of meals, and the distributionof meals to the company. Usually he and his assistants arein the regimental train bivouac, working under the directsupervision of the service company commander.

224

(2) SUPPLY SERGEANT AND ARMORER-ARTI-FICER. The supply sergeant is responsible for checkingand distributing supplies, except rations and water. Hekeeps the company commander informed of the companyneeds. He also supervises the work of the armorer-artificer.During combat the supply sergeant will usually be in theforward area in order to assist the company commanderin matters relating to supply, particularly ammunitionsupply. The armorer-artificer will usually be in the trainbivouac where he assists in the procurement and distribu-tion of supplies, executes minor repairs on weapons, andperforms simple carpentry tasks.(3) COMPANY CLERK. The company clerk keeps thecompany records. As a member of the regimental person-nel section he is employed under the personnel officer. Inthe field the personnel section may be separated from theregiment, and operate and move with the rear echelonof the division or corps; otherwise, it operates in theregimental train bivouac.

b. Transportation. (1) The organic transportation ofthe rifle company consists of two i-ton trucks and twoMd-ton trailers, referred to as weapons carriers. (See par.6.) Ordinarily these vehicles are used to transport theweapons, ammunition, and certain personnel of theweapons platoon. Their employment in ammunitionsupply is discussed in paragraph 214.(2) Vehicles of the battalion section of the regimentalkitchen and baggage train are allotted to the companies.These vehicles carry organizational equipment, rations,water, and other impedimenta not carried on companytransport.(3) Initially the vehicles of the battalion section of the

regimental ammunition train carry loads of ammunitionin prescribed quantities for the subordinate units of thebattalion. For employmert of these vehicles in ammuni-tion supply see FM 7-30.

213. CLASS I, 11, III AND IV SUPPLY. For a discussion ofthe procurement and distribution of Class I, II, III andIV supplies, see FM 7-30.

214. CLASS V SUPPLY. a. General. Class V supplies in-clude ammunition, pyrotechnics, antitank mines, andchemicals. Ammunition for the rifle company is carriedon the individual soldier, company transport, and thebattalion section of the regimental ammunition train.

b. Battalion ammunition supply point. The battalionammunition supply point is located in the most advancedarea that is practicable. It is operated under the super-vision of the battalion supply officer by personnel of thebattalion ammunition and pioneer platoon. In the attack,it is advanced by bounds along a route of ammunitionadvance prescribed by the battalion commander.

c. Company ammunition supply point. The companyammunition supply is selected by the company command-er and is usually operated by the supply sergeant. Desir-able characteristics are:(1) Convenience to platoons.(2) Location at or in rear of the point where covered

routes to platoons diverge.(3) Defilade from hostile flat-trajectory fire.(4) Concealment from air and ground observation.(5) Ease of identification by friendly troops.(6) Facility of motor movement to the rear.

d. Offensive combat. (1) INITIAL SUPPLY. (a) Rifleplatoons. Prior to entry into combat, and usually in thebattalion assembly area, the vehicles of the battalion sec-tion of the regimental ammunition train are temporarilyreleased to company control for the issue of the com-pany share of ammunition carried thereon. (See par.212b (3).) The amount of extra ammunition issued to theindividual should be sufficient to enable him to initiateand sustain combat until replenishment can be effected.

After extra ammunition has been issued, the ammunitiontrain vehicles are returned immediately to the battalionammunition supply point.

(b) Weapons platoon. During route marches, the com-pany weapons carriers usually move by bounds in rearof the foot elements of the battalion or regiment. Priorto entry into combat the weapons carriers are releasedto the company and join the weapons platoon. As theplatoon moves forward to its attack positions, the weaponscarriers are conducted to off-carrier positions, as near tothe initial firing positions of the weapons as conditionspermit. There the weapons and an initial supply of am-munition are unloaded. The remaining ammunition isconsolidated on one weapons carrier, the other being sentthrough the company ammunition supply point to thebattalion ammunition supply point for refill.(2) REPLENISHMENT. (a) Responsibility.

1. The battalion commander is responsible for thedelivery of ammunition to the company am-munition supply point (s). Movement ofweapons carriers in rear of the company areais supervised, coordinated, and expedited bythe battalion motor officer.

2. The company commander is responsible formaking an adequate supply of ammunitionavailable to his platoons. He usually assignsthe supply sergeant to supervise the supply ofammunition.

3. The platoon leader (or leader of a weaponssection detached from platoon control) is re-sponsible for delivery of ammunition toweapons and individuals.

4. Platoon and subordinate leaders are responsiblefor keeping their next superior (or the com-mander of the unit to which attached) in-formed of the amount of ammunition onhand.

227

(b) Rifle platoons. Platoon leaders keep the companycommander informed of the status of ammunition in theirplatoons and notify him when they are confronted withan emergency ammunition requirement. Ordinarily re-plenishment of ammunition for rifle platoons in the at-tacking echelon can be effected only after the capture ofa terrain mask or after nightfall. Replenishment may bemade either by hand-carry or by weapons carrier.

(c) Weapons platoon. One loaded weapons carrier isretained as near the firing positions as practicable; ifsections are widely separated, a loaded vehicle may be re-tained near each section. Upon arrival in the'companyarea, the other loaded weapons carrier is echeloned to therear in a location providing cover and concealment. Assoon as a vehicle is emptied, it is replaced by a loadedvehicle, the empty one being dispatched through the com-pany ammunition supply point to the battalion ammuni.tion supply point for refill.

(d) Attached units. Ammunition supply of units at-tached to the rifle company is the responsibility of therifle company commander. He may either supply the at-tached unit by his own means, or may authorize the unitto secure its ammunition directly from the battalion am-munition supply point. He requires the leader of the at-tached unit to keep him informed of the status ofammunition.

e. Defensive combat. (1) INITIAL SUPPLY. The bat-talion commander will prescribe the amount of ammuni-tion to l:e unloaded within the company defense area.The minimum amount so prescribed should be sufficientto obviate resupply before darkness. Primary, alternate,and supplementary positions are stocked. Weapons car-riers, after stocking troop units, are refilled and assembledunder regimental or battalion control in rear of the battleposition.

(2) REPLENISHMENT. The responsibilities of the bat-talion and company commanders and platoon leaders forreplenishment are the same as for offensive combat. Aftercontact is made with the enemy, replenishment of am-munition within the company will usually be made undercover of darkness. Loaded weapons carriers are broughtforward to the company ammunition supply point. If cov-ered routes are available, the weapons carriers may movedirectly to the platoon defense areas. Loads are dumpedand distribution to gun positions is effected by hand-carry. When conditions prohibit movement of weaponscarriers forward of the company ammunition supplypoint, the loads must be dumped and ammunition dis-tributed by hand-carry from that point. Ordinarily, pla-toon leaders will be instructed to report, at or shortlybefore dark, the amounts of ammunition on hand. Basedon these reports the company commander plans and ef-fects resupply of ammunition.

215. ORDERS. a. Administrative matters in the companyorder may include such of the following items as areapplicable:(1) Location of company and battalion ammunition

supply points.(2) Route of advance of ammunition (in attack).(3) Amount of ammunition to be placed on position (indefense).(4) Disposition of company vehicles.(5) Location of battalion aid station.

b. Additional directions of an administrative naturemay be included in the order, or issued later in fragmen-tary form to those concerned. These directions may in-clude the plan for feeding, the detailing of guides, carry-ing parties, or other such matters.

229

SECTION II

MEDICAL SERVICE AND

EVACUATION

216. REFERENCES. For details of the composition andequipment of the medical detachment of the infantry regi-ment, see Tables of Organization and Equipment. Forgeneral mission, organization and functions of the head-quarters and battalion sections of the medical detachmentlee FM 7-30.

217. PERSONNEL AND DUTIES. The three Medical De-partment enlisted men serving with the rifle company areknown as company aid men. They are attached to thecompany when it is on the march, in bivouc, and in com-bat. Each of these men carries two pouches containingmedical equipment such as bandages, dressings, tourni-quets, etc. Their duties are:

a. To administer emergency treatment when needed.b. To maintain contact with the rifle company.c. To Instruct walking sick and wounded as to the route

.to and the exact location of the battalion aid station.d. To send information to their battalion surgeon by

litter bearer and walking wounded. Their messages givethe location of the company and the approximate numberand location of casualties in the company area.

e. To place all seriously wounded in defiladed locationsalong the axis of advance.

218. RELATION TO BATTALION MEDICAL SERVICE. Thecompany aid men are a part of the company aid groupof the battalion medical section. Litter bearers follow be-

hind the company aid men and carry seriously woundedto the battilion aid station.219. ORDERS. The company order should always includethe location of the battalion aid station. All members ofthe company should possess this information.

220. SANITATION. a. Sanitation is a function of com-mand. Unit commanders are responsible for the sanita-tion within their units and the areas their units occupy(see AR 40-205 and 40-210). Medical Department per-

sonnel act as advisers in the technical aspects of sanita-tion.

b. The company commander is responsible for the for-mation of an antimalaria detail to consist of a minimumof two enlisted men, including a noncommissioned officer.The detail will be made up of nonmedical personnel. Itwill be trained and function as outlined in War Depart.ment directives.

SECTION III

MOTOR MAINTENANCE

221. RESPONSIBILITY. a. The company commander is re-sponsible for the operation and maintenance of his ve-hicles. He is assisted in the performance of these duties bythe supply sergeant and the drivers. The most importantlink in the chain of vehicle operation and maintenance isthe driver. He is selected for his ability, judgment, and

e conscientious performance of duty. He is instructed in hisduties, the inspections required of him, and the mainte-nance operations that he is. required to perform. Theseoperations include servicing, lubrication, tightening,cleaning, care of tools, equipment, tires, and battery; and

emergency repairs, using tools available on the vehicle.By personal observation, and by frequent inspections, theconipany commander insures that these operations areaccomplished.

b. Vehicles requiring maintenance beyond the capabil-ities of personnel and equipment within the company arereported to the battalion commander. For echelons ofmaintenance, see FM 25-10.

CHAPTER 9

SIGNAL COMMUNICATION SYSTEM

222. REFERENCES. For methods of installing, operating,and maintaining the means of signal communication, seeFM 24-5. For details of signal communication methodswithin the infantry regiment, see FM 7-25.

223. PERSONNEL. a. The first sergeant, communicationsergeant, guides of the rifle platoons, platoon sergeant ofthe weapons platoon, bugler, and messengers have dutiespertaining to signal communication. For duties of per-sonnel, see paragraphs 11, 109c and d, and 177b and c.

b, Current Table of Organization and Equipment al-lots messengers to company headquarters, each rifle pla-toon, the weapons platoon, and each section of theweapons platoon.

c,. The bugler is included in communication personnelbecause of his employment in the air-antitank warningsystem and his frequent operation of a radio set in thecompany or battalion command nets.

224. EQUIPMENT. Signal equipment issued to the riflecompany includes low-powered radio-telephone sets,sound-powered telephone equipment, panels, and pyro-technic devices. For allotment of these items, see currentTable of Organization and Equipment.

225. EMPLOYMENT OF MEANS OF SIGNAL COMMUNI-CATION. a. Two sound-powered telephone sets (onechannel) may be employed to provide communicationbetween -(1) The company and battalion command posts, whendirected by the battalion commander.

233

(2) The company command and observation posts.(3) The company commander and -

(a) A platoon leader.(b) The light machine-gun section.(c) The mortar section.(d) A close-in reconnaissance or security detachment.(e) The company transport.

(4) Any two elements of the company.

b. Messengers are used for communication within thecompany and with the headquarters of battalion andother units when a more rapid means is not available.One messenger is sent to the battalion command post bythe company, and one messenger is sent by each platoonto the company command post when the company takesup a deployed formation. These messengers should berelieved frequently by others in order that the messengeron duty may be familiar with the location of his unit.Messengers should be trained to take brief notes whenreceiving oral messages and to deliver them promptly andcorrectly. Ordinarily only one simple oral message shouldbe given to a messenger at one time.

c. (1) The principal means of visual signaling in therifle company are arm'and-hand signals. These are em-ployed as described in FM 22-5.(2) Flashlights, flags, and pyrotechnics are used to send

only the simplest kinds of prearranged messages. Pyro-technic devices are used as an emergency means of com-munication to transmit signals prescribed in currentSignal Operation Instructions when no other communi-cation agency is available. The principal use of pyro-technic signals by front-line units (platoons or companies)is to call for prearranged supporting fires, to signal forthese fires to cease or shift, or to signal arrival at a certainpoint. They are also valuable to give warning of enemyapproach.

(3) Panel sets are issued for use by vehicles and by unitsof the company for identification to friendly aircraft.

d. Sound signals are employed primarily to give warn-ing of hostile air or mechanized attack. (See par. 12a andb.) They are also employed to give gas alarms. (See FM21-40.) The whistle is used by leaders to fix the attentionof their units preparatory to giving commands or signals.

226. ORDERS RELATIVE TO SIGNAL COMMUNICATION.Each field order issued by the company commander con-tains instructions for signal communication. Frequentlysuch instructions consist only of the location of the com-mander or his commind post. Other instructions relativeto signal communication may be issued in fragmentaryform and may include the use of pyrotechnic signals (inconformity with instructions of higher headquarters) orthe allotment or use of any of the signal communicationmeans available to the company.

227. RELATION OF BATTALION COMMUNICATION SYS-TEM. a. In attack, communication between the battalioncommand post and the rifle companies is by messenger.When sufficient means are available, the battalion com-mander may allot sound-powdered telephone equipmentor portable radio-telephones to front-line companies forcommunication with the battalion command post.

b. In the defense whenever practicable telephone com-munication is established between the battalion com-mand post and rifle companies.

c. When the rifle company or elements thereof are em-ployed on distant security or reconnaissance missions(e. g., patrols, outposts, and flank detachments) light,

portable radiotelephones are employed, when practic-able, for communication between such detachment andthe commander who sends it out. Radio equipment forunits on these missions is provided by the battalion com-munication section.

APPENDIX i

INDIVIDUAL PROTECTION

I. GENERAL. It must become a habit of all soldiers to seekindividual protection when halted. When the halt is ex-pected to be brief, troops take advantage of natural pro-tection afforded by the terrain, such as ditches or holesin the ground. Whenever the situation becomes stabilizedtemporarily, they dig intrenchments for their individualprotection and emplacements for the protection of theirweapons. Intrenchmernts and weapon emplacements arelocated so as to cover a selected area with fire and, at thesame time, provide maximum concealment and protec-tion from air and ground observation and fire. In orderto confuse the enemy, judicious use must be made ofdecoys or dummy positions.

2. FOXHOLES. a. Use. The foxhole is the intrenchmentnormally dug for individual protection when contactwith the enemy is imminent or in progress. Foxholes pro-vide excellent protection from small-arms fire, artilleryshell fragments, airplane fire or bombing, and the crush-ing action of tanks. Foxholes at intermediate stages ofconstruction afford limited protection depending uponthe depths to which the excavation has progressed. Insome situations where the need for rest is paramount,commanders may permit soldiers to cease excavation be-fore full depth has been reached. For units within thebattle position, foxholes are sited with the longer sidegenerally parallel to the front, but they are distributedaround weapon emplacements to provide for all-arounddefense. Troops remain in their foxholes only when anattack is imminent or in progress. The one-man and thetwo-man foxholes are basic types. Often both are em-

ployed in a given situation. If a choice of type is notmade by higher authority, it is made by the squad leader.

ELBOW REST

r 5 FPENOING ONGHT OF MAAN

ENEMY

SPOIL FROM EXCAVATIONUSED TO CONSTRUCT ALL-AROUND PARAPET..

PLAN

Figure 23. One-man foxhole

b. One-man foxhole. (fig. 23). (1) Considerations af-fecting the size and shape of the foxhole are as follows:

(a) It is as small as practicable in order to present theminimum target to enemy fire.

(b) It is wide enough to accommodate the shoulders ofa man sitting on the fire step.

(c) It is elongated to the extent necessary to permit theuse of large size intrenching tools in digging it.

(d) Its depth from the surface of the ground to the firestep depends*upon the height of the man who is to occupyit, but under no circumstances is it less than 4 feet. Itshould permit him to fire his rifle or other weapons whilestanding on the fire step.

(e) Additional depth for a sump is dug in one end toprovide for collecting water so that it may be bailed outand to provide space for the occupant's feet so that hemay sit comfortably and have adequate clearance. Anadditional benefit derived from the sump is that a soldiercrouched in the foxhole with his feet in the sump is ableto push himself up through debris thrown on top of himby the crushing action of a tank.(2) In most types of soil the foxhole as thus constructed

gives positive protection against the crushing action oftanks which pass directly over it in any direction, pro-vided that the soldier crouches down in the hole so thatthere is a 2-foot clearance between him and the groundsurface (see fig. 24). If the soil is very sandy or very soft,it may be necessary to revet the sides of foxholes to pre-vent caving. The spoil excavated from the foxhole is piledall around the hole as a parapet, leaving a shelf wideenough for the soldier to rest his elbows upon while firinghis weapon. It should be spread low, so that the parapetis at least 3 feet thick in order to provide protectionagainst small-arms fire. An all-around parapet made ofthe spoil excavated from the foxhole will be approxi-mately 1/2-foot high. If turf or topsoil is to be used to

camouflage this parapet the soldier must, before com-mencing to dig, skim off the topsoil over an area 10 feetsquare and set the material aside for later use. Upon com-pletion of the foxhole, he places this camouflage materialover the spoil in a manner to imitate the surroundingground.

MINIMUM 2 FEET CLEARANCEREQUIRED TO PROTECT AGAINST

TANK TRACKS

Figure 24. One-man foxhole protects against tanks.

c. Foxhole with camouflage cover (fig. 25.) In some sit-uations, it may be practicable for the soldier to removethe spoil entirely to an inconspicuous place and to im-provise a camouflage cover for his foxhole. In this manner,a foxhole position may be rendered practically invisiblefrom either aerial or terrestrial observation. (See fig. 25.)This manner of camouflaging a foxhole position finds

special application in defense against a mechanized attacksupported by foot soldiers. Individual riflemen occupyingfoxholes remain concealed until the tanks have overrunthe position whereupon they rise up in the foxholes andcombat the enemy foot soldiers following the tanks.

'i

ONE-MANFOXHOLE

Figure 25. One-man foxhole with camouflage cover

d. Two-man foxhole (figs. 26 and 27). The two-manfoxhole is essentially two one-man foxholes dug adjacent-ly. It is used when the mission requires men to work inpairs or when, for psychological reasons, battlefield com-radeship is desirable. The two-man foxhole, in most typesof soil, gives protection comparable to that afforded bythe one-man foxhole except that it provides somewhatless protection against the crushing action of a tank's

240

GROUND\ELBOW REST

SECTION

Figure 26. Two-man foxhole

treads applied longitudinally, and slightly less protectionagainst airplane strafing and bombing and artillery shellfragments. Figure 27 shows a two-man foxhole revettedin soft or sandy soil.

-4

Figure 27. Revetment of two-man foxhole

3. INDIVIDUAL PRONE SHELTER (fig. 28). The foxhole asdescribed above is an indispensable individual protec-tion, which must be constructed in all combat situationswhere time and terrain conditions permit. The diggingof prone shelters in forward areas will seldom be justified.They may be authorized for use in rear areas when thedanger from ground attack is remote or when the warningservice will insure the availability of sufficient time toconstruct foxholes. The prone shelter, being shallow,does not provide protection against the crushing actionof tanks and is not suitable as a place from which to firea weapon. Soldiers lying in prone shelters offer a largertarget than when in foxholes. The prone shelter givessome protection against bombardment by hostile aviationand against artillery and small-arms fire.

4. CONNECTING TRENCHES (fig. 29). Foxholes furnishthe best hastily constructed individual shelter. They are

inconspicuous from the air. Siting and digging them isone of the first steps in fortifying a defensive position.To connect the foxholes by means of trenches will re-duce the protection afforded the individual. Connectingtrenches are conspicuous as viewed from the air or uponaerial photographs and thus reveal the defensive disposi-tions. Continuous trenches will not be dug as a normalprocedure. When two forces are in contact and disposi-tions have been revealed beyond any question, a few short

Figure 28. Prone shelter (not a fire trench)

trenches may be dug in inconspicuous places to permitnecessary daylight movement across exposed areas. Neces-sary connecting trenches may also be dug in close country,such as jungle, where disclosure of the position will prob-ably not result. They may be dug under conditions wheretheir value in facilitating control, communications, andsupply outweighs the possible sacrifice of concealment.

5. OBSERVATION POSTS. When observers are located inexposed positions, they should be well protected and con-cealed.

a. Both the one-man foxhole, with and without camou-flaged cover (figs. 23 and 25) and the two-man foxhole(fig. 26) are suitable for use as observation posts.

GROUNDLINE \ L 3.

SPOIL REMOVED

GROUND

PARAPET

SPOIL USED FOR PARAPETFigure 29.' Shallow connecting trench

b. The covered observation post (fig. 30), although anexcellent type, takes considerable time to build. Theoverhead cover provides splinterproof protection only.It is valuable only when well concealed. It requires 21cubic feet of excavation per foot of length or a total of105 cubic feet per 5-foot section.

6. LAY-OUT OF DEFENSIVE POSITIONS. Figure 31 illus-trates the lay-out of a squad defensive position, and figure32 the lay-out of a platoon in hasty defense. The terraingreatly influences the lay-outs, open terrain permits widedispersion, close terrain calls for shorter distances be-

244

~w,

r A

~E, ~-IN G

Figure 30. Covered observation post

A

4 7,

x

4Z

AD

0

245

tween individuals and squads. Troops are disposed insuch a manner that each squad within itself and the pla-toon as a whole are capable of all-around defense. Thisis accomplished by the organization of supplementarypositions from which fire can be directed to the extremeflanks or rear. First priority is given to the intrenchmentof the primary position. Time permitting, additional ex-cavation is done in the supplementary positions. Riflemenand automatic riflemen, squad leaders, and platoon head-quarters personnel are all given protection by the con-struction of one-man or two-man foxholes. The leaderwill determine the type to be constructed. To preventdiscovery of the dispositions by the enemy, the foxholesare irregularly dispersed and care is taken to camouflagethem. Care is also taken to avoid making telltale path-ways or clearing fields of fire in a manner that mightbetray the location of the position. Deception can beattained by the construction of dummy positions. Tominimize the effects of hostile bombardment, foxholesusually are spaced from 5 to 15 yards apart. The foxholeof the squad leader should be cited close enough to thesquad to permit him to issue oral fire orders during thebattle. Positions of the squad and platoon leaders mustbe so related, generally, as to permit communication bydefiladed routes or by voice or arm-and-hand signals.Clearing of the field of fire is commenced early and iscarried out so that each weapon 'can accomplish its as-signed fire mission. This includes the removal of brush,tall grass, and low-hanging limbs of trees which restrictobservation. Large trees are left standing because theyprovide concealment and obstruct the fire less in this posi-tion than if they were cut down and not removed.

7. EMPLACEMENT FOR CALIBER .30 LIGHT MACHINEGUN. There are two types of emplacements for this gun:horseshoe type and two-foxhole type.

246

ENEMY

ALTERNATE BARTEAM POSITION --

SUPPtEMENTARYBAR TEAMPOSITION

· PRIMARY POSITION ;

E ALTERNATE BAR POSITION

O SUPPLEMENTARY POSITIONSFigure 31. Arrangement of foxholes in a

schematic diagramsquad defense area-

a. Horseshoe type (figs. 33 and 34). The initial stage inthe development of this emplacement is the excavationof an open shallow pit. The gun is placed in firing posi-tion ready for immediate action and the crew excavatethe emplacement from the prone position if they areexposed to hostile fire. The gun is lowered first by ex-cavating beneath it. Then the area for the crew is ex-cavated about 2 foot below the ground level and the

247

PRIMARY-- BAR TEAM

POSITION

Figure 32. Rifle platoon in hasty defense -perspective view

243

spoil is piled around to make a parapet. The emplace-ment is completed by the construction of a gun platformabout /2 foot below the ground level, large enough togive firm support to the tripod, and a horseshoe-shapedtrench along the rear and sides of the gun platform forthe gunner and his assistant. The platform should beabout chest high. The trench is about 2 feet wide. Thespoil is piled completely around the emplacement to forma parapet at least 3 feet thick, care being taken not tomake the parapet so high as to interfere with the fire ofthe gun in any direction. This emplacement furnishesprotection against small-arms fire and shell or bombfragments. In firm soil, tanks may pass over this type ofemplacement without destroying the emplacement, theweapon, or the occupants. In loose soil, logs about 8inches in diameter placed across front, rear, and sides ofthe emplacement and embedded flush with the top of theground help to make the emplacement resistant to thecrushing action of tanks. When tanks appear about tooverrun the position, the gunner and the assistant gunnerremove the weapon from the platform to the bottom ofthe trench at the rear of the emplacement and theycrouch down in the trench. When the tanks have passed,the gun is quickly restored to its firing position on theplatform.

b. Two-foxhole type (fig. 35). This emplacement con-sists of two one-man foxholes close to the gun position.To lay it out, a short mark is scratched on the groundin the principal direction of fire, that is, pointing approx-imately along the middle of the sector of fire assignedto the gun. On the right of this mark, a foxhole is dugfor the gunner. On the left of the mark and 2 feet to thefront, another foxhole is dug for the assistant gunner.The spoil is piled all around the position to form aparapet, care being taken not to pile it so high as to

249

W2 2 I -

FIt), l t

Si ., )i r

SECTION

I I

ABOU i rPT WIr

Li:.XEMY

CHECST HIGH

TRE .EH FT WIDE*R Wr

PLAN " '

Figure 33. Horseshoe type emplacement for the caliber .30gun (light)

250

I

block the fire of the weapon. In firm soil, the two-foxholetype provides protection for the crew and the weaponagainst the crushing action of tanks. When tanks appearabout to overrun the position, the gun is removed fromthe tripod and taken into one foxhole, the tripod into

aI

DEPTH ABOUT 2BELOW GROUND

Figure 34. Initial stage in horseshoe type emplacement for the caliber.30 machine gun (light or heavy)

251

42

ONE-MAN TYPEFigure 35g Two-f/oxhol type emplacement for caliber .30 machine252 gun (light)

the other. The gunner and assistant gunner crouch in theholes.

c. Choice of type. The two-foxhole type of emplacementand horseshoe type of emplacement are satisfactory forthe light machine gun. As a firing position, the two-fox-

LINE OF SIGHT TO AIMING STAKE,

PARAPET E NOTE: SPOIL PILEDALL AROUND AND

ABOUTT CAMOUFLAGED

i AASSISTANT GUNNER

I I FT.

PLANFigure 36. Open emplacement for the 60-mm mortar

.,1

hole type is a little less flexible than the horseshoe type,but it has the advantage of simplicity and is more tank-proof than the horseshoe type. Therefore, the two-foxholetype is generally preferred as the emplacement for thelight machine gun.

8. EMPLACEMENT FOR 60-MM MORTAR (figs. 36 and 37).This emplacement consists of a rectangular pit which islarge enough to accommodate the mortar, the gunner,and the assistant gunner. The emplacement is kept to theminimum size at ground level to afford protection againstairplane fire and bombing and against artillery shells,but it allows room for the manipulation of the mortarto fire and provides space for some ammunition. Addi-tional ammunition is placed in nearby shelters. Thefront edge is sloped so that the ahning stake, about 10yards in front of the emplacement, is visible through thesight and so as not to interfere with the trajectory of theshell. Foxholes for members of the mortar squad not re-quired at the mortar are prepared not far from the em-placement. The spoil from the excavation is piled allaround the pit to form a low parapet. Figure 37 shows

Figure 37. Two-foxhole type emplacement for the 60-mm mortar

254

the 60-mm mortar in action with only the base plate dugin and the crew operating from one-man foxholes nearthe weapon position. This two-foxhole type of emplace-ment is preferred when the mortar is located in a de-filaded position.

9. ROCKET LAUNCHER. There are two types of emplace-ment for this weapon: pit-foxhole and pit type.

a. Pit-foxhole type (fig. 38). This emplacement is acircular pit, 3 feet in diameter and about 31/2 feet deep.It is large enough for two men. It permits the-assistantrocket gunner to rotate as the rocket gunner traversesthe weapon in order that he will never be in rear of theweapon when it is fired. Its depth is such that the rear

PERSPECTIVE VIEW

PLAN

Figure 38. Pit-foxhole type emplacement for the rocket team

255

end of the rocket launcher at maximum elevation in anydirection will be clear of the parapet in order that theback blast from the rockets shall not be deflected into theemplacement and burn the occupants. Except in firmsoil, the latter requirement can be met only by an em-placement which is too shallow to give protection againstthe crushing action of tanks. Therefore, the foxholes forthe rocket gunner and assistant rocket gunner are dugnearby. As the antitank mission of this weapon requiresthat it be kept in action against hostile tanks until thelast possible moment, these foxholes will be occupied onlyas a last resort when a tank is about to overrun the em-placement.

b. Pit type (fig. 39). In firm soil, the circular pit (fig.38) can be enlarged from 3 feet to 4 feet in diameter withan additional circular pit 2 feet deep and 2 feet in dia-meter excavated in the center. This results in a circularfire step 1 foot wide and about 31/2 feet below the surface.When tanks appear about to overrun the position, therocket gunner and assistant crouch down into the lowerpit. When the tanks have passed, the rocket launcher isquickly returned to action.

10. CAMOUFLAGE. a. Concealment is of prime impor-tance in locating defensive works. Measures for conceal-ment from aerial observation must be planned from thebeginning and carried on continuously throughout thework. Over both the area to be excavated and that onwhich spoil is to be piled to form a parapet, all turf, sod,leaves, or forest humus (if present) is removed carefully,set aside, and replaced over the spoil when finally com-pleted.

b. For the area to be camouflaged in the constructionof each type of intrenchment described in this appendix,.see paragraph 14 below.

c. In order to prevent discovery of the work during the

256

PLAN.OI.L

nEMOVED

SECTION

Figure 39. Pit type emplacement for the rocket team257

process of excavation, available camouflage nets sus-pended from stakes or trees should be erected before anyexcavation is undertaken and the workers should confinetheir activities to the area beneath the camouflage net.The net is suspended at such a height above the groundas to permit the workers to excavate the emplacementwithout snagging equipment or intrenching tools on thenet. After the excavation has been completed and thespoil covered with sod or other natural camouflage mate-rial, the net should be lowered close to the ground so asto be inconspicuous from ground observation, Nets arekept in position so as to conceal the emplacement whenthe weapon is not being fired. Arlangemenrts must bemade to lift or withdraw the camouflage net during ac-tion in order not to interfere with the tactical employ-ment of the weapon.

d. In the interest of clarity, camouflage nets have beenomitted in the figures shown herein and the effect ofnatural camouflage materials has been subordinated soas to permit the details of construction to be easily seen.

e. For a more complete discussion of camouflage, seeFM 5-20.

11. DISPOSAL OF SPOIL. The concealment of excavationis facilitated by the complete removal of spoil from thesite, if this is practical. When this is done, the excavationmust be made somewhat deeper in order to obtain thesame protection that is given when the spoil is used toconstruct a parapet. In disposing of spoil, care must betaken not to create paths or vehicle tracks which mightdisclose the position, and the spoil must be dumped ininconspicuous locations such as, at the base of trees, alongnatural drainage ditches, or along hedge rows.

12. DRAINAGE. Provision must be made for taking careof rain water, surface drainage, and seepage. In general,

a shallow ditch a few inches deep around the excavationwill carry off surface water. Water which falls into anexcavation or seeps in through the ground must be re-moved by bailing.

13. REVETMENTS (fig. 27). Revetment may be necessary insoft or sandy soil to prevent caving. It may consist oflumber, wire netting, small oranches, brush, sandbagsfilled with earth, or other available materials. The dimen-sions of the excavation will have to be modified slightlyto provide for the space occupied by the revetment.

14. ESTIMATE OF EXCAVATION. The following tablegives estimates of the quantity of excavation and the man-hours required to construct the emplacements describedin this appendix. Attention is especially invited to theover-all dimensions of the area which must be camou-flaged inl order to conceal each type of intrenchment.

Man-hoursType of Area to be to n.Wearaypemof Aen a to t e F xtion cubic struct in\\eap emplacement camouflaged feet medium

soil

Rifle Foxlole lOx 10 ft. 37 IAutomatic Foxhole 10x 10 ft. 37 1 /2

rifleCal. .30 Horseshoe 15 x 15 ft. 123 7

machine gun;light

Two-foxhole 12 x 12 ft. 7 1 360-nmln mortar Pit 14 x 14 ft. 70 4

Rocket Pit-foxhole x 10 x 0 ft. 25 with. Ilauncher out

fox-holes

87 with 4w1ifox-holes

Pit 5 x 5 ft. 50 3

2159

APPENDIX IIDIRECTIVES FOR TACTICAL

TRAINING OF RIFLE COMPANY

1. GENERAL. a. The directives which follow are designedto assist company officers and others in the preparationand conduct of field exercises and maneuvers in whichrifle companies will participate as a part of their fieldtraining. The directives cover most of the actions inwhich a rifle company will be involved during its ap-proach to the battlefield and during combat. They areto he considered as guides only and may be expanded ormodified as local situations and the particular needs ofindividual units may warrant. A rifle company, however,will not be considered as being fully trained prior to itsparticipation in exercises covering all phases of each typeof operation outlined in the directives.

b. In addition to serving as guides for the tactical train-ing of units, the directives cover essential points thatshould be covered by superior commanders in testing thetactical efficiency of rifle companies.

2. PREPARATION. For a general discussion of the prepa-ration of field exercises and field maneuvers, see FM 21-5and TF 7-295. The directives in this appendix show thedefinite phases of combat to be covered in each exercise.

3. CONDUCT. a. For the control and conduct of field ex-ercises and maneuvers, see FM 21-5. The unit should beallowed to solve the problem as it sees fit. The officer con-ducting the exercises should have in mind solutions tothe various situations that will confront the unit, but hedoes not force the unlit or any parts of it to follow his

preconcevied notions as to what actions should be taken.Umpires may assess penalties or inject events which willserve to cause the units to act in a suitable manner shouldthe need arise. These control measures, however, must belogical and appropriate.

b. For the responsibilities, duties and conduct of um-pires see FM 105-5.

c. Information transmitted by an umpire must ordinar-ily be so expressed as to give the commanders full libertyin determining their actions.(1) The following are examples of correctly phrased in-

formation, applicable particularly to one-sided small unitexercises:

"For the last 2 minutes this unit has been subjected toheavy fire from a machine gun located op that hill (point-ing)." (Designates several casualties and indicates thetype of wounds.)

"Over there near the bridge - four shell impacts closetogether - four more shell impacts - another four."

"Artillery fire, apparently from the direction of thatvillage, is falling in those woods" (points out the woods).

"A shell strikes 300 yards in front of you." Two minuteslater: "Shell coming; impact 100 yards behind you."

As soon as the rifle platoon attacks: "Continuous ma-chine-gun fire from direction of large house; fire fromfour guns striking all around us." As soon as platoon isunder full cover: "Machine guns silent."

"Machine-gun fire sweeping directly over you." "Ma-chine-gun fire striking right in front of you; No. 2 rifle-man nicked in shoulder by ricochet; No. 1 rifleman shotin stomach."

"Enemy attack plane, flying low, approaching fromright front, fires at column, and disappears to the rear."

"Airplane motor can be heard." "One airplane to thesouth. Too high to identify."

"You see drops of oily liquid on the grass."

261

"You notice an. unfamiliar chemical odor.""A shell fragment smashes the longitudinal spirit-level

of your mortar.""You have only 50 rounds left in your belt.""Our own machine guns fire continuously over you to

the left. These guns are apparently behind you."(Aside to squad leader during hostile machine-gun

fire.)"You have been hit--you are unconscious." (How

does the squad react?)"Our own artillery fire is now falling along the edges

of the woods over there.""Heavy machine-gun fire is heard on your right." "You

see the impact throwing up dirt near the hostile machine-gun nests which have been holding up your advance."

(2) Examples of improperly phrased information are asfollows:

"You are unable to advance any farther at this point.""You must withdraw here."Vague exclamation: "Shells are falling here," instead of

information as to type of shells, area of impact, and dura-tion of fire. Intensity, area, and time limits should begiven.

Shouting: "Enemy withdrawing," instead of: "No. Irifleman, you see a hostile soldier running toward rear* ' , etc."

Shouting: "Gas" instead of: "You smell mustard."Permitting troops to halt and remain inactive without

giving them information.

(3) The information is properly given only when the um-pire describes the effect of weapons or enemy maneuverand permits the leader concerned to make his own de-cision.

(4) Full use should be made of noncommissioned officersas umpires.

262

4. CRITIQUE. For a discussion of the critique which is al-ways a part of each exercise see FM 21-5. Critiques maybe held at any stage of an exercise. The chief umpire andhis assistants should make notes for use at the critique heldon the ground at the conclusion of the exercise.

5. CONDITIONS. Ample time will be given each unit tosolve its problems logically. Reconnaissances must bemade, subordinate leaders assembled when suitable, andorders issued. Full use must be made of such concealmentand cover as the terrain provides. If troops are rushedthrough preparatory measures and move freely over ter-rain under hostile observation they will gain unnaturalimpressions that may later be disastrous.

6. RIFLE COMPANY.a. Security on the march

ScopeAn advance guard problem in-

volving the use of a rifle com-pany as the support of an ad-vance guard.

Situations to be drawn so asto require-(1) A series of decisions, plans,and orders by the company com-mander regarding-

(a) Initial dispositions and for-mations.

(b) The timely dispatch ofnecessary patrols.

(c) Measures taken for the anti-aircraft and antimechanized de-fense of organic weapon carriers.(2) Action involving hostile pa-trols too strong for the advanceparty alone, and attacks by hos-tile planes and small hostile me-chanized detachments.

(see FM 7-10, 100-5).

StandardThe company commander

should render prompt decisionsand issue clear and concise or-ders. His plan should be simpleand based on the orders of theadvance guard commander, on amap study and observation ofthe terrain, and on renorts fromreconnaissance elements. forma-tion of the company should beappropriate to the situation andmission, and suitable for the ter-rain. Air-antitank guards shouldbe detailed to give timely in-formation.

Patrols should be given sim-ple, definite orders and dis-patched in time to permit themto accomplish assigned missions.

Antiaircraft defense should beprovided for organic transportby the caliber .50 machine gun

263

mounted on one of the weaponcarriers. Until mortars and lightmachine guns are removed fromcarriers, one of the light ma-chine guns should be mountedon the other weapon carrier forantiaircraft fires. The companycommander designates two mento ride each weapon carrier andto man these machine guns incase of air attack and to func-tion as a two-man rocket teamin case of mechanized attack.

When the advance party isunable to drive off the enemywithout delay, the support shouldaggressively without detailed re-connaissance; supporting weap-ons should be displaced forwardearly to support the attack.When the enemy is destroyed ordriven off, the march should beresumed promptly in a suitableformation.

The company commandershould keep the advance guardcommander informed of the sit-uation.

b. Approach march (see FM 7-10, 100-5).Scope

A problem involving a riflecompany as the leading echelonin an advance when hostile re-sistance is imminent.

Situations to be drawn so asto require-(I) Issuance of company ordersprescribing mission and forma-tion for approach march acrosscountry.(2) Movement in an extended

formation.

StandardOrdea should be clear, explicit,

and as brief as is consistent withclarity, and, if possible, issuedfrom a vantage point of obser-vation.

The company should be ableto move in an extended forma-tion across country without lossof direction and control, andmake maximum use of coverand concealment.

The formation adopted should

264

(S) Appropriate changes in in- insure thorough and continuousitial formation to meet changesin terrain and enemy activity.(4) Action against small hostilemotorized patrols.(5) Measures taken for the anti-aircraft and antimechanized de-fense of organic transport.(6) Movement into an assemblyarea for issuance of attack or-ders and extra ammunition.

reconnaissance of the assignedzone and protection of units inrear. Provision should be madefor flank security and liaisonwith adjacent units, as well asfor antiaircraft and antimech-anized defense.

Orders to meet changes in thesituation or terrain should bepromptly issued.

Action against hostile patrolsshould be aggressive to driveout the enemy or to clarify thesituation.

Antiaircraft defense should beprovided for organic transportby the caliber .50 machine gunmounted on one of the weaponcarriers. Until mortars and lightmachine guns are removed fromcarriers, one of the light ma-chine guns should be mountedon the other iweapon carrier forantiaircraft fires. The companycommander desginates two mento ride each weapon carrier toman these machine guns in caseof air attack and to function asa two-man locket team in caseoi mechanized attack. When theweapons ale off carrier, the driv-els employ antitank rifle gren-ades for the antimechanized de.fense of their vehicles and thedriver of the vehicle on whichthe caliber 5o machine gun ismounted mans that weapon incase of attack by hostile air-planes.

Movement into the assemblyarea should be quiet, orderly,and completed without halting.rlatoons should be located to

facilitate subsequent action, ve-hicles and men dispersed andconcealed, and foxholes dug.

c. Security (see FM 7-10, 7-25, 7-30).Scope

Outpost problem involving arifle cotmpany as support of abivouac outpost.

A rifle company is designatedas a support of a bivouac out-post protecting a resting com-mand at night.The outpost line of resistance,special reconnaissance missions,and detached posts to be estab-lished are prescribed by the out.post (battalion) commander.

Situations to be drawn so as torequire-(1) Establishment of outguardsand detached posts after recon-naissance and study of availablemaps.(2) Organization of outpost line

of resistance.(3) Provisions for communica-

tion between the outpost com-mander, adjacent supports, anddetached posts.


precedes his unit to its assignedarea for a detailed reconnais-sance, directing the second-in-command to move the companyto an area selected from a mapstudy.

The support area is organizedas for defense of a wide frontwith the support platoon mobile.

A line of outguards should beposted to cover all importantapproaches. Important road cen-ters may require a rifle platoonwith supporting weapons. Observ-ers should be posted by the out-guards to prevent surprise.

Unoccupied intervals are cov-ered by fire.

Patrols from the support pla-toon should cover gaps betweenoutguards and detached postsand maintain contact with ad-jacent units.

Upon establishment bf theoutpost the company command-er submits a sketch to the out-post commander showing dis-positions.

Establishment of necessary sig-nal communication.

The company commanderprescribes the location for hiskitchen, provides a guide at thepoint of release, and details car-rying parties for those who can-not be fed at the kitchen. Every'

man should get a hot meal-andfresh water, and the kitchenshould be returned to battalioncontrol at a designated time.Foxholes should be dug andcamouflaged.

Provision should be made foranticraft and antimechanizeddefense.

d. Preparation for attack (see FM 7-10, 7-40, 100-5).Scope

A problem involving a riflecompany in the occupation of afinal assembly position by nightand an advance to the line ofdeparture, preparatory to a day-light attack.

Situations to be drawn so asto require-(I) Personal reconnaissance, se-lection, and marking by daylightthe route to final assembly po-sition, and the subdivision of theassembly area to company head-quarters and platoons.(2) Enforcement of provisionsfor maintaining secrecy.(3) Reconnaissance of locationson line of departure and ofground over which company at-tacks.(4) Plan of action.-(5) Orders.(6) Execution of movement tofinal assembly position and intoplatoon areas.(7) Issue of extra ammunition.(8) MlovemeW. to line of depar-

toue.


should plan his reconnaissanceand issuance of orders so as toallow subordinates time for adaylight reconnaissance. Afterthorough reconnaissance thecompany commander should de-velop a simple plan and issueorders from points where someor all of the ground over whichthe company is to operate canbe pointed out.

Route selected should be easyto follow at night, positivelymarked, and compass bearingsand distances noted. Reconnais-sance should not disclose pro-jected operation. The marchshould be accomplished quietly,expeditiously, in secrecy, andwithout loss of direction.

Platoon areas in the final as-sembly position should facilitatetransition to the attack. Thecompany should complete prep-arations for attack in the finalassembly position, including theissue of extra ammunition.

267

a. Attack during daylight (see FM 7-10, 7-25).Scope

A problem involving a riflecompany as an interior elementof the attacking echelon in adaylight attack.

Situations to be drawn so asto require-(I) Action during attack requir-ing decisions and orders of com-pany commander relating to theuse of elements of the weaponsplatoon and suppbrt rifle pla-toon to assist the attack of theleading platoons in gaining theassigned company objective.(2) Call on higher headquartersfor supporting fires to assist inthe capture of the company ob-jective.(3) Movement of the companycommand post and observationpost.

StandardMovement should be initiated

so as to permit leading elementsto cross the line of departure ata prescribed hour without halt-ing.

Company comander shouldkeep the company observationpost well forward and spendconsiderable time there observ-ing and directing the action; heshould direct the movement ofthe company command post assuitable forward positions be-come available.

He should promptly employhis light machine guns to deliveroblique, enfilade, or flanking fire,and his 6o mm mortars on tar-gets defiladed from effective fireof fiat-trajectory weapons in sup-port of the attacking 'echelon;he should keep the supportready to protect the companyflanks against counterattack andto maneuver it against resistanceholding up the attacking eche-lon; he should anticipate theneeds for supporting fire by theattacking echelon and furnish itfrom his weapons platoon or re-quest it from higher headquar-ters.

He should provide for mutualsupport within the attackingechelon and adjacent units. Heshould provide for security andthe maintenance of contact. Heshould keep the battalion com-mander informed of his own and

ihe enemy situation.

268

f. Continuation of attack100-5).

ScopeA problem involving a rifle

company as an interior elementof an attacking echelon in con-tinuation of the attack, to in-clude the assault and reorgani-zation.

Situations to be drawn so asto require-(1) Continuation of attack fromthe company objective to thebattalion objective.(2) Call for supporting fires

from higher headquarters.(3) Assault and capture of en-emy positions on battalion ob-jective.(4) Reorganization of companyon battalion objective.(5) Replacement of platoon lead-ers and key enlisted men.(6) Resupply of ammunition.(7) Disposition of prisoners ofwar, captured documents andmateriel, and hostile identifica-tions.

(see FM 7-10, 7-25, 7-30,


insures proper direction of theattack to the battalion objective.

He discovers where hostile re-sistance is weakening, and callson higher headquarters for sup-porting fires to soften the enemyposition for the assault. The at-tacking echelon moves close tothe hostile position under coverof these fires and captures it byassault. If necessary, the com-pany commander organizes a co-ordinated assault.

He arranges for the support-ing fires to lift and continues theattack through the depth of thehostile resistance.

The company commandershould actively supervise the re-organization of platoons, ap-pointing leaders where necessary;he should reorganize his com-pany headquarters. He shouldprovide for the security of hiscompany during the reorganiza-tion, including posting of air-antitank guards; he should re-distribute his forces in depthand in accordance with instruc-tions prepare for further action.

He should determine the statusof the ammunition supply, col-lecting it from the dead and dis-abled, and provide for a resup-ply of ammunition.

He should keep the battalioncommander informed of the sit-uation, the approximate strengthof the company, and any hostileidentifications secured.

269

g. Defense during daylight (see FM 7-10, 7-30, 7-40,100-5). Scope Standard

A rifle company in the occu-pation and organization of afront-line company defense areaduring daylight.

Situation to be drawn so asto require-(I) Movement of troops to thedefense area during the recon-naissance of this area by thecompany commander and pla-toon leaders.(2) Prompt formulation of

ground organization and fireplans.(3) Issuance of clear, brief, and

adequate orders.(4) Organization of the groundto be started with the minimumdelay and conducted in the prop-er sequence.(5) Establishment of security

measures against air and groundattack.(6) Protection of -supporting

weapons.(7) Coordination with adjacentunits regarding defenses at boun-daries and limiting points.(8) Arrangements for receiptand prompt distribution of in-trenching tools, extra ammu-nition, antitank mines, and engi-neer materials.(9) Constant readiness to meetan attack.(10) Constant supervision ofwork.(11) Establishment of observationand command posts.

270

Prior to departure on recon-naissance the company com-mander makes a tentative planfrom a map study and initiatesprompt movement of troops tothe defense area. Company com-mander and platoon leadersprecede troops and, so far aspracticable, complete their re-connaissance and formulate plansprior to the arrival of the troopson the position.

Orders should be issued to en-able work to start without un-necessary delay.

Subordinate units should bedisposed to protect supportingweapons located in the area, tocover by fire approaches not ade-quately covered by the fire ofsupporting weapons: to providefor all-around defense: to facili-tate mutual support between ad-jacent defense areas.

The defenses at boundariesshould be coordinated with ad-jacent units.

Organization of the groundshould proceed so that if inter-rupted by an enemy attack thework already performed will bemost beneficial in defending theposition.

Sufficient stocks of ammu-nition should be placed on theposition to obviate resupply dur-ing daylight.

Security measures should in-sure timely warning of an attackfrom the ground or the air andsuitable action to meet such at-tacks, including the use of anti-tank mines in local defense.

.i. Defense at night (see FM 7-10, 7-30, 7-40, 100-5).Scope

A rifle company occupyingand organizing a front-line de-fense area during darkness.

Extracts of the battalion de-fense order to be furnished thecompany conmander.

Situation to be drawn so asto require-(1) A daylight reconnaissanceby the company commander.(2) Marking of routes and loca-tions for all installations forquick recognition at night.(3) Movement to the defense

area, establishment of local se-curity, occupation of the po-sition, and organization 9 f theground--all during darkness,lights prohibited.(4) Defensive ar-angements co-

ordinated with supporting weap-ons located in the area and withadjacent units.

StandardThe order should be issued on

the ground and in sufficient timeto allow daylight reconnaissanceby subordinate leaders andguides.

The reconnaissance should bemade by small, inconspicuousgroups.

Routes and locations for allinstallations should be marked.

The company should move tothe area shortly after dark andthe organization of the groundshould proceed quietly and with-out confusion.

Intrenching tools and extraammumition should be distrib-uted in an orderly manner.

lFoxholes should be dug for allpersonnel, emplacements pre-pared for crew-operated weap-onis, protective wire installedaround platoon defense areas,and some clearing of fields of fireaccomplished. Vork completeddepends on the visibility, timeavailable, the character of thesoil, and the density of vegeta-tion.

Daylight should find groundorganization procedding, and thedefense coordinated with adja-cent units and with supportingweapons located within the area.

Security measures should beestablished and maintainedthroughout the operation.

Supper and breakfast shouldbe prepared and served in thefield.

271

i. Conduct of defense ,see FM 7-10, 7-20).

ScopeA rifle company in the con-

duct of the defense of a front-line defense area against-

Ground attack.Air attack.Tank attack.Situations to be drawn so as

to require-(I) (a) Action of local securitygroups against hostile reconnais-sance elements.

(b) Action during artillerybombardment.

(c) Action during enemy ap-proach' to midrange-close range.

(d) Action against an attackfrom a flank.

(e) Action during assault ofposition by foot troops.

(O Action against hostile ele.ments which infiltrate into theposition.

(g) Action on capture of aplatoon defense area.(2) Action against air attackwhen ground targets are threat-ening.(3) Action during tank attack.

StandardLocal security groups fire on

hostile patrols, keep their com-mander informed of enemy ac-tivity, and withdrasw by previous-ly selected routes.

Troops should take cover infoxholes during artillery and airbombardment. Maintenance ofair-antitank observation.

Troops on the main line ofresistance should remain con-cealed and withhold fire untiltargets appear within 500 yards.As the enemy approaches withineffective range, troops engageremunerative targets.

A prearranged signal calls forfinal protective fires in a threat-cuing area.

Flank attacks should be metby shifting troops to supplemen-tary positions on the flanks ofdefense areas or by local coun-terattack.

Hostile elements which infil-thate into the company defensearea should be engaged fromflank and rear positions of for-ward platoon defense areas andby the suppolt platoon.

If other factors of the situationpermit, the company command-er should older an immediatecounterattack by the supportplatoon to destroy or capturethe enemy, or eject him fromthe captured platoon defensearea. Otherwise the support pla-toon should resist further ad-vance by fire from its preparedposition.

272

Ground targets receive pri-ority over air targets; when notengaged with ground targets, allweapons suited for antiaircraftfire should engage low flying air-planes attacking the position.Troops fire only on commandor prearranged signal given bythe responsible leader.

Battalion headquarters shouldbe kept informed of changes inthe situation.

In case of tank attack, menequipped with rifle grenadelaunchers and antitank riflegrenades and two-man rockeiteams employ their weaponswithin effective range. Defendersemploying small-arms fire againstthe accompanying infantry oremploying antitank rifle gren-ades, rockets, and small arms fireagainst hostile armored vehiclestake cover only when necessaryto prevent being crushed. Assoon as tanks have passed, theyreturn to their firing positionsto meet the attack of foot troops.

i. Night withdrawal (see FM 7-10, 7-30, 100-5).Scope

A night withdrawal from con-tact of an interior rifle companyfiom a front-line company de-fense area.

Situations to be drawn so asto require-

Actions and orders of the com-pany commander in executionof night withdrawal from afront-line defense area to in-clude-(I) Daylight reconnaissance of

StandardAs soon as warllned of the with-

drawal the company commandershould make his plan and notifycompany officers available. Heshould designate a covering forcecommander, preferably the sec-ond-in-command, and shoulddesignate the company coveringforce (approximately one squadper platoon). He should go toplatoon leaders not immediatelyavailable, notify them of his

273

routes and assembly positions.(2) Designation of company cov-ering force, the commander, andthe time he assumes command.(3) Enforcement of secrecy meas-ures.(4) Withdrawal of company, lesscovering force.(5) Withdlawal of coveringforce.(6) Ammunition supply.(7) Evacuation of wounded.

plan, and direct them to sendguides to the company commandpost. He should designate anoth-er officer, preferably the weaponsplatoon commander, to takeguides on reconnaissance of as-sembly areas and routes thereto.

The company commander re-stricts daylight activity of for-ward elements that might indi-cate a rearward movement. Pla-toons assemble at the designatedhour and move to the companyarea: when assembled the com-pany, less the covering force,moves to the battalion assemblyarea. The covering force shouldwithdraw at a designated houror on orders of the battalioncovering force commander, andrejoin the company at the placedesignated by the company com.mander.

An adequate supply of am-munition should be left with thecoveling force. Surplus stocksshould be carried out by hand.Resupply should be effected in arear assembly area or on thenew position. Improvised littersshould be employed to evacuatewounded to the nearest avail-able transportation. When thisis impracticable, a company aidman should be left with them.

k. Daylight withdrawal (see FM 7-10, 7-20, 100-5).

ScopeA problem involving a front-

line rifle company in daylightwithdrawal.

Company should be defending

274


should quickly develop his planand promptly issue brief, frag-mentary, oral orders to subordi-

0

an organized position with itsforward elements closely engagedwith the enemy. Heavy machine-gun and antitank units locatedin the company defense areashould be attached to the com-pany for the withdrawal.

Situations to be drawn so asto require-(1) The company to withdraw

from action starting at a speci-fied time in coordination withsupporting fires.(2) The company to withdrawso as to unmask the fire of thebattalion covering force so faras practicable, and move alongan assigned route to a desig.nated assembly area.(3) The use of company supportelements as a local covering forcefor withdrawal c'a front-line pla-toons.

nate leaders, covering: timewithdrawal will start: sequencein which units withdraw; routesof withdrawal; company assem-bly area; location of battalionassembly area; and compositionand location of company cover-ing force.

Withdrawal should start at aspecified time (without givingprior evidence of intention towithdraw to the enemy), begin.ning with element least heavilyengaged, and proceed as expe-ditiously as possible.

Coinpany covering force shouldwithdraw by covered routes afterthe remainder of the companyhas withdrawn beyond the nextcovering force in rear. This cov-ering force may be provided bythe battalion or by the companycommander from rear elementsof the company. The withdrawalof the bulk of the company mustbe protected at all times by suit-able covering forces.

Measures should be taken toinsure minimum loss of controland prompt reorganization enroute to, or at, the assembly area.

Weapons and supplies shouldbedevacuated or destroyed.

Wounded should be evacuated.When this is impracticablemedical personnel and suppliesshould be left with them.

I. Delaying action following daylight withdrawal (seeFM 7-10, 7-20).


company in delaying action fol.lowing a daylight withdrawal.

StandardOrders should be brief, issued

in fragmentary form, and of themission type.

275

The company lwith attachedelements as the covering force ofa battalion in a daylight with-drawal and disposed initially ina position prescribed by the bat-talion commander.. Limitedtransportation facilities for usein ammunition supply and evac-uation of wounded may be pro-vided.

Situations to be drawn so asto require-(I) The delivery of long-rangefires against enemy elements.(2) Establishment and protec-tion of road blocks.(3) The company to hold its in-itial and succeeding positions aslong as practicable but to effectwithdrawals before becomingclosely engaged or outflanked.(4) Evacuation of wounded.

Positions near crests should beoccupied to facilitate withdraw-als and obtain long-range fieldsof fire; short-range fires are sec-ondary in importance. Rifle ele-ments should be disposed to pro-tect supporting weapons andflanks. Enemy should be engagedat maximum effective range ofweapons with a heavy volumeof fire.

XWithdrawals to succeeding po-sitions should be effected with-out becoming closely engagedwith the enemy.

Maximum practicable delayshould be effected by destruc-tion of bridges and by roadblocks.

Wounded should be evacuatedusing available transportation toa maximum.

m. Defense from attack (see FM 7-10, 100-5).


company in the assumption ofthe defense following an unsuc-cessful attack.

Situations to be drawn so asto require-(1) The company stopped Sbnunfavorable terrain with all pla-toons in action following an un-successful attempt to capture anobjective.(2) Adjustments for hasty occu-pation of position during re-maining hours of daylight.(3) Organization of a position.

StandardWhen the attack is halted, the

company commander should no-tify the battalion commanderand transmit orders to his pla-toons directing them to holdpresent positions, make minoradjustments to take full advan-tage of terrain, and dig in. Heshould gradually thin out for-ward elements to provide depthin the defense and security tothe flanks. Positions of companyand supporting weapons shouldbe modified to support the hastydefense to the best advantage.The company commander shouldtake steps to establish contactand improve coordination withadjacent units.

276

n. Motorized detachment on combat mission (see FM7-10, 7-40).

ScopeA problem involving a motor-

ized detachment, consisting of arifle company with appropriatereinforcements, on a combat mis-sion.

Units available to companycommander for the motorizeddetachment should be prescribedin a directive from higher head-quarters.

Situations to be drawn so asto require-(1) Issuance of brief oral ordersfor assembling the detachmentand moving out on the assignedmission.(2) Adequate security measuresagainst air and mechanized at-tacks.(3) A cross-country motor move-ment as a result of unexpectedenemy action.(4) Execution of an attack, de-fense, or delaying action.

StandardActions taken and orders is-

sued by the company commandershould result in the orderly as-sembly of the detachment withproper equipment for the as-signed mission, and suitablemeans for rapid communicationand control of the column dur-ing movement. The formationshould provide adequate securityagainst hostile air and groundforces.

There should be no hesitationin ordering nor confusion in exe-cuting a cross-country movement.

In the final phase, actions tak-en and orders issued should pro-vide for: selection of a suitabledetrucking area; the guiding oftrucks into the detrucking areaand their proper dispersion andconcealment therein; security forthe detrucking area during andsubsequent to detrucking.

Personal reconnaissance by de-tachment commander; promptissuance of brief oral orders forthe effective employment of allelements of the detachment in acoordinated attack, in defense orin delaying action.

o. Motorized advance guard in daylight movement(see FM 7-10, 7-20, 7-40).


company with appropriate at-tachments as the advance guardof a motorized column making

\StandardBrief warning orders followed

by oral orders for the movementshould result in the proper as-sembly, intruckment, and move-

277

a daylight movement. ment of the advance guard andSituations to be drawn so as

to require-(1) The issuance of warning or-ders.(2) The correct estimation oftime factors so as to permit theadvance guard to precede themain body by the prescribed in-terval.(3) The proper employment of

elements of the advance guardto clear a road block.(4) The employment of all ele-ments of the advance guard todevelop the situation when re-sistance is encountered.

patrols so as to clear the initialpoint at the prescribed time.-' Automatic weapons should bemounted for antiaircraft fire andcanvas truck covers removed topermit firing by riflemen andautomatic riflemen. The forma-tion of the column should besuch as to present a poor targetto hostile aircraft. The pointshould consist of a small patrolwith a get-away vehicle. Properuse should be made of radio forcommunication.

Prompt action when roadblock is encountered should in-clude proper dispersion and con-cealment of vehicles and resump-tion of movement when block iscleared. Elements in rear shouldnot close up and halt on theroad, hut should seek conceal-ment on each side of the road.

When increased resistance ismet, the support should moveinto the designated detruckingarea, properly disperse, and takeadvantage of available conceal-ment and cover. Orders for theemployment of all elements ofthe advance squad should betimely, clear, and concise. Prop-er information should be sent tothe commander of the mainbody.

p. Night attack (see FM 7-10, 7-40, 100-5).


company in a night attack.Situations to be drawn so as

to require-

StandardPrompt warning orders should

initiate necessary administrativearrangements and provide for as-sembly of subordinates for or-

(1) Reconnaissance of an un- ders. Reconnaissance by companyfamiliar area.(2) Formulation of plan for at-tack and plans for defense ofcaptured objective or continu-ation of attack at daybreak.(3) Oral orders.(4) Advance across country tofinal assembly area and thenceto a line of departure.(5) Execution of a night attack.(6) Consolidation of position fordefense prior to daylight.

commander should include routeof advance to line of departureand the hostile position.

The company commandershould issue clear, concise ordersfor the attack and defense of thecaptured objective or continu-ation of the attack. These ordersshould be issued so as to permitdetailed daylight reconnaissanceby subordinates.

Provisions should be made forinsuring secrecy prior to actualassault; identifying members ofthe attacking company; flank se-curity; prompt reports of prog-ress; and the arrangement forsupporting fires by heavy weap-ons, cannon company weapons,and artillery, in case of hostilecounterat tack.

Maintenance of directionshould be insured by use of col-umn formations and the employ-ment of the compass, groundforms, and landmarks.

After capturing the objectivethe company should promptlyreorganize and assume suitabledefensive positions. If the-attackis to be continued suitable meas-ures should be taken to assureits effective execution.

q. Attack in woods (see FM 7-10, 740, 100-5).Scope

A problem involving a riflecompany as leading echelon inan attack through a large woods.

Situations to be drawn so asto require-(I) The assumption of a proper

StandardThe company should be halt.

ed near the edge of the woodswith front and flanks covered byscouts. Intervals and distancesshould be reduced to limit ofvisibility; physical contact should

formation in the edge of a largewoods as the base) company ofan interior battalion prepara-tory to an attack through thewoods.(2) An advance through densewoods without hostile resistance,other than by snipers, for at least1,000 yards.(3) The reduction of isolatedenemy combat posts inclearingsor at trail intersections.(4) Reorganization and prepara-tions for debouchment from thewoods.

be insured between units.In dense woods, advances

should be made in columns cov-ered by scouts; in thin woodsleading elements usually advancein skirmish line. Directionshould be maintained by meansof compass bearing.

Snipers should be promptlydislodged by sharpshooters or bybursts of automatic rifle or lightmachine-gun fire. Hostile resis-tance should be promptly en-veloped by infiltration and at-tack from flanks and rear. Uponreaching far edge of woods ad-vance should be stopped, unitsreorganized, prompt reconnais-sance made, brief oral orders is-sued, supporting weapons em-placed, and attack resumed to.seize next objective.

7. RIFLE PLATOON.a. Security on the march (see FM 7-10).

ScopeAn advance guard problem in,

volving the use of the rifle pla-toon as an advance party.

Situations to be drawn so asto require-(1) A series of decisions, plans,

and orders by the platoon leader.(2) Action involving the point.flank controls, connecting files,and the advance party in carry-ing out the assigned mission.

StandardPlatoon leader must render

prompt decisions; issue clear andconcise orders to carry out hisplans; maintain contact with thepoint by connecting files; andkeep the support commander in-formed of tihe situation.

Patrols should be employed toreconnoiter dangerous terrain onthe ilanks up to approximately200 yards.

Platoon leader, through ag-gressive leadership, controls theaction of his platoon in carryingout the assigned mission.

O80

b. Approach march (see FM 7-10).Scope

A problem involving the rifleplatoon, as part of a larger force,in the approach march.

Situations to be drawn asto require-(1) Use of scouts to cover theadvance and patrols, as necessaryor ordered, to protect flanks ormaintain contact.(2) Changes in disposition oftroops for purposes of control,to screen unit from hostile ob-servation, and to minimize lossesfrom artillery fires and air at-tack.(3) The movement into the as-

sembhly area, the issuance of ex-tra ammulnition, reconnaissance,orders, and final preparations forthe attack.

StandardThe platoon should be able to

move in all extended formationacross country without loss ofdirection or control. It shouldbe able to take advantage ofcover, concealment, and differenttypes of terrain. Provision shouldbe made for security to the frontand liaison wilh adjacent units.

Platoon leader should precedethe platoon far enough to recon-noiter effectively the zone of ac-tion. Heavily shelled or gassedareas should be detoured.

Movement into the assemblyarea should be quiet and orderly.Extra ammunition should be is-sued in such a manner as to pre-vent bunching of men. Recon-naissance should be thorough.Orders for the attack should bethoroughly understood by eachsquad.

c. Security during halts (see FM 7-10).

ScopeAn outpost problem involving

the use of a rifle platoon as thesupport.

Situations to be drawn so asto require-(1) Establishmelt of the sup-

port in its sector.(2) Posting of outguards.(3) Use of patrols in advance of

lille of obrsevation and to ailin-tail contact wnitt outguards andadjacent supports.(4) Organization of the supportposition.

StandardAfter a short irconnaissance

or map study the platoon leadermust be able to establish thesupport proper, uttguards, andpatiols in a prompt anti orderlymanner. After an inspection ofthe various elements of the sup.port he should be able to sub-.mit a sketch to the outpost com-mander showing the dispositionsof the platoon.

Air-antitank gualds should beestablished and antitank riflegrenadiers should be posted to

281

(5) A sketch showing dispositionof the support and outguards.(6) Action of outguards and sup-

port proper in defending theoutpost line of resistance duringan attack.

cover probable tank approaches.Foxholes should be dug and

camouflaged for all personnel.The platoon leader should

have a plan of defense in case ofhostile attack, and through ag-gressive leadership control theaction of his platoon during anattack of the outpost.

d. Motorized detachment (see FM 7-10, 7-40).

ScopeA problem involving the use

of a rifle platoon as a motorizeddetachment.

Situations to be drawn so asto require -(1) A series of decisions, plans.

and orders by the platoonleader.(2) Action involving the reduc-tion of a road block.(3) The passage and defense ofa defile.(4) Reconnaissance on an ex-tended front by motor patrols.

StandardThe platoon leader must be

able to organize the detachmentto provide for control, flexibility,mobility, and security. His de-cisions must be prompt: his or-ders, clear and concise. His de-cisions, orders, and actions mustbe preceded by a thorough, yetspeedy, reconnaissance.

His plan of control and signalcomunication must permit move-ment on an extended front ifnecessary.

He should control each situ-ation through intelligent and ag-gressive leadership.

e. Tactical march (see FM 7-10)Scope

A problem involving the rifleplatoon, as part of a larger force,on the march.

Situations to be drawn so asto require -(1) Emphasis on march discip-line.(2) Disposition of sick or strag-

glers.(3) Proper ulse of water.(4) Conduct during halts--e-

StandardProper supervision and con-

trol by the platoon leader andhis noncommissioned officersshould enable the platoon tomeet without difficulty all theproblems confronting troops ina tactical march, such as dispo-sition of sick or stragglers, useof water, conduct during halts,and air and mechanized attackson the column.

282

curity measures. Guides assist the movement(5) Action during an air ormechanized attack on the col-umn.(6) Use of guides at bivouac orassembly areas.(7) Movement into a bivouac orassembly area.

into and occupation of a bivouacor assembly area. The end of themarch should find the troops ingood physical condition, readyto participate in an attack orany other action required.

f. Security in defense (see FM 7-10).


platoon as the combat outpostfor an interior front-line bat-talion.

Situation to be based on estab-lishment of combat outpost inconformity with orders of thebattalion commander and to bedrawn so as to require -(1) Reconnaissance and selectionof the outpost position by theplatoon leader.(2) Establishment of the combatoutpost by the platoon leader tofurnish the required local se-curity.(3) Actions of combat outpost.

g. Attack (see FM 7-10).

scopeA problenl involving an in-

terior rifle platoon, as part of alarger force, in the attackingechelon.

Situations to be drawn so as torequire -

StandardIn reconnaissance for a com-

bat outpost position, the pla-toon leader seeks terrain that af-fords long-range observation.The combat outpost sends for-ward outguards to hold the fore-ground of the battalion defensearea under observation. A smallsupport may be held in a cen-tral location. Provisions aremade for patrolling between out-guards and for contact with ad-jacent units.

The combat outpost giveswarning of a hostile approachand repels hostile detachmentsthat penetrate the general out-post. When required to with-draw, the withdrawal is madeby previously selected routeswhich do not interfere with firefrom the battle position.

StandardThe platoon leader with such

assistants as he may select shouldmake a thorough reconnaissance,prepare his plan of action, andissue his orders from a concealedpoint where, if possible, the

283

(1) Reconnaissance and observa- ground over which the platoontion of the ground over whichthe platoon is to attack.(2) Plan of. action.(3) Orders.(4) A series of decisions and or-ders by the platoon leader dur-ing the attack to cope with de-velopments.(5) Assault of the enemy's posi-tion.

is to attack may be pointed out.His decisions and orders duringthe attack must be prompt,clear, and concise. He must con-trol his platoon during the at-tack and assault by aggressiveleadership.

h. Attack as support (see FM 7-10).


platoon as a support platoon ina coordinated attack of a largerforce.

Situations to be drawn so asto require-(1) The support platoon to fol-low the attacking echelon bybounds.(2) Preparation of tentativeplans for action.(3) Local security measures toprotect the platoon and flanksof the company.(4) The use of the platoon tolaunch a flank attack against re-sistance holding up the leadingechelon.

StandardThe platoon leader must con-

stantly observe the action of theattacking echelon and the situa-tion on the flanks of the com-pany. He should displace hisplatoon forward by bounds fromcovered position to covered po-sition. Proper control shouldprevent the merging of his pla-toon with the attacking echelon.Suitable dispositions are madeto protect the flanks and rear ofthe platoon, and of the com-pany, as ordered by the companycommander. By suitable controland aggressive leadership heshould be prepared to enter theaction at any time. The employ-ment of the.platoon in the flankattack should be initiated byshort, clear orders and executedwith precision and decision.

i. Continuation of attack (see FM 7-10).

ScopeA problem involving reorgani-

zation of the rifle platoon uponreaching the initial company ob-

StandardUpon reaching the objective,

the platoon leader employs auto-matic riflemen and men

jective and continuation of its' equipped with rifle grenadeattack.

Situations to be drawn so asto require-(1) Use of automatic rifle teamsand men equipped with riflegrenade launchers to cover reor-ganization.(2) Reorganization of the pla-toon.(3) Replenishment of ammuni-tion by collection from dead andwounded.(4) Disposition of prisoners and

report to company commander.(5) Continuation of the attack.

launchers and grenades for se-curity and, with the assistance ofhis noncommissioned officers,promptly reorganizes his pla-toon, replacing leaders and keymen wiho have become casual-ties. Ammunition should be col-lected from the dead andwounded and redistributed tosquads. The platoon leaderpromptly delivers any prisonersto the company commander, to-gether with a report of hostileidentifications made, and thenumber of casualties and statusof ammunition supply in his pla-toon. He briefly reconnoiters tothe front and flanks and plansthe further employment of hisplatoon. The attack is resumedin compliance with the companycommander's orders; if the at-tack is not to be promptly re-sumed, the platoon should digin and prepare to resist counter-attack.

i. Hasty occupation of defense position (see FM 5-15,7-10).

ScopeA problem involving an in-

terior front-line rifle platoon, aspart of a larger force, in thehasty occupation of a defenseposition.

Situations to be based on thethreat of enemy fire on the posi-tion within a few hours and tobe drawn so as to require -(1) Reconnaissance by platoonleader to locate positions of riflesquads, automatic rifle teams,

StandardAfter a hasty reconnaissance,

the platoon leader should desig-nate the location and prescribethe mission of each squad, in-cluding the automatic rifle teamand men equipped with riflegrenade launchers and rifle gre-nades. Squads should mutuallysupport each other and adjacentunits.

Observation and local securityshould be assured first; clearing-

285

and antitank rifle grenadiers.(2) Security for, and coordina-tion with, supporting weaponslocated in area.(3) Decisions, actions, and ordersof platoon leader for-

(a) Occupation and organiza-tion of position and fires.

(b) Priority of work.(4) Actual work on position.(5) Overlay or sketch to be pre-pared and submitted.

'of fields of fire, preparation offoxholes and camouflage shouldbe executed simultaneously;preparation of obstacles withfull advantage taken of naturalfeatures should have an earlypriority. Works should be grad-ually developed to provide thegreatest possible defensivestrength in time available. Anoverlay or sketch of positionshould be prepared and sent tocompany commander.

k. Defense (see FM 5-15, 5-20, 7-10, 100-5).Scope

A problem involving a rifleplatoon, as part of a larger force,in the organization, occupation,and defense of an interior front-line platoon defense area.

Situations to be drawn so asto require -(1) Reconnaissance of the area.(2) A plan for the organizationof the ground.(3) A plan of fires to includemutual flanking support.(4) Priority of tasks.(5) Posting of air-antitank

guards.(6) Obstacles and camouflage.(7) Fire, cover, and alternatepositions for the automatic riflesand the rifle squads.(8) Selection of the commandpost.(9) Conduct of the defense, toinclude -

(a) Withholding of fire untilenemy troops within effectiverange (500 yards).

(b) Final protective fires.

StandardPlatoon leader should precede

the unit, reconnoiter area to beoccupied, determine exact loca-tion of his defense area, develophis plan of defense, and estab-lish priority of tasks in orderthat his platoon may move intoarea without delay.

The defense area when organ-ized should provide: fires tocover assigned front and providemutual flanking support; closeprotection for supporting weap-ons located in area; fire coverand alternate positions for eachsquad: air-antitank guards: a-command post which will affordeffective observation over theplatoon area, its sector of fire,and the areas of adjacent pla-toons: belt of obstacles (wire en-tanglement) entirely surroundingthe area: camouflage of posi-tions; communication within thearea and with the company.

During the attack of the posi-tion, fire should be held until

(c) Action against attacks by the attacker comes within closehostile foot troops and mechan-ized forces.

(d) Measures to block or ejectenemy penetration of platoonarea and of adjacent area.

range. Should enemy elementssucceed in entering the positionthey are ejected by fire or coun-terattack.

I. Defense as support (see FM 5-15, 5-20, 7-10).Scope

A problem involving a sup.port platoon, as part of a largerforce, in the organizlation, occu-pation, and defense of a supportdefense area.

Situations to be drawn so asto require-(1) A reconnaissance of the area.(2) A plan for and the organiza.tion of the ground.(3) A plan of fire.(4) Obstacles and camouflage.(5) Supplementary squad posi-tions.(6) Selection of command post.(7) Communication.(8) Conduct of the defense toinclude -. (a) Fires against attacking air-craft.

(b) Use of anti-tank rifle gre-nades.

StandardBefore starting on reconnais-

sance, the platoon leader ar-ranges for movement forward ofthe platoon; while on reconnais-sance he formulates his plan andprepares notes from which to is-sue his defense order upon hisreturn; he should establishpriority of tasks.

Organization should providefire to the flanks of the forwarddefense areas, in the gaps be-tween them, and within the for-ward areas should they be over'run; protection for the flanksand rear of the company area isprovided.

m,. Relief of front-line platoon (see FM 7-10).

Scope

A problem involving a rifleplatoon, part of a larger force,in night relief of a front-lineplatoon.

Situations to be drawn so as torequire -(I) Prior planning by platoon

StandardIncoming platoon leader, as-

sisted by his noncommissionedofficers, makes a detailed inspec-tion to assure himself that hisplatoon has the prescribedequipmenta ammunition, and re-serve rations. Both platoon lead-

leader to include-- ers make a thorough reconnais-(a) Inspection of individual

equipment, arms, ammunition,and reserve rations.

(b) Reconnaissance of positionand inspection accompanied bythe platoon leader to be re-lieved.

(c) Plan of defense.(d) Arrangement for guides

and point where they trill meetrelieving unit.(2) The execution of the relief,under cover of darkness, asplanned by the platoon leader.

sance and inspection of the posi-tion and arrange transfer of au-thorized supplies and equip-ment. The incoming platoonleader should orient himself onhis mission, the plan of defense,supply and evacuation arrange-mcnts, and all available infor-mation of local hostile andfriendly dispositions, habits, ob-stacles, and fires. He orients hisplatoon on all these points anddesignates positions for squadsin the defense area. He arrangesfor guides to lead his platoonforward during darkness andwhere guides will meet the pla-toon. He reconnoiters routes for-ward. The relief should be madequietly and without lights. Afterthe relief is completed the pla-toon leader makes an inspectionof his area and reports to thecompany commander.

n. Daylight withdrawal (see FM 7-10).


platoon, as part of a largerforce, in a daylight -ithdrawalfrom contact.

Situations to be drawn so as torequire -(1) Orders of the platoon leader.(2) Withdrawal of platoon ele-ments by small groups.(3) Use of noncommissioned of-'

ficers for control.(4) Designation of elements tocover the wrihdraal].(5) Defense against air arid tankattack during the withdrawal.

SltandardThe platoon icader's orders

should be clear and brief, coverthe plan and control of thewithdrawal, and be specific as tothe route to the rear position.Reconnaissance twill usually becoincident with the withdrawal.Withdrawal of squads must becoordinated, employing auto-matic riflemen to maintain a vol-time of fire while gradually thin-ning out the line. Individualsmove straight to the rear, report-ing to noncommissioned officelsat designated points in rear of

the support platoon area, wherethey are assembled and movedto the company assembly area.

Air-antitank guards are desig-nated. In case of air attackagainst them after they breakcontact, troops open fire on at-tacking planes upon commandof responsible leaders. Individ-uals equipped with rifle grenadelaunchers and antitank rifle gre-nades fire on mechanized ve-hicles within effective range.The platoon leader should con-trol his platoon by intelligent.aggressive leadership.

a. Night withdrawal (see FM 7-10 and 7-20).Scope

A problem involving the nightwithdrawal of a front-line rifleplatoon, as part of a larger force.

Situations to be drawn so asto require -(1) Reconnaissance of the pla-toon and company assemblyareas and routes of withdrawal.(2) Issuance of order.(3) Designation and employ-ment of tie covering force.(4) Control measures for the

movement of the platoon to thecompany assembly area.(5) Sequence of withdrawzal of

personnel.(6) Measures to preserve secrecy.(7) Ammunition supply.

StandardRoutes of withdrawal and as-

sembly areas Inlst be reconnoi-tered and marked during day-light by men selected by theplatoon leader. Reconnoiteringgroups must be small to preservesecrecy. Routes chosen should beeasily identified after dark.

The platoon leader should gopersonally to his subordinatesand issue the withdrawal order.

When practicable, integrity dfsquads should be maintained indesignating the platoon coveringforce.

Rearward movement shouldbegin after dark' in accord withorders of higher authority. In-dividuals move to squad assem-bly area, where squad leaders re-gain control and move squadsto the platoon assembly area.Small column formations shouldbe adopted. Movement should be

289

accomplished quietly, withoutconfusion, and in secrecy. Thecovering force should simulatenormal activity. Sufftcient ammu-nition should he left with thecovering force. Any surplus am-munition should be carried tothe rear or rendered useless.

p. Night attack (see FM 7-10, 7-40, 100-5).Scope

A problem involving the em-ployment of a rifle platoon, aspart of a larger force, in a nightattack.

Situations to be based on anattack shortly before daylight toseize a limited objective to facil-itate continuation of attack afterdaylight and to be drawn so asto require-(I) Daylight reconnaissance ofroutes, line of departure, and ob-servation of the ground overwhich attack will be made.(2) Formulation of plan andorder by the platoon leader.(3) Maintenance of direction,

contact, and control during silentadvance to objective.(4) Assault of position.(5) Actions of leaders upon com-pletion of successful attack.

StandardOn receipt of company com-

mander's orders, the platoonleader should make detailed day-light reconnaissance of terrainover which the approach and at-tack are to be made.

The platoon leader's plan,based on the company order,should be simple; his ordersshould cover every eventualitythat reasonably can be foreseen;he should require that bayonetsbe fixed before attack commences.

The platoon leader should dis-pose his unit in the formationsordered by company commander;he should march at the head ofhis column, and during the ad-vance should constantly check onmaintenance of direction andcontact; and should insure thatthe advance is made quietly andthat all prescribed secrecy mea-sures are enforced.

Platoon should advance in pla-toon or squad column until with-in 100 to 200 yards of hostileposition, when it should be de-ployed as skirmishers. After de-ployment as skirmishers, advanceshould continue at a walk.

Assault should be made with

290

the bayonet, when hostile resist-ance is met.

Upon capturing the hostileposition, a prearranged signalshould be given. Reorganizationshould be initiated immediatelyand groups located to resistcounterattack.

q. Attack in woods (see FM 7-10, 7-40).Scope

A problem involving an in-terior rifle platoon, as part of alarger force, in an attack inwoods.

Situations to be based on theissumption that the platoon hasgained the near edge of thewoods, reorganized, and is readyto continue the attack and to bedrawn so as to require-(1) Use of scouts to cover theadvance.(2) Advance to be made by azi-muth direction, and when thewooded area is large, by boundswithin the woods.(3) Formation in line of smallcolilmns.(4, Provision for flank protec-tion.(5) Decisions and orders by theplatoon leader upon encounter-ing resistance within the woods.

StandardScouts precede the platoon.

reconnoitering to front andflanks, and signal the platoon toadvance when all is clear. Forma-tion of platoon varies with dens-ity of woods.

When advancing withinwoods, the platoon leader shouldsupervise movement, take pre-cautions to prevent loss of direc-tion, maintain contact with adja-cent units, and provide security.

Movement should be bybounds. Contact and controlshould be regained after eachbound. The attack of hostile re-sistance should be a series ofmaneuvers to gain local objec-tives, primarily by flanking ac-tion. The platoon leader's de-cisions should be prompt and hisorders clear and brief. He shouldcontrol his platoon by aggres-sive leadership.

r. Night patrol (raid) (see FM 21-100).Scope

A problem involving a rifleplatoon as a night patrol to gaininformation and capture prison-er3.

StandardAfter a thorough map study,

and ground reconnaissance, theplatoon leader makes his plan.His preparations for the raid

Situations to be drawn so as torequire -(I) Organization of the patrol.(2) Orders and instructions bythe platoon leader.(3) Plans and preparations forexecution of the mission.(4) Execution of the raid.

8. WEAPONS PLATOON.a. Security on the march

ScopeA problem involving the em-

ployment of the weapons pla-toon in support of the action ofrifle elements of the support of

should include: rehearsal of uniton similar ground when practic-able;: identification marks visibleat night for each member; sig-nals for control; inspection ofphysical condition, arms, andequipment of members of thepatrol; removal of distinctive in-signia, written matter, maps,documents, and the like; anddesignation of key noncommis-sioned officers to assist in controlduring the movement and theraid.

The platoon leader must beable to organize the patrol toprovide for control and all-around security. His orders mustbe clear and in detail as to du-ties of all members of the patrol.They should know the mission.enemy situation, general route tobe followed, friendly troopsthrough which the patrol willpass, and probable time of re-turn. Instructions to securitygroups must be specific as to ac-tions to be taken in case of dis-covery and an assembly area de-signated for use if the membersof the patrol become separated.

The platoon should reach itsobjective in secrecy,' accomplishits mission, and return throughthe friendly lines.

(see FM 7-10).Standard

The platoon leader shouldmove near the company com-mand group. He should be con-stantly abreast of the situation

an advance guard. and observe the terrain, makingSituations to be based on the

company commander's order andto be drawn so as to require--

Decisions, plans, and orders ofthe platoon leader for the em-ployment of the platoon asfollows:(1) To support the advanceparty.(2) To support the advanceparty in a frontal attack and arifle platoon of the support ina flanking movement.(3) To support the company inan envelopment of both flanks ofhostile resistance holding up theadvance party.

tentative plans to employ theelements of the platoon, in orderthat he may be prepared to en-gage his unit promptly uponorders of the company command-er. He should make prompt de-cisions and issue clear and con-cise orders to subordinates tocarry out the company plan.

He should displace weaponsforward immediately to supportthe company; weapons should beplaced in firing positions withoutdetailed reconnaissance.

He should delegate to the pla-toon sergeant or section leadersupervision of the mortar sec.tion, when he commands thelight machine-gun section.

Positions on the flanks, fromwhich to bring enfilade fire onhostile elements, should besought for the light machine-gunsection. The light machine-gunsection may accompany theflanking platoon in order to se-cure oblique, enfilade, or flank-ing fire and render close supportto that platoon. Mortar squadsmay be attached to platoonsmaking flanking movements, orheld in a central position undercompany control.

b. Approach march (see FM 7-10).Sco]pe

A problem involving the weap-ons platoon of a leading riflecompany in approach march.

Situation, based on the com-pany development order, to bedrawn so as to require-

StandardPlatoon leader's orders should

be clear, brief, and concise. Theyshould cover the disposition ofthe platoon for the advance andprescribe the initial formation.The formation should conform

(I) Orders, disposition, and in.itial formations for advance.

2) Reconnaissance of platoonleader along route of advance forfiring position areas, crossings orminor detours, and dangerousareas.4() Action in support of attack

on hostile elements.(4) Control and movement of

weapon carriers and measurestaken for their antiaircraft andantimechanized defense.

in general to those of the rifleelements. It should be such as tominimize the effect of hostile fire,and retain the greatest practic-able degree of control. Duringthe advance, section leaders up-on their own initiative maychange the formation of theirunits to meet changes in the sit-uation and to minimize the effectof hostile fire.

Continuous reconnaissance byplatoon leader to provide forreadiness for action againsthostile elements. Air-antitankguards are detailed.

When concealment and coverare adequate, weapon carriersusually move with squads. Onopen ground, in daylight, weap-on carriers usually move bybounds in rear of foot elements.Antiaircraft defense should beprovided for organic transportby the caliber .50 machine gunmounted on one of the weaponcarriers. Until the mortars andthe light machine guns are re-moved from carriers, one of thelight machine guns should bemounted on the other weaponcarrier for antiaircraft fires. Thecompany commander designatestwo men to ride each weaponcarrier to man these machineguns in case of air attack and tofunction as a two-man rocketteam in case of mechanized at-tack.

c. Preparation for attack (see FM 7-10).Scope

A problem involving the weap-ons platoon of a rifle companyin occupation of a final assemblyposition by night and the ad-vance to firing position areas,preparatory to supporting a day-light attack.

Situations to be drawn so as torequire-(1) Daylight reconnaissance by

platoon leader to select and markroute to final assembly area andfiring position area.(2) Issuance or orders.(3) Movement to final assemblyarea.(4) Movement into firing positionarea.(5) Disposition of carriers.

StandardThe platoon leader, accompan-

ied by his section leaders, makesa reconnaissance of the final as-sembly area, and of firing posi-tion areas and routes thereto.Routes should be well marked,compass bearings and distancesnoted. Cover positions and initialfiring position areas are selectedfor both sections. Within theposition areas designated by thecompany commander, firing posi-tions for the light machine-gunsection are selected that will en-able it to deliver oblique, en-filade, or flanking fire on de-finitely assigned targets or willpermit it to cover an assignedsector of fire. Forwald troopsand targets should be visiblefrom firing positions. The firingposition of the mortars shouldbe within effective range of theirtargets and within voice or arm-and-hand signaling distance of apoint affording observation oftargets and friendly front-linetroops. Observation posts are se-lected. -I

The platoon leader's ordersshould be clear and definite asto assigned missions and be is-sued from a point affording ob-servation over the zone of action.

Movement to the final as-sembly position and firing posi-tion area should be made quiet-ly. Compact formations shouldbe used to facilitate maintainingcontact and control. Firing posi-tions should be occupied at such

295

time as to insure fire support tothe attacking echelon.

Section leaders check actualfiring positions in semi-daylight,making minor adjustments whererequired.

Carriers are moved as farforward as practicable and areconcealed in terrain affordingprotection from small-arms fire.

d. Attack (see FM 7-10).

ScopeA problem involving the use of

the weapons platoon in supportof an interior front-line riflecompany in a daylight attack.

Situation to be based on thecompany attack order, and to bedrawn-so as to require-(I) Reconnaissance and orders ofthe platoon leader for the em-ployment of the light machine-gun section to:

(a) Support by flanking fire arifle platoon held up.

(b) Protect a flank of the com-pany.

(c) Assist in breaking up a hos-tile counterattack.(2) Series of situations requiringthe employment of the 60-mmmortar section:

(a) For initial support of theattack.

(b) Displacement to conformto the advance of rifle units.

StandardThe weapons platoon leader

reconnoiters, and disposes theplatoon as directed by the com-pany commander.

Through aggressive leadership,the platoon leader should I-constantly in touch with the sit-uation and ready to support theattack of the rifle elements.

In employment of the lightmachine guns every opportunityis exploited to maneuver thesection to positions from whichoblique, enfilade, or flanking firecan be delivered in support ofthe attack. When assigned a mis-sion of flank protection, at leastone gun should be constantly inposition to fire on a hostilecounterattack.

The mortar section shouldsupport the attack from initialfire position areas or follow theadvance of the attacking echelonto position areas within effectiverange. The platoon leader shouldclosely observe the action of theleading rifle echelon and coor-dinate the fire action of the mor-

tars with the fire and maneuverof the rifle units.

Displacement should be effect-ed so as to cause as little inter-ruption as possible in the con-tinuity of mortar support.

e. Continuation of attack (see FM 7-10).Scope

A problem involving the weap-ons platoon of an interior riflecompany in covering the reor-ganization of the company andpreparatory measures to supportcontinuation of the attack.

Situations to be drawn so as torequire-(1) Employment of the platoonto cover the reorganization ofthe company.(2) Reorganization of the pla-toon.(3) Measures taken in prepara-tion to support a continuation ofthe attack.

StandardUpon the capture of an ob-

jective, or a temporary halt bythe attacking echelon for reor-ganization, the platoon leadershould promptly direct sectionleaders to positions from whichtheir weapons can protect thefront and flanks of the leadingrifle platoons against counter-attack during the reorganization.In the absence of orders, sectionleaders take prompt action ontheir own initiative.

Section leaders replace squadleaders and key men who havebecome casualties and reportstrength and ammunition re-quirements to the platoon lead-er. The platoon leader replacescasualties in platoon headquart-ers and among section leaders,and reports the strength and am-munition status of the platoonto the company commander.

Prompt reconnaissance shouldbe initiated by the platoon lead-er for positions to support theresumption of the attack. Resultsof reconnaissance should be re-ported at once to the companycommander. Upon receipt ofcompany commander's orders.the platoon leader takes allnecessary steps to insure promptmovement into newv positions.

297

f. Defense (see FM 5-15, 7-10).Scope

A problem involving the weap-ons platoon in the daylight oc-cupation and organization ofpositions to support a front-line-riflecompany defense area.

Situations to be drawn so as torequire-(I) Reconnaissance of companyarea by platoon leader to locatefiring position areas for pre-scribed final protective lines,sectors of fire, and target areas.(2) Coordination with heavyweapons company.(3) Issuance of orders to sectionleaders.14) Use of weapon carriers to

place at positions a supply ofammunition in excess of normalloads.(5) Disposition of weapon car-riers when ammunition supply isdepleted.(6) Security measures during or-ganization.(7) Supervision by the platoonleader of-

(a) The movement of sectionsand squads by their leaders toposition areas.

(b) Actual selection, prepara-iion, occupation, and organiza-tion of firing positions and in-Irenchments, and the prepara-lion of camouflage by the sec-lions and squads.

(c) SeleCtion of observationposts by the squad leader of each60-mm mortar squad.

(d) Selection of observationposts by the section leader of thelight machine-gun section.

StandardThe platoon leader is furn-

ished the company plan of de-fense and makes a reconnais-sance of the defense area whilethe troops are moving forward.Section leaders, preceding theirunits, meet the platoon leaderon the position to receive hisorder based on the company plan(missions of light machine guns

as prescribed in battalion order).The platoon leader's ordershould indicate: primary and al-ternate firing positions; sectorsof fire; final protective lines forlight machine guns; primary andsecondary target areas for allmortars; and supplementary fir-ing positions and missibns to befired from these positions. Itshould also include instructionsfor the organization of theground, for priority of work, andfor final protective fires (signal,rate, and duration). The platoonleader contacts the heavy weap-ons company commander andcoordinates the location of hislight machine guns.

The prescribed supply of am-munition should be dumpednear weapon emplacements andstored in sheltered places.

During the organization of theposition, weapons occupy emer-gency firing positions preparedto fire assigned missions.

Weapon carriers revert to bat-talion control when ammunitionsupply is completed. The platoonleader supervises the organiza-tion of the positions, or delegates

the supervision of one section tothe platoon sergeant when super-vision of both sections is im-practicable. The actual move-ment of units and the selectionof exact firing positions as wellas the occupation and organiza-tion of the position are accom-plished by the section and squadleaders.

g. Defense at night (see FM 5-15, 5-20, 7-10).scope

A problem involving the weap-ons platoon in the occupationand organization, during thenight, of positions to support afront-line rifle company defensearea.

Situations to be drawn so asto require-(I) A daylight reconnaissance ofthe company defense area by theplatoon leader to locate firingposition areas for prescribed finalprotective lines, sectors of fire,and target areas.(2) Actions and orders of theplatoon leader in effecting move-ment and emplacement of lightmachine guns and 60-mm mort-ars in-

(a) Emergency firing positions.(b) Prepared positions during

darkness without lights.(3) Disposition of weapon car-riers when amunition supply iscompleted.(4) Checking firing positions ofweapons at daylight.

StandardThe platoon leader should ar-

range to have his section andsquad leaders join him in thecompany defense area after theissuance of the company defenseorder. He should issue his pla- .toon order in time to allow themtime during daylight to selectand mark weapon positions, setup aiming stakes, and markroutes of movement for weapons.All markings used must be readi-ly recognizable at night.

Weapons should be moved toposition areas and placed in theemergency firing positions short-ly after dark and organization ofthe ground should proceed quiet-ly. Emplacements should be pre-pared for all the weapons andweapons moved to the preparedpositions. Foxholes 'should bedug and camouflaged for person-nel not sheltered in emplace-ments.

The firing positions should bechecked at daylight and neces-sary adjustments made to enableweapons to fire their assignedmissions.

299

Prescribed amounts of ammu-nition should be dumped andconcealed near weapon positionsand carriers should be releasedto battalion control in time toclear the battle position and beconcealed from hostile observa-tion before daylight.

h. Conduct of defense (see FM 7-10).Scope

A problem involving the 1weap-ons platoon of a front-line riflecompany in the conduct of thedefense against ground, air, andlank attacks.

Situations to be based on thecompany defense order and tobe drawn so as to require:(1) Appropriate decisions, ac-tions, and orders for the employ-ment of the light machine gunsand 60-mm mortars when-

(a) The enemy initiates theattack and approaches within 500yards of the battle position.

(b) The attack approaches theband of final protective fires.

(c) The enemy elfects a pene-tration in the company defensearea.(2) Action against hostile aerialor mechanized forces.

StandardFire of weapons emplaced for

defense of the main line of re-sistance should be withheld untilthe enemy approaches within 500yards. At that time weapons en-gage remunerative targets, the60-mm mortars paying particu-lar attention to targets defiladedfrom the fire of flat-trajectoryweapons.

When final protective fires arecalled for, or ordered, light ma-chine guns open fire along theirassigned final protective lines and60-mm mortars fire on their pri-mary target areas in accordancewith the prearranged fire plan.In the event of a hostile penetra-tion, light machine guns employflanking fire to prevent the en-emy from widening the gap: 60-mm mortarfire should be usedto prevent reinforcements fromentering the gap.

In case of attack by hostile air-craft, all available suitable weap-ons open fire upon command orprearranged signal by responsibleleaders. In case of tank attack,men equiped with rifle grenadelaunchers and antitank rifle gren-ades and two-man rocket teams

300

employ their weapons within ef-fective range. Defenders employ-ing small-arms fire against theaccompanying infantry, or em-ploying antitank rifle grenades,rockets, and small-arms fireagainst hostile armored vehicles,take cover only when necessaryto prevent being crushed. Theyreturn to their firing positions, assoon as tanks have passed, tomeet the attack of foot troops.

i. Night withdrawal (see FM 7-10).Scope

A problem involving a nightwithdrawal by a weapons pla-toon from an interior front-linerifle company defense area.

Situations to be drawn so asto require-'(1) Daylight reconnaissance ofdesignated platoon and companyassembly areas and withdrawalroutes thereto.(2) Based on company order,designation of light machine-gunsquad and 60-mm mortarsquad (s) to remain with cover-ing force.(3) Measures to insure secrecy.(4) Execution of withdrawal bylight machine-gun and 60-mmmortar squads with-

(a) Front-line units.(b) Covering force.

(5) Use of weapon carriers.(6) Ammunition supply.

StandardThe platoon leader's plan

should provide for all contin-gencies that reasonably may beforeseen. Noncommissioned of-ficers concerned'should be noti-fied. Guides should report to thecompany command post to ac-company the party reconnoiter-ing withdrawal routes and as.sembly areas. The hour of with-drawal should be given. Thelight machine-gun squad and 60-mm mortar squad (s) to be leftwith the.company covering forceshould be designated.

During the day, activity shouldbe normal. Night movementsshould be without lights and un-usual noises avoided. Elementsremaining with the coveringforce should simulate so far aspossible the normal ,ctivity ofthe entire unit.

Light machine-gun and mortarsquads should withdraw byhand-carrying their weapons tothe weapon carriers. Weapon car-riers should be brought as far

301

forward as battalion orders andthe situation permit, but suf-ficiently in rear to prevent theenemy hearing truck movementsor loading noises.

Only two men should stay witheach light machine gun or mor-tar left with the company cover-ing force. They should withdrawto the rear on order of the com-pany covering force commander.Vehicles should be left to ex-pedite the withdrawal of thelight machine-gun and mortarsquads of the covering force.

When the ammunition needsof the light machine-gun andmortar squads of the coveringforce are met, the surplus shouldbe removed by hand on with-drawal or destroyed.

j. Daylight withdrawal (see FM 7-10).Scope

A problem involving the day-light withdrawal of a weapons

'platoon as part of an interiorfront-line rifle company.

Situations to :be drawn so asto require-(I) Limited reconnaissance ofassembly positions and routes ofwithdrawal.(2) Employment of the lightmachine-gun section, when thefront-line rifle platoons of thecompany are to be withdrawnby-

(a) Platoon echelon.(b) Thinning from all pla-

toons.(3) Withdrawal of 60-mm mor-tar sections when-

StandardThe platoon leader should

quickly formulate his plan andpromptly issue brief, fragmen-tary orders to subordinate lead-ers, including: time withdrawalstarts, sequence of withdrawal,routes of withdrawals, and initialplatoon and company assemblyareas.

Reconnaissance will frequentlybe coincident with the with-drawal. Routes which afford cov-er and concealment should beselected. If time permits noncom-missioned officers are sent backto pick routes and assembly areasand lead their units to the rear..

When the company withdrawsby platoon, the light machine-

(a) Mortar squads are attachedto rifle platoons.

(b) Employed as a section.(4) Control of units in the with-drawal.(5) Use of weapon carriers.(6) Ammunition supply.

gun section should be withdrawnfirst to a position from which itcan cover gaps created by with-drawal of the platoons. Then thelight machine-gun section shouldwithdraw under cover of rifleelements to its rear. WVhen thecompany withdraws by simul-taneously thinning from pla-toons, light machine guns initi-ally should be held to cover thecompany front. The squladsshould withdraw singly with thelast rifle elements from the for-ward position, one gun movingto a rear covering position whilethe other gun remains in place.

If attached to rifle platoons,60-mm mortar squads should ef-fect their withdrawal under or-ders of rifle platoon leaders.When employed as a section,their withdrawal should be un-der direction of the weapons pla-toon leader.

Withdrawal of light machine-gun and mortar squads shouldbe by defiladed routes and soconducted as to unmask fire ofthe company covering force.YWeapons should be hand-carried

from firing positions to the weap-on carrier which, by using de-filaded routes, should be broughtas far forward as terrain and en-emy action permit.

Section leaders are responsblefor keeping the weapons platoonleader informed of the amountof ammunition on hand. Amnmu-nition arnd supplies that cannotbe removed should be destroyedprior to withdrawal

303

k. Delaying action following daylight withdrawal (seeFM 7-10).

ScopeA problem involving the em-

ployment of the weapons pla-toon of a rifle company in delay-ing action following a daylightwithdrawal.

Situation, based upon the com-pany commander's plans, to bedrawn so as to require-(1) Orders of the platoon leader.(2) Selection of positions by theplatoon leader to deliver long-range light machine-gun firesagainst enemy elements.(3) Selection of positions bymortar squad leaders attached torifle platoons.(4) Provisions for rendering con-tinuous fire support to rifle pla-toons.

StandardOrders should be brief and in

fragmentary form. They shouldcover attachment of mortars torifle platoons and the use ofweapon carriers by elements ofthe platoon.

Positions near crests should beselected and occupied by thelight machine guns to obtainlong-range fields of fire and tofacilitate withdrawals. Positionsselected should be protected byrifle elements.

Mortar squads are usually at-tached to rifle platoons in delay-ing action and the squad leadersselect firing positions for theirsquads. Positions should be neargood observation from which thesquad leader can control the fireof his mortar by voice or by arm-and-hand signals.

Early reconnaissance by theplatoon leader and the mortarsection leader of successive po-sitions in rear w-ill facilitate con-tinuous support of the rifle ele-ments. Light machine guns aredisplaced to the rear by squadechelon. The mortar section lead-er can point out firing positionsfor squads as they move back.

I. Attack in woods (see FM 7-5, 7-10).Scope

A problem involving the em-ployment of the we-aponspla-toon of an interior rifle companyin an attack through a largewoods.

304

StandardIn a dense woods the forma-

tion should be squad columnwith' intervals and distances re-duced to the limit of visibility,and contact should be insured

Situations, based on an ad- between units. The light ma-vance through the woods after areorganization in the near edge,and on the company command-er's orders attaching mortarsquads to rifle platoons, to bedrawn so as to require-(1) Assumption of the proper

formation by the light machine-gun section' and the mortarsquads for advance through thewoods.(2) A series of situations requir-ing-

(a) The light machine-gunsection to take up positions tofire through gaps in riflemen toreduce hostile resistance.

(b) The light machine-gunsquad used to dislodge snipers.

(c) The aggressiveness of themortar squad leader in utilizinga clearing in the woods to sup-port a rifle platoon by mortarfire.

(d) The selection of positionsfor the platoon to support thedebouchmcnt of the companyfrom the woods.

chine-gun' section should followclosely behind the attackingechelon. The mortar squadsshould follow closely behind theplatoons to which they are at-tached. Direction should bemaintained by means of compassand by guiding on the leadingechelon. The light machine-gunsection and mortar squads con-form to the movements of therifle elements.

The light machine guns takeadvantage of clearings or gaps inthe line of riflemen to deliverfire at short ranges in order toreduce resistance. They may alsouse bursts of fire to dislodgesnipers.

By aggressive leadership themortar squad leaders utilizeopenings in the woods as firingpositions to support rifle pla-toons, whenever mortar fire canbe observed.

During the reorganization ofthe company, prior to deboutch-ment from the woods, the weap-ons platoon leader, with the as-sistance of his section leaders,should reconnoiter, select, andoccupy positions from which theplatoon can support the attackof the company to seize its nextobjective.

305

INDEX

Paragraph PageAction, zones of. ........... f............ 21 34Adjacent units, assistance to ............... 25 47Administration:

Medical service and evacuation ........ 216-219' 230Motor maintenance .... ............... 221 221 2Supply ............ ............... 211-213 224

Administration group ..................... 1, 212 1,224Advance guards:

Rifle company as ...................... 100, 102 121,128Support of ........................... 100 121

Advance party ............................ 136 161Aid men, company ........................ 217 250Alternate positions ........................ 4 8Ammunition:

Distribution in assembly area .......... 18 27Storage at firing positions ............ 204 217Supply .... .................... ...... 148, 214 167, 226

Antiaircraft security:Approach march ...................... 15 20Assembly areas ....................... 18 27Attack .......................... 14, 15, 18, 21 19,20,27,34Attack of river line ................... 58 88Bivouacs ............................. 14 19Defense ........................... 80, 93, 182 106, 113, 198Measures for ......................... 12, 21 15, 34On march ............................ 13 18

Antiaircraft fire ........................... 12 15Antimechanized defense:

Approach march ...................... 15 20Assembly areas ........................ 18 27Attack ......................... 14, 15, 18, 21 19,20,27,34Attack of river line ................... 57 88Bivouacs ............................. 14. 19Defenlse .......................... 79, 92, 181 106,112,197

Antimechanzed fire ........................ 12 15Antitank:

Grenades ........................... 2 1Rockets ............................. 3 5

Paragraph PageApproach march:

Antiaircraft security ................... 15 20Antimechanized defense ............... 15 20Rifle company:

Conduct of ...................... 15 20Connecting files .................. 16, 17 22,26Control .......................... 15 17 20Day ............................. 16 22Definition ....................... 15 20Formations ...................... 15-17 20Night ........................... 17 26Objectives ....................... 16 22Orders ......................... 15 20Reconnaissance ................ 16 22Security ......................... 15-17 20

Rifle squads .......................... 151 168Rifle platoon ......................... 114 137Weapons platoon ..................... 186 199

Armorer-artificer ......................... 212 224Artillery, coordination with infantry ........ 10 13Artillery support .......................... 25 47Assault:

Rifle company ........................ 26 53Rifle platoon ......................... 116 146Rifle squad ......... ................ 154 181Weapons platoon ..................... 193-195 208

Assault fire ............................... 155 182

Assembly areas:Rifle company:

Attack .......................... 18 27Reserve company in defense ...... 91 112River crossing .................. 51 85Security ......................... 18 27

Rifle platoon ......................... 114 137Rifle squad .......................... 152 174Weapons platoon............. ....... 18. 114 27, 157

Attack:Battalion order ....................... 19 1 0Light machine-gun section. (See Weapons platoon.)Rifle company:

Action by commander ............. 20 31Action when advance is halted ...... 30 58Advance at night ................. 38 66

Paragraph PageAdvance through hostile position ... 27 55Ammunition supply'. .............. 214 226Approach march .................. 15-18 20Assault ........................ 26 53Assembly positions ............... 18 27Assistance to adjacent units ........ 25 47Command posts ...... ........... 23 47Conduct of ....................... 25, 39 47, 72Conferences with other commanders 19 30Control ........................ 25, 60 47, 88Coordination ........ ....... : 25 47Employment of weapons platoon... 25 47Fire and maneuver... ......... 25 47Formations ...................... 21, 38 34, 66Fortified position ................ 62 91Frontages ....................... 21 34lndivdual protection .............. App. I . 236Infiltration ...................... 40-44 74In woods ......................... 45-48 81Line of departure ................. 24 47Mission .......................... 21 34Movement to line of departure ..... 24 47Night attacks. . ................. 35-39 62Objectives ....................... 21 34Orders ................. 19-22, 215 30, 229Plan of maneuver ................ 25 47Plans . ... 19-22, 38 30,66Positions ........................ 21 34Pursuit . ...... .................. 29 57Raids ........................... 63-65 91Reconnaissance .................. 20-22, 25 31,17Reorganization ................... 28 56Reserve rifle company ............. 31-34 59River lines ...................... 5061 84Scheme of maneuver .............. 21 34Secrecy ...... ............ 38 66Secmuity ......................... 21, 25 34,47Signal communication ........... 60, 222-227 88, 233Sketches ......................... 20 31Supporting weapons ............... 21, 25 34,47Supports ........................ 21, 25 34,47Time of attack ................... 21, 38 34,66Towns and villages. ............... 49 84

Paragraph PageZones of action ................... 21 34

Rifle platoon:Ammunition supply ............... 214 226Approach march ................. 114 137Conduct of attack ................ 116 146Individual protection .......... App. 1 236Pursuit . ......................... 117 151Reconnaissance, plans, and orders.. 115 143Support platoon ......... ........ 118 151

Rifle squad:Ammunition supply ........... 148, 214 167, 226Approach march .................. 151 168Conduct of attack ................. 153 176

Assault ...................... 154 181Fire and movement ........... 153 176Movement to attack ........... 153 176Position and duties of leaders.. 153 176Reorganization ............... 156 182Support squad ................ 157 182

Fire orders ....................... 149 167

Weapons platoon:Ammunition supply ........... 184, 214 199,226Approach march .................. 186 199Assault, supporting fires during .... 193 195 208Assembly areas ............ 18, 114 27,137Conduct of attack ................ 186-197 199Control ......................... 193 208Displacement .................... 194 210Emplacements .................... App. 1 236Employment of ................... 25 47Individual protection .............. App. I 236Movement into position ........... 191 208Night employment ................ 197 211Orders .......................... 190 207Reconnaissance .................. 188 203Reorganization ................... 196 211Selection of firing positions........ 189 204Supporting fires ............. 193, 195 208,210Targets ....................... 192 208

Automatic rifle ........................... 3, 153 5, 176

Battalion attack order ..................... 19 30Actions of company commander...:.... 20 31

309

Paragraph PaegBayonet, rifle and ......................... 2 1Bivouac:

Outpost ........... .. .......... 1 104 130Rifle company ........................ 14 19Weapons platoon ..................... 185 199

Boundaries in defense ..................... 73 93Bugler ................................. 223 233Camouflage ............... Z ........... 203. App. I 216,236Carbine ................................. 2 1Classes of supply .......................... 213 226Combat orders, company commander ...... 9 12Combat outpost ........................ 86, 106, 133 110,134,160Combat patrols ........................... 166 186Command group:

Rifle company ...................... 1, 11 1,14Rifle platoon ........................ 109 136Weapons platoon ..................... 177 1.93

Command post:Rifle company:

Attack ........................... 23 17Defense .......................... 77, 88 105,112

Rifle platoon ......................... 129 158Weapons platoon ...... r ............. 185 198

Communication:Rifle company ...................... 60, 222-227 88, 233Rifle platoon ......................... 110 137Weapons platoon ..................... 183 198

Company:Attack (See Attack.)Commander, duties of .................. 9, 20 12,31Defense (See defense.)Headquarters ........................ 1, 11 1,14Mess location ......................... 209 222Transportation ....................... 212 224

Conduct of fire, weapons platoon ........... 179 196Connecting files ......................... 16, 17, 170 22, 26, 188Connecting groups ........................ 21, 172 34,190Connecting trenches ....................... App. I 236Contact on march ......................... 16 22Control, fire .............................. 145 166Coordination of attack ................... 25, 152 47, 174Counterattacks ........................... 86 110Cover positions. ......... 4. .............. 4 8

Paragraph PageCovering forces ......................... 94 113Crew-served weapons ..................... 3 5Daylight:

Approach march ...................... 16 22March ............................... 13 18Raids ............................... 65 93Withdrawal .......................... 95, 164 116, 185

Defense:Rifle company:

Action by company commander.... 67 94Ammunition supply .............. 214 226Antiaircraft security ............... 80, 93 106, 113Antimechanized defense ........... 79, 92 106,112Assembly area of reserve company.. 91 112Boundaries ..................... 73 98Combat outposts .................. 86 110Command posts .................. 77, 89 105, 112Conduct of ....................... 84 108Counterattacks ................... 86 110Defense areas ..................... 74 99Delaying action ................... 97, 98 118, 119Depth .......................... 73 98Distribution of units .............. 74 99Emplacements .................... App. 1 236Fire plan ............... 75 104Front-line company ............... 72-84 97Frontages and depths ............. 73 98Hasty occupation of position ....... 82 107Individual protection .............. App. 1 236Infiltration ...................... 42 79Limiting points ................... 73 98Local security ..................... 81 106Mission ......................... 66, 86 94, 110Night withdrawal ................. 94 113Observation posts ................. 76, 88 105, 112Occupation of position ............ 82 107Orders .................... ...... 69 96Organization of ground ............ 78, 90 105,112Plan of company commander ....... 67 94Reconnaissance ................... 68 95Relief ........................... 71 96Reserve rifle company ............. 85-93 109Retrograde movements ............ 94-98 113

Paragraph PageSecurity ....................... 81 106Support platoon .................. 74 99Tactical employment .............. 66 94Troop leading .................... 67 94Weapons platoon ................. 74, 87 99,111Withdrawal ...................... 94-96 113

Rifle platoon:Action by platoon leader ........... 120 154Ammunition supply ............... 214 226Antiaircraft security .............. 128 158Antimechanized defense ........... 127 158Command and observation post.... 129 158Conduct of defense ............... 132 159Distribution of squads ............ 125 156Fire plan ......................... 126 157Frontages .................... .... 124 155Individual protection .............. App. I 236Local security ..................... 131 159Organization of ground ............ 130 158Platoon as combat outpost ......... 133 160Platoon defense order ............. 122 155Reconnaissance .................. 121 154Retrograde movements ............ 134 160Tactical employment .............. 119 154

Rifle squad:Ammunition srpply ............... 214 226Antimechanized defense and antiair-

craft security ....... ........ 161 184Conduct of defense ................ 162 184Daylight withdrawal .............. 164 185Night withdawal . ............ 163 185Orders .......................... 159 183Organization of the squad defense

area ............ ......... 160 183Squad defense order .............. 159 183

Weapons platoon:Ammunition, storage at firing posi-

tions .................. . 204 217Ammunition supply ............ 214 226Camouflage ............. ......... 203 216Conduct of defense ................ 206 219Emplacements .................... App. I 236

Paragvraph PagesFiring positions ................... 203 216Individual protection .............. App. 1 236Night employment ................ 208 221Orders ......................... 202 215Positions of leaders ............... 205 217Range cards ...................... 203 216Reconnaissance .................. 199 213Sectors of fire and target areas ...... 201 214Selection of firing position ......... 200 213Withdrawal ...................... 209 222

Defense of obstacles ....................... 175 192Delaying action ........ 0.............. 07, 98 118, 119Depth ................................... 73 98Designation, target ....................... 144 166Directives for tactical training ............. App. 11 260Discipline, fire ........................... 146 166Displacement, weapons platoon ............ 194 210Disposition, night ........................ 83 107Distribution points:

Ammunition ......................... 214 226Company mess location ............. 209 222

Distribution of rifle company:Attack ............................... 21, 38 34, 66Defense ............................. 74, 125 99, 156

Drainage ................................ App. 1 236

Emplacements ............................. App. 1 236Enfilade fire ............................. 21 34Equipment ............................... 5 10Estimate of situation ...................... 8 11Excavation, estimate of .................... App. I 236Extra ammunition ........................ 214 226

Fire and maneuver ....................... 25 47Fire:

Assault .............................. 155 182Conduct of in weapons platoon ......... 179 196Control ............................. 115 166Discipline ............................ 146 166Distribution ......................... 151 168Orders .............................. 149 167Organization of in defense ............ 75 104Superiority ................. ..... 25 47

Firing positions ........................... 4 8

Porgraph Page

Flags, signal ............... ....... 225 233'Flank patrol ............................. 140, 171 163, 188Flank guard:

Rifle company ............... : ........ 103 128Rifle platoon ......................... 103 128

Flashlights, signaling ..................... 225 233Formations, attack ...................... 21 34Fortified position, attack of................ 62 91Foxholes ................................. App. I 236Front-line company:

In defense ......................... 72-8 4 97In withdrawal ......... ....... 94-96 113

Frontages and depths:Attack ..... .. ........ ....... 21 34Defense ............................. 73, 124 98,155

Grenades ................................ 2 1Grenadiers ............................... 21 34Guides ................. ............ 40 74

Hand grenades....: ...................... 2 1Hasty field fortifications .................. App. 1 236Headquarters, rifle company ........ ...... 1, 1,14

Individual protection ...................... App. I 236Individual weapons ....................... 2 1Infantry-artillery coordination ............ 10 13Infiltration ............ ............... 40-44 74

Launchers, grenade ....................... 2 1Light machine gun ................... 3... $ 5Light machine-gun section and squad:

Ammunition supply .................. 184, 214 199,226Antiaircraft security .................. 182 198Antimechanized defense ............ 181 197Approach march ...................... 186 199Attack .............................. 186-197 199Bivouac .......... ................... 185 · 199Communication ..................... 183 198Composition ......................... 176 193Conduct of fire ........................ 179 196Defense .............................. 198-207 212Displacement ....................... 194 210Duties of leaders ...................... 178 195Emplacements ......... ......... App. I 236

ParagrabA PvoeObservation ...................... 180 197Route march ......................... 185 199Selection of firing positions ........... 189 204Signal communication................. 183 198Supporting fire ................... 21, 193, 195 34,208, 210Targets ............................. 192 208Weapon carrier loads .................. 184 199

Limiting points in defense ................. 73 98Line of departure ........................ 24 47Local security in defense ................... 81 106

Machine guns ............................ 3 5Machine gun, light, section and squad. (See Light

machine-gun section and squad.)Maneuver, scheme of ...................... 21 34Maps and sketches ........................ 20 31March outposts ........................... 107, 173 135, 191Marches:

Rifle company ....................... 13, 16, 17 . 18,22,26Rifle platoon ......................... 111 137Weapons platoon ................... . 185 199

Medical service and evacuation:Company aid men .................... . 217 230Orders ............................... 219 231Personnel ............................ 217 230References .................... ... 216 230Relation to battalion medical service... 218 230Sanitation ........................... 220 231

Mess location ............................ 209 222Messengers ............................... 177, 225 193, 233Missions of reserve company ............... 32, 86 60,110Mortar, 60-mm ........................... 3 5Mortar, 60-mm, section and squad. (See 60 rmm

mortar section and squad.)Motor maintenance ....................... 221 231

Night:Attack:

Action wehn objective is captured.. 39 72Advance, rate of ................. 38 66Approach march .................. 17 26Assault .......................... 35-39 62Conduct of ....................... 39 72Infiltration ...................... 43 80

P Paragrap PaeManeuver ....................... 38 66Orders .......................... 36 62Plans ............................ 38 66Reconnaissance ................ 37 64Secrecy .......................... 38 66Security ........................ 38 66Time .. ..................... 38 66Weapons platoon ................. 197 211

Defense ............................ 83, 208 107,221Infiltration ......... ................. 43 80Marches ............................. 13 18Withdrawal ........................... 94, 163 113. 185

Objectives:Rifle company ....................... 21 34Rifle platoon ......................... 114-116 137

Observation post . ......................... 76, 88 105, 112Observation, weapons platoon .............. 180 197Obstacles, defense of ..................... 175 192Occupation and organization of firing positions 203 216Off-carrier positions ..... ............... 4, 20 8, 31Offensive combat. (See Attack.)Orders:

Rifle company:

Aid station....................... 219 231Approach march .................. 15 20Attack . ............ .. 19-22, 36, 52 30,62,85Defense .......................... 69 96Supply .......................... 214 226

Rifle platoon:Approach march ..... ............ 114 137Attack ........................... 115 143Defense ......................... 122 155

Rifle squad:Attack ........................... 153 176Defense .......................... 159 183Fire ............................. 149 167

Signal communication ................. 226 235Weapons platoon:

Attack ........................... 190 207Defense ......................... 202 215

Paragraph Page

Organization of the ground .......... 78, 90, 130, 160 105,112,158, 183

Outguards ....... ........................ 174 191Outposts:

Bivouac ..... .... 104, 139 130, 163Combat . ........ 8........... 86, 106, 133 110,134.160General ...... ........................ 105 133M arch ....... ........................ 107, 173 135, 191Outguards ........................... 174 191Patrols ............................. 171 188

Panels ........... ........................ 224 233Patrols:

Rifle platoon:Advance party ................... 136 161Flank .......... ......... 140 163Rear party ....... ............... 137 162

Rifle squad:Flank . ........... ........... 171 188Point of advance, flank, or icar guaid 167-169 186Reconnaissance ................... 167 186Security ........ ................. 167 186

Pistol ................. .................. 2 1Platoon, rifle. (See Rifle platoon.)Platoon, weapons. (See Weapons platoon.)Point of advance, flank, or rear guard ...... 167-169 186Positions:

Alternate ..................... ....... 4 8Attack .............................. 21 34Cover ............................... 4 .8Dclaying ................ ............ 97, 98 118, 119Firing ...... .... ..................... 4 8Fortified, attack of ........... ....... 62 91Light machine gul,; 60-mm mortar ..... 4 8Occupation of .. ...... ................ 203 216Oil-carrier ........................... 4 20 8, 31Primary ...... ........ :......... . 8Supplemenrary .......... ............ . 4 8Weapons, types of .................... J

Primary positions ....... ........ ...... 4 8Pursuit . ................................. 29, 117 57, 151Pyrotechnics .......................... 25.... 2533

Raids ................. ................ 63-65 91

317

Paragraph Page

Range ............. .................... 147 167Range cards ............................. 203 216

Rear guards:Rifle company as ..................... 102 128Rifle platoon ......................... 137 162Support of ........................... 101 125

Rear party ............................... 137 162Reconnaissance:

Patrols .............................. 167 186Rifle company:

Approach march .................. 16 17 22,26Assembly areas ................... 18 27Attack ................... ... 1922, 25, 37 30,47, 64Defense .......................... 68 95Night attack ...................... 37 64

Rifle platoon:Attack .................. 1........ 111, 115 137,143Defense ......................... 121 154

Rifle squad ........................... 152 174Weapons platoon and elements:

Attack ........................... 188 203Defense ......................... 199 213

Reliefs . . ................................ 71 96Reorganization ................... 28, 116, 156, 196 56, 146,

182, 211Replenishment of ammunition ............ 214 226Reserve rifle company:

Attack ................. '. .......... 31-34 59Defense .... ........ ......... 85-93 109Withdrawal .......................... 95 117

Responsibility for supply .................. 210 224Retrograde movements:

Rifle company ........................ 94-98 113Covering force .................... 94 113Delaying action .................. 97, 98 118, 119Withdrawal ..................... 94-96 113

Rifle platoon ........................ 134 160Revetments .............................. App. 1 236Rifle and bayonet ......................... 2 1Rifle automatic ........................... 3 5

Rifle company:Attack. (See Attack.)Defense. (See Defense.)

Paragraph PageEquipment .......................... 5 10General ............................. I 1Medical service and evacuation ......... 216-219 230Motor maintenance ................. 221 231Offensive combat ...................... 15-65' 20Reserve company. (See Reserve.)Security missions ...................... 99-107 121Signal communication ................. 222-227 233Supply ..................... ......... 212 224Tactical employment .................. 7 10Tactical training . ..................... App. II 260Transportation .................. ..... 6 10

Rifle platoon:Ammunition supply in combat ......... 214 226Attack. (See Attack.)Composition ..................... .... 108 136Control and communication ........... 110 137Defense. (See Defense.)Distribution in company defense ........ 74 99Duties of command group ..... ...... 108 136Route march .................... 111 137Security missions ...................... 135-140 160Sniping ............................. 141 164Special operations .................... 112 137

Rifle squad:Ammunition supply ................... 148, 214 167,226Attack. (See Attack.)Composition ................ ........ 142 165Defense. (See Defense.)Duties of leaders ...................... 143 165Fire control .......................... 145 166Fire discipline ........................ 146 166Range ............................... 147 167Security missions ...................... 165-175 186Target designation ................... 144 166

River line, attack of:Action after landing ................. 56 87Antiaircraft security' ................. 58 88Antimechanized defense............... 57 88Assembly areas .......... ........ 51 85Communication and control . ...... 60 88Crossing the water ..................... 54 87Formations ......................... 55 87

319

Paragraph PageImprovised crossing .................. 51 85Movement to the river ................ 53 86Orders ............................... 52 85Weapon carriers .................... . 59 88

Rocket, antitank .................... 3, 21, 74, App. 1 5,34,99,236Route march:

Rifle company ....................... 13 18Rifle platoon ........................ 111 137Weapons platoon ..................... 185 199

Sanitation ........................ ..... 220 231Scouts, rifle squad .................... .... 151 168Secrecy for night attack .................... 38 66

Security:Patrols .............................. 157 182Rifle company:

Antiaircraft ................ 14,15,18, 21,80 19, 20, 27,34, 106

Antimechanized ........... 14,15,18, 21,79 19, 20, 27,34, 106

Advance guard ................ 100, 102 121,128Approach march ................. 15 20Assembly areas ................... 18 27Attack ........................... 21, 25 34,47Camouflage ..................... App. I 236Combat outpost ................. 106 134Defense .......................... 81 106Flank guard ...................... 103 128Local ............................ 81 106March outpost .............. ..... 107 135Missions ................... ..... 99-107 121Rear guard ...................... 101 125Support of advance guard ......... 100 121Support of bivouac outpost ........ IOL 130Support of rear guard ........... .. 101 125

Rifle platoon:Advance party .................... 136 161Antiaircraft ..................... 116 146Anrimechanized .................. 116 146Attack ........................... 116 146Defense .......................... 131 159Flank patrol ..................... 140 163Flank guard ..................... 103 128

Paragraph PageOutpost (Combat, march, general).. 139 163Rear parrty ....................... 137 162

Rifle squad .......................... 165-175 186Weapons platoon:

Antiaircraft ...................... 182 198Antimechanized .................. 181 197

Signal communication:Rifle company ...................... 60, 222-227 88, 233Rifle platoon ....................... 222-227 233Weapons platoon .................. 183, 222-227 198, 233

Signal communication system:Employment of meauls ................ 225 233Equipment ........................ 224 233Orders .............................. 226 235Personnel ............................ 223 233Rcferences ........................... 222 233Relation to battalion system ........... 227 235

60-mm mortar section and squad:Ammunition supply ................ 184,214 199,226Antiaircraft security .................. 182 198Antimechanized defense ............... 181 197Approach march ..................... 186 199Attack .................... .......... 186-197 199Bivouac .............................. 185 199Composition ........ ....... 176 193Communication ........... . 183 198Conduct of fire .............. 1........ 179 196Defense .............................. 198-209 212Displacement ................. ...... 194 210Duties of leaders ..................... 178 195Emplacements ................... ... App. I 236Observation ............. .... 180 197Route marcl ......................... 185 199Selection of firing position ............ 189 204Signal communication ................. 183 198Supporting fire ................... 26, 193, 195 63, 208, 210Targets . .... . . . ................... ,192 208Weapon carrier loads ................. 184 199

Sketches ...... ........................... 20 31Sniping.. .11 164Snipig ............... ........... 141 164Snipel's rifle .................... 2 1Sound-powered telephone ................ 224 233Sound signals ............................ 225 233

321

Paragraph PageSpoil, disposal of ....................... App. I 236Squad. (See Rifle squad.)Supplementary positions .................. : 4 8Supply:

Administration group ................ 212 224' Class 1, II, 111, and IV ............ .... 213 226Class V .............................. 214 226Orders .............................. 215 229References ........................... 210 224Responsibility ........................ 211 224Transportation ...................... 212 224

Support platoon ....................... 74, 118, 119 99,151,154Support squad ........................... 157 182Supporting fires during attack ........ 21, 25, 193, 195 34,47,

208, 210Supporting weapons ..................... . 21 34Supports, rifle company .................. 21, 25 34, 47

Tactical employment:Rifle company ........................ 7 10Rifle platoon ......................... 119 154

T:cticll training directives ................ App. 11 260Target designation ...................... 144 166Targets, weapons platoon ................. 192 208Telephone, sound-powered ............... 224, 225 233Time of attack .. .................... .... 21 34Training directives, tactical ............... App. II 260Transportation, company .................. 212 224Trenches, connecting ................... A.. App. I 236Truck drivers ............................ 177 193

Warning system, signal ................... 12 15\Weapon carriers .......................... 6 10

Ammunition supply .................. 214 226Assembly areas ....................... 18 27Bivouac ............. ........... ..... 185 199Loads ............................... 184 199Route march ......................... 185 199

Weapons:Clrew served .......................... 3 5Individual .......................... 2 1Supporting .......................... 21 - 34

Weapons emplacements .................. App. I 256

Paragraph PageWeapons platoon ..................... .... I I

Ammmlition supply' ................. 184, 214 199,226Antiaircraft security .................. 182 198Antimechanized defense ............... 181 197Attack .......................... 21, 25, 186-197 34,47, 199Bivouac ............................. 185 199Communication ...................... 183 198Composition ........................ 176 193Conduct of fire ...................... 179 196Defense ........................ 74, 87, 198-209 99,111,212Displacement ...................... 194 210Duties of command group ............. 177 193Duties of section and squad leaders..... 178 195Emplacements ..................... App. 1 236Employment of ...................... 25 47Night employment ................... 197 211Observation .......................... 180 197Orders ............................... 190 207Reconnaissance ....................... 188 203Route march ........................ 185 199Signal communication ................. 183 198Weapon carrier load .................. 184 199

Withdrawal:Rifle company ..................... 94-96 113Rifle platoon ....................... 134 160Rifle squad .......................... 163,164 185Weapons platoon ..................... 209 222

Woods, attack in:Advance through woods ............ 47 82Against near edge .................... 46 81Debouchment from floods............. 48 83Reorganization ....................... 48 83

Zone of reconnaissance ................... 114 137Zones of action ........................... 21 34

323

Documents

RIFLE COMPANY, INFANTRY REGIMENT Army Field Man… · furnished to each rifle platoon for use in sniping. (See FM 23-10.) This rifle is employed by an individual desig-nated by the